Your Operator's Manual: Digital Form Inside The Vehicle

Your Operator's Manual
Digital form inside the vehicle

Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your
vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").
Booklet inside the vehicle

In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multi-
media system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet

You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Digital form as an App

The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple® App store or Google
Play.
Apple® iOS Android™
GLS
Operator's Manual
GLS Operator's Manual
É1665845108yËÍ
1665845108
Order no. P166 0476 13 Part no. 166 584 51 08 Edition A 2018
Mercedes-Benz
Symbols (Y This symbol tells you where you can find Publication details
Registered trademarks: page) more information about a topic.
Internet
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
instruction that is continued on the next
tooth SIG Inc. page. Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
Dis‐ This text indicates a message on the following websites:
RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks play multifunction display/multimedia dis-
of DOLBY Laboratories. play. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg- http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-
son Controls. Editorial office
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc. You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-
gestions you may have regarding this Operator's
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman
Manual to the technical documentation team at
International Industries. the following address:
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-
Customer Assistance Center
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius
3 Mercedes Drive
XM Radio Inc.
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation. Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. Vehicle manufacturer
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols: Daimler AG
G WARNING Mercedesstra e 137
Warning notes make you aware of dangers 70327 Stuttgart
which could pose a threat to your health or Germany
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X Several of these symbols in succession
indicate an instruction with several
steps. As at 08.03.2017
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Digital form via the Internet
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual The Operator's Manual on the Internet pro-
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi- vides easy access to all information
cle before driving. For your own safety and a regarding your vehicle and multimedia sys-
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and tem. It also provides helpful animations,
warning notices in this Operator's Manual. interesting background information and a
Ignoring them could result in damage to the wide array of search options.
vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Digital form as an App
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- can view all the information on your vehicle
Benz Limited Warranty. and multimedia system via mobile Internet
The equipment or product designation of your or download it independently of network
vehicle may vary depending on: access. Available for smartphones or tab-
lets.
RModel
ROrder You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:
RCountry specification
RAvailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations. Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App
The following are integral components of the may not yet be available in your country.
vehicle: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
RDigital Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
RPrinted Operator's Manual A Daimler Company
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains infor-
mative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the afore-
mentioned digital media, you also have the
option to obtain a comprehensive printed
version of the Supplement for your multi-
media system from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
1665845108 É1665845108yËÍ
2 Contents
Memory function ................................. 113

Index ....................................................... 4
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 115
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 26 Exterior lighting ................................... 115
Introduction ........................................... 26 Interior lighting .................................... 119
Operation ............................................... 26 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED
headlamps) .......................................... 120
Introduction ......................................... 27 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halo-
Protecting the environment ................... 27 gen headlamps) ................................... 120
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 27 Windshield wipers ................................ 122
Operator's Manual ................................. 28
Service and vehicle operation ................ 28 Climate control ................................. 125
Operating safety .................................... 30 Overview of climate control systems ... 125
QR codes for the rescue card ................ 32 Operating the climate control sys-
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 32 tems .................................................... 131
Information on copyright ....................... 35 Setting the air vents ............................ 136
At a glance ........................................... 36 Driving and parking .......................... 139

Cockpit .................................................. 36 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 139
Instrument cluster ................................. 37 Driving ................................................. 139
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 38 DYNAMIC SELECT controller ............... 147
Center console ...................................... 39 Automatic transmission ....................... 148
Overhead control panel ......................... 42 Refueling ............................................. 155
Door control panel ................................. 43 Parking ................................................ 161
Driving tips .......................................... 164
Safety ................................................... 44 Driving systems ................................... 174
Panic alarm ............................................ 44 Towing a trailer .................................... 224
Occupant safety .................................... 44 Bicycle rack ......................................... 230
Children in the vehicle ........................... 59
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 65 On-board computer and displays .... 233
Driving safety systems ........................... 66 Important safety notes ........................ 233
Protection against theft ......................... 75 Displays and operation ........................ 233
Menus and submenus ......................... 236
Opening and closing ........................... 77 Display messages ............................... 248
SmartKey ............................................... 77 Warning and indicator lamps in the
Doors ..................................................... 83 instrument cluster ............................... 279
Cargo compartment ............................... 84
Side windows ......................................... 88 Multimedia system ........................... 292
Sliding sunroof ....................................... 92 General notes ...................................... 292
Important safety notes ........................ 292
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 97 Function restrictions ............................ 292
Correct driver's seat position ................ 97 Operating system ................................ 293
Seats ..................................................... 97
Steering wheel ..................................... 108 Stowage and features ...................... 300
Mirrors ................................................. 110 Stowage areas ..................................... 300
Contents 3
Features .............................................. 308
Maintenance and care ...................... 325

Engine compartment ........................... 325
ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 329
Care ..................................................... 330
Breakdown assistance ..................... 338

Where will I find...? .............................. 338
Flat tire ................................................ 339
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 344
Jump-starting ....................................... 346
Towing and tow-starting ...................... 349
Fuses ................................................... 352
Wheels and tires ............................... 354

Important safety notes ........................ 354
Operation ............................................ 354
Winter operation .................................. 356
Tire pressure ....................................... 357
Loading the vehicle .............................. 364
All about wheels and tires ................... 367
Changing a wheel ................................ 374
Wheel and tire combinations ............... 379
Emergency spare wheel ....................... 380
Technical data ................................... 384

Information regarding technical data ... 384
Vehicle electronics .............................. 384
Identification plates ............................. 385
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 386
Vehicle data ......................................... 392
Vehicle data for off-road driving .......... 393
Trailer tow hitch ................................... 395
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Function/notes ............................. 189

Active Lane Keeping Assist
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Activating/deactivating (on-
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- board computer) ............................ 242
tion System) Display message ............................ 268
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Function/information .................... 215
drive) .................................................. 218 Trailer towing ................................. 218
12 V socket Active light function ......................... 117
see Sockets ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 72
115 V socket ...................................... 313 Adaptive Highbeam Assist
360° camera Display message ............................ 261
Cleaning ......................................... 334 Function/notes ............................. 118
Display in the multimedia system .. 205 Switching on/off ........................... 118
Function/notes ............................. 203 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 390
Address book
A see also Digital Operator's Man-
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ual .................................................. 292
Display message ............................ 249 Adjusting the volume
Function/notes ................................ 66 Multimedia system ........................ 293
Important safety notes .................... 66 ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
Warning lamp ................................. 282 Function/notes ............................. 188
Accident Air bags
Automatic measures after an acci- Deployment ..................................... 56
dent ................................................. 59 Display message ............................ 258
Activating media mode Front air bag (driver, front
General notes ................................ 298 passenger) ....................................... 50
Activating/deactivating cooling Important safety notes .................... 49
with air dehumidification ................. 131 Introduction ..................................... 49
Active Blind Spot Assist Knee bag .......................................... 50
Activating/deactivating (on- Occupant Classification System
board computer) ............................ 242 (OCS) ............................................... 51
Display message ............................ 269 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
Function/information .................... 213 lamps ............................................... 45
Trailer towing ................................. 215 Side impact air bag .......................... 51
Active Brake Assist Window curtain air bag .................... 51
Activating or deactivating .............. 242 Air filter (display message) .............. 264
Display message ............................ 254 AIR FLOW ........................................... 132
Function/notes ................................ 67 Air vents
Active Brake Assist with cross- Glove box ....................................... 136
traffic function Important safety notes .................. 136
Activating or deactivating .............. 242 Rear ............................................... 137
Display message ............................ 255 Setting ........................................... 136
Function/notes ................................ 72 Setting the center air vents ........... 136
Important safety notes .................... 73 Setting the side air vents ............... 136
Warning lamp ................................. 290 Air-conditioning system
Active Curve System see Climate control
Display message ............................ 266
Index 5
AIRMATIC package AUTO lights

ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 188 Display message ............................ 260
Function/notes ............................. 188 see Lights
Alarm Automatic car wash (care) ............... 330
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75 Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 75 stop function) .................................... 145
Switching the function on/off Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
(ATA) ................................................ 75 start/stop function) .......................... 144
Alarm system Automatic headlamp mode .............. 115
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Automatic transmission
AMG Accelerator pedal position ............. 150
Adaptive sport suspension sys- Changing gear ............................... 150
tem ................................................ 191 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 148
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 245 Display message ............................ 275
Anti-lock braking system Drive program ................................ 151
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Drive program display .................... 149
Anti-skid chains Driving tips .................................... 150
see Snow chains DYNAMIC SELECT controller ......... 147
Anti-Theft Alarm system Emergency running mode .............. 155
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Engaging drive position .................. 149
Approach/departure angle .............. 173 Engaging neutral ............................ 149
Ashtray ............................................... 311 Engaging park position automati-
Assistance display (on-board com- cally ............................................... 148
puter) .................................................. 241 Engaging reverse gear ................... 148
Assistance menu (on-board com- Engaging the park position ............ 148
puter) .................................................. 241 Important safety notes .................. 148
ASSYST PLUS Kickdown ....................................... 151
Displaying a service message ........ 329 Manual shifting .............................. 152
Hiding a service message .............. 329 Oil temperature (on-board com-
Resetting the service interval dis- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 245
play ................................................ 329 Overview ........................................ 148
Service message ............................ 329 Problem (malfunction) ................... 155
Special service requirements ......... 330 Pulling away ................................... 143
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Starting the engine ........................ 142
Activating/deactivating ................... 75 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 152
Function ........................................... 75 Trailer towing ................................. 151
Switching off the alarm .................... 75 Transmission position display ........ 149
ATTENTION ASSIST Transmission positions .................. 150
Activating/deactivating ................. 242 Automatic transmission emer-
Display message ............................ 265 gency mode ....................................... 155
Function/notes ............................. 207 AUX jacks
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 239 CD/DVD drive ............................... 299
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-
see Qualified specialist workshop ing) ...................................................... 395
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop B
Back button ....................................... 293
6 Index
Bag hook ............................................ 305 Brakes

Ball coupling ABS .................................................. 66
Installing ........................................ 226 BAS .................................................. 67
Removing ....................................... 229 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 390
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 67 Braking assistance appropriate to
Battery (SmartKey) the situation ..................................... 69
Checking .......................................... 80 Display message ............................ 249
Important safety notes .................... 80 High-performance brake system .... 168
Replacing ......................................... 80 Hill start assist ............................... 143
Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes .................. 166
Charging ........................................ 346 Maintenance .................................. 167
Display message ............................ 262 Parking brake ................................ 162
Important safety notes .................. 344 Riding tips ...................................... 166
Jump starting ................................. 346 Warning lamp ................................. 281
Overview ........................................ 344 Braking assistance appropriate to
Belt the situation
see Seat belts Function/notes ................................ 69
Belt warning ......................................... 48 Breakdown
Bicycle rack ....................................... 230 Where will I find...? ........................ 338
Blind Spot Assist see Flat tire
Activating/deactivating ................. 242 see Towing away
Display message ............................ 269 Brightness control (instrument
Notes/function .............................. 209 cluster lighting) ................................... 37
Trailer towing ................................. 211 Bulbs
see Active Blind Spot Assist see Replacing bulbs
BlueTEC
Adding DEF .................................... 158 C
BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 389 California
Bluetooth® Important notice for retail cus-
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 296 tomers and lessees .......................... 28
Searching for a mobile phone Calling up a malfunction
(device manager) ........................... 297 see Display messages
see also Digital Operator's Man- Car
ual .................................................. 292 see Vehicle
Telephony ...................................... 296 Care
Brake Assist 360° camera ................................. 334
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Car wash ........................................ 330
Brake fluid Carpets .......................................... 337
Display message ............................ 254 Display ........................................... 335
Notes ............................................. 390 Exhaust pipe .................................. 334
Brake force distribution Exterior lights ................................ 333
see EBD (electronic brake force Gear or selector lever .................... 336
distribution) Interior ........................................... 335
Brake lamps Matte finish ................................... 332
Display message ............................ 260 Notes ............................................. 330
Brake linings Paint .............................................. 332
Display message ............................ 254 Plastic trim .................................... 335
Index 7
Power washer ................................ 331 Children in the vehicle

Rear view camera .......................... 334 Important safety notes .................... 59
Roof lining ...................................... 337 Cigarette lighter ................................ 312
Seat belt ........................................ 336 Cleaning
Seat cover ..................................... 336 Mirror turn signal ........................... 334
Sensors ......................................... 334 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 335
Side running board ........................ 334 Climate control
Steering wheel ............................... 336 3-zone automatic climate control
Trim pieces .................................... 336 with additional rear-compartment
Washing by hand ........................... 331 climate control ............................... 129
Wheels ........................................... 333 Automatic climate control (3-
Windows ........................................ 333 zone) .............................................. 127
Wiper blades .................................. 333 Controlling automatically ............... 132
Wooden trim .................................. 336 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 131
Cargo compartment cover Defrosting the windows ................. 134
Notes/how to use ......................... 306 Defrosting the windshield .............. 133
Cargo compartment enlargement Dual-zone automatic climate con-
Important safety notes .................. 303 trol ................................................. 125
Cargo compartment floor General notes ................................ 125
Important safety notes .................. 307 Indicator lamp ................................ 132
Opening/closing ............................ 307 Ionization ....................................... 135
Stowage well (under) ..................... 307 Maximum cooling .......................... 134
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 305 Notes on using the automatic cli-
CD mate control .................................. 131
see also Digital Operator's Man- Overview of systems ...................... 125
ual .................................................. 292 Problem with the rear window
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 239 defroster ........................................ 135
Center console Problems with cooling with air
Lower section .................................. 40 dehumidification ............................ 132
Upper section .................................. 39 Rear control panel ......................... 127
Central locking Rear control panel (3-zone auto-
Automatic locking (on-board com- matic climate control with addi-
puter) ............................................. 244 tional rear-compartment climate
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 77 control) .......................................... 129
Child Refrigerant ..................................... 391
Restraint system .............................. 61 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 392
Child seat Setting the air distribution ............. 133
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 64 Setting the air vents ...................... 136
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Setting the airflow ......................... 133
anchors ............................................ 62 Setting the climate mode (AIR
On the front-passenger seat ............ 64 FLOW) ............................................ 132
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 64 Setting the temperature ................ 132
Top Tether ....................................... 63 Switching air-recirculation mode
Child-proof locks on/off ............................................ 135
Important safety notes .................... 64 Switching on/off ........................... 131
Rear doors ....................................... 65 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 135
Children Switching the rear window
Special seat belt retractor ............... 60 defroster on/off ............................ 134
8 Index
Switching the ZONE function Function/notes ............................. 174

on/off ............................................ 133 Important safety notes .................. 174
Coat hooks ......................................... 306 Storing and maintaining current
Cockpit speed ............................................. 175
Overview .......................................... 36 Cup holder
see Instrument cluster Center console .............................. 309
Collapsible spare wheel Important safety notes .................. 308
Inflating ......................................... 382 Rear compartment ......................... 309
see Emergency spare wheel Temperature controlled ................. 309
COMAND Third row of seats .......................... 310
Driving dynamics display ............... 223 Customer Assistance Center
COMAND display (CAC) ..................................................... 31
Cleaning ......................................... 335 Customer Relations Department ....... 31
Combination switch .......................... 116
Connecting a USB device D
see also Digital Operator's Man-
Data
ual .................................................. 292
Consumption statistics (on-board see Technical data
Data carrier
computer) .......................................... 236
Selecting ........................................ 239
Controller ........................................... 293
Daytime running lamps
Convenience closing feature .............. 90
Display message ............................ 260
Convenience opening feature ............ 90 Function/notes ............................. 115
Coolant (engine) Switching on/off (on-board com-
Checking the level ......................... 328 puter) ............................................. 243
Display message ............................ 261 Declarations of conformity ................. 30
Filling capacity ............................... 391 DEF
Important safety notes .................. 390 Adding ........................................... 158
Temperature (on-board computer, Display message ............................ 264
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 245 Filling capacity ............................... 389
Temperature gauge ........................ 234 Important safety notes .................. 389
Warning lamp ................................. 288 Diagnostics connection ...................... 31
Cooling
Differential lock (display mes-
see Climate control
sage) ................................................... 267
Copyright ............................................. 35
Digital Operator's Manual
Cornering light function
Help ................................................. 26
Display message ............................ 260
Introduction ..................................... 26
Crash-responsive emergency light-
Digital speedometer ......................... 237
ing ....................................................... 120
DIRECT SELECT lever
Crosswind Assist ................................. 71
Automatic transmission ................. 148
Crosswind driving assistance ............ 71 Display messages
Cruise control ASSYST PLUS ................................ 329
Activating ....................................... 175 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 248
Activation conditions ..................... 175 Driving systems ............................. 265
Cruise control lever ....................... 175 Engine ............................................ 261
Deactivating ................................... 176 General notes ................................ 248
Display message ............................ 271 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 248
Driving system ............................... 174 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 278
Index 9
Lights ............................................. 260 SETUP (on-board computer,

Safety systems .............................. 249 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 246
SmartKey ....................................... 278 Drive programs
Tires ............................................... 273 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 149
Vehicle ........................................... 275 Driver's door
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC see Doors
Activating ....................................... 178 Driving
Activation conditions ..................... 178 Important safety notes .................. 139
Cruise control lever ....................... 178 Driving abroad
Display Message ............................ 270 Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 330
Displays in the instrument cluster .. 181 Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 213
Driving tips .................................... 182 Driving in mountainous terrain
Function/notes ............................. 176 Approach/departure angle ............ 173
Important safety notes .................. 176 Driving lamps
Setting the specified minimum see Daytime running lamps
distance ......................................... 180 Driving off-road
Stopping ........................................ 179 see Off-road driving
Switching off .................................. 180 Driving safety system
Warning lamp ................................. 290 Active Brake Assist .......................... 67
Distance recorder Braking assistance appropriate to
see Odometer the situation ..................................... 69
see Trip odometer Driving safety systems
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 290 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 66
Distance warning function Active Brake Assist with cross-
Function/notes ................................ 68 traffic function ................................. 72
Warning lamp ................................. 290 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 72
Doors BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 67
Automatic locking (on-board com- Distance warning function ............... 68
puter) ............................................. 244 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 84 bution) ............................................. 72
Central locking/unlocking ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
(SmartKey) ....................................... 77 gram) ............................................... 69
Control panel ................................... 43 Important safety information ........... 66
Display message ............................ 277 Overview .......................................... 66
Emergency locking ........................... 84 STEER CONTROL ............................. 75
Emergency unlocking ....................... 84 Driving system
Important safety notes .................... 83 AIRMATIC package ........................ 188
Opening (from inside) ...................... 83 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 176
Overview .......................................... 83 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
Power closing .................................. 84 Steering Pilot ................................. 182
Drinking and driving ......................... 165 Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 192
Drive program Parking Pilot .................................. 195
Automatic transmission ................. 151 Driving systems
Off-Road program (vehicles with- 360°camera .................................. 203
out Off-Road Engineering pack- Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 213
age) ............................................... 219 Active Curve System ...................... 189
Off-road programs (vehicles with Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 215
Off-Road Engineering package) ...... 220 ADS ............................................... 188
10 Index
AMG adaptive sport suspension DYNAMIC SELECT controller

system ........................................... 191 Automatic transmission ................. 147
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 207
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 209 E
Cruise control ................................ 174
EASY-ENTRY feature
Display message ............................ 265
Activating/deactivating ................. 244
Driving Assistance Plus package ... 213
Function/notes ............................. 109
HOLD function ............................... 187
EASY-EXIT feature
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 211
Crash-responsive ........................... 110
Level control (vehicle with the Off-
Function/notes ............................. 109
Road Engineering package) ........... 184
Switching on/off ........................... 244
Rear view camera .......................... 199
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 208
bution)
Driving tips
Display message ............................ 251
Automatic transmission ................. 150
Function/notes ................................ 72
Brakes ........................................... 166
ECO display
Break-in period .............................. 139
Function/notes ............................. 165
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 182
On-board computer ....................... 237
Downhill gradient ........................... 166
ECO start/stop function
Drinking and driving ....................... 165
Automatic engine start .................. 145
Driving in winter ............................. 169
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 144
Driving on flooded roads ................ 168
Deactivating/activating ................. 145
Driving on sand .............................. 172
General information ....................... 144
Driving on wet roads ...................... 168
Important safety notes .................. 144
Driving over obstacles ................... 173
Introduction ................................... 144
Exhaust check ............................... 165
Electronic Stability Program
Fuel ................................................ 164
General .......................................... 164 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Hydroplaning ................................. 168 Emergency
Icy road surfaces ........................... 169 Automatic measures after an acci-
Limited braking efficiency on sal- dent ................................................. 59
ted roads ....................................... 167 Emergency release
Off-road driving .............................. 170 Driver's door .................................... 84
Off-road fording ............................. 169 Vehicle ............................................. 84
Snow chains .................................. 356 Emergency spare wheel
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 139 General notes ................................ 380
Tire ruts ......................................... 172 Important safety notes .................. 380
Towing a trailer .............................. 225 Removing ....................................... 381
Traveling uphill ............................... 173 Storage location ............................ 381
Wet road surface ........................... 167 Stowing .......................................... 381
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Emergency Tensioning Devices
Display message ............................ 267 Activation ......................................... 56
Function/notes ............................. 218 Emergency unlocking
DVD video Tailgate ............................................ 88
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 239 Emissions control
see also Digital Operator's Man- Service and warranty information .... 28
ual .................................................. 292 Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 288
Index 11
Display message ............................ 261 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-

ECO start/stop function ................ 144 tions) .................................................. 334
Engine number ............................... 386 Exterior lighting
Irregular running ............................ 146 see Lights
Jump-starting ................................. 346 Exterior mirrors
Starting (important safety notes) ... 141 Adjusting ....................................... 110
Starting problems .......................... 146 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 112
Starting the engine with the Folding in when locking (on-board
SmartKey ....................................... 142 computer) ...................................... 245
Starting via smartphone ................ 142 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 111
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 142 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 111
Switching off .................................. 162 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 112
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 352 Setting ........................................... 111
Engine electronics Storing settings (memory func-
Problem (malfunction) ................... 146 tion) ............................................... 113
Engine jump starting Storing the parking position .......... 112
see Jump starting (engine) Eyeglasses compartment ................. 302
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 327 F
Additives ........................................ 390
Checking the oil level ..................... 326 Favorites
Checking the oil level using the Overview ........................................ 294
dipstick .......................................... 327 Filler cap
Display message ............................ 263 see Refueling
Filling capacity ............................... 390 Flat tire
Notes about oil grades ................... 389 MOExtended tires .......................... 340
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 326 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 339
Temperature (on-board computer, TIREFIT kit ...................................... 341
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 245 see Emergency spare wheel
Engine switch-off Floormats ........................................... 324
see ECO start/stop function Fog lamps (extended range) ............. 118
Entering an address Folding the rear bench seat for-
see also Digital Operator's Man- wards/back ....................................... 303
ual .................................................. 292 Fording
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Off-road ......................................... 169
gram) On flooded roads ........................... 168
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 246 Frequencies
Characteristics ................................. 70 Mobile phone ................................. 384
Deactivating/activating ................... 71 Two-way radio ................................ 384
Display message ............................ 249 Fuel
Function/notes ................................ 69 Additives ........................................ 388
General notes .................................. 69 Consumption statistics .................. 236
Important safety information ........... 70 Displaying the current consump-
Warning lamp ................................. 284 tion ................................................ 237
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- Displaying the range ...................... 237
tem) ...................................................... 70 Driving tips .................................... 164
Exhaust check ................................... 165 Fuel gauge ....................................... 37
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 387
12 Index
Important safety notes .................. 387 H

Low outside temperatures ............. 388
Problem (malfunction) ................... 158 Handbrake
Quality (diesel) ............................... 388 see Parking brake
Refueling ........................................ 155 Hazard warning lamps ...................... 117
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 387 Head restraints
Fuel filler flap Adjusting ......................................... 99
Opening ......................................... 157 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100
Fuel filter (display message) ............ 264 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 99
Fuel level Adjusting (rear) .............................. 100
Calling up the range (on-board Installing/removing (rear) .............. 100
computer) ...................................... 237 Luxury ............................................ 100
Fuel tank Headlamps
Capacity ........................................ 387 Fogging up ..................................... 119
Problem (malfunction) ................... 158 see Automatic headlamp mode
Fuses Heating
Allocation chart ............................. 352 see Climate control
Before changing ............................. 352 High beam flasher ............................. 116
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 352 High-beam headlamps
Fuse box in the engine compart- Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 118
ment .............................................. 353 Display message ............................ 260
Fuse box under rear bench seat .... 353 Replacing bulbs ............................. 121
Important safety notes .................. 352 Switching on/off ........................... 116
Highway mode ................................... 118
G Hill start assist .................................. 143
HOLD function
Garage door opener Deactivating ................................... 187
Clearing the memory ..................... 324 Display message ............................ 268
General notes ................................ 321 Function/notes ............................. 187
Important safety notes .................. 321 Home address
Opening/closing the garage door .. 323 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Problems when programming ........ 323 ual .................................................. 292
Programming (button in the rear- Hood
view mirror) ................................... 322 Closing ........................................... 326
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 322 Display message ............................ 277
Gear indicator (on-board com- Important safety notes .................. 325
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 245 Opening ......................................... 325
Genuine parts ...................................... 27 Horn ...................................................... 36
Glove box ........................................... 301 Hydroplaning ..................................... 168
Google™ Local Search
see also Digital Operator's Man- I
ual .................................................. 292
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini- Ignition lock
tion) .................................................... 373 see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 75
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Index 13
Indicators Knee bag .............................................. 50

see Turn signals
Insect protection on the radiator .... 326 L
Instrument cluster
Lamps
Overview .......................................... 37
see Warning and indicator lamps
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 37
Lane Keeping Assist
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 233
Intelligent Light System
Display message ............................ 268
Function/information .................... 211
Display message ............................ 260
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Overview ........................................ 117
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 246
Interior lighting
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Automatic control .......................... 120
anchors ................................................ 62
Emergency lighting ........................ 120
Level control
General notes ................................ 119
Manual control ............................... 119 AIRMATIC ...................................... 190
Overview ........................................ 119 Level control (display message) ...... 265
Reading lamp ................................. 119 Level control (vehicle with the Off-
Road Engineering package)
iPod®
Basic settings ................................ 184
Function/notes ............................. 184
ual .................................................. 292
License plate lamp (display mes-
J
sage) ................................................... 260
Jack Light function, active
Storage location ............................ 339 Display message ............................ 260
Using ............................................. 376 Light sensor (display message) ....... 260
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 346 Light switch
Operation ....................................... 115
K Lights
Activating/deactivating the Intel-
Key positions
ligent Light System ........................ 243
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 140
Active light function ....................... 117
SmartKey ....................................... 140
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 118
KEYLESS-GO
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 115
Activating ......................................... 78
Fog lamps (extended) .................... 118
Convenience closing feature ............ 91
Hazard warning lamps ................... 117
Deactivation ..................................... 78
High beam flasher .......................... 116
Display message ............................ 278
High-beam headlamps ................... 116
Locking ............................................ 78
Highway mode ............................... 118
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 141
Light switch ................................... 115
Start function ................................... 79
Low-beam headlamps .................... 116
Start/Stop button .......................... 140
Off-road lights ................................ 118
Starting the engine ........................ 142
Parking lamps ................................ 116
Unlocking ......................................... 78
Rear fog lamp ................................ 116
Kickdown
Standing lamps .............................. 116
Driving tips .................................... 151
Manual gearshifting ....................... 154
14 Index
Switching the daytime running Remote fault diagnosis .................. 319

lamps on/off (on-board com- Remote vehicle locking .................. 319
puter) ............................................. 243 Roadside assistance button ........... 316
Turn signals ................................... 116 Search & Send ............................... 318
see Interior lighting Self-test ......................................... 315
see Replacing the bulbs Speed alert .................................... 320
Loading guidelines ............................ 300 System .......................................... 314
Locking Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 321
see Central locking Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 319
Locking (doors) Mechanical key
Automatic ........................................ 84 Function/notes ................................ 79
Emergency locking ........................... 84 General notes .................................. 79
From inside (central locking but- Inserting .......................................... 79
ton) .................................................. 83 Locking vehicle ................................ 84
Locking centrally Removing ......................................... 79
see Central locking Unlocking the driver's door .............. 84
Locking verification signal (on- Media Interface
board computer) ............................... 244 USB port in the armrest of the
LOW RANGE center console ............................... 301
Display message ............................ 267 see Digital Operator's Manual
Off-road gear ................................. 221 Memory card (audio) ......................... 239
LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 221 Memory function ............................... 113
Low-beam headlamps Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
Display message ............................ 260 360°camera .................................. 203
Replacing bulbs ............................. 121 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 213
Switching on/off ........................... 116 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 215
Lumbar support ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 207
Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 106 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 209
Luxury head restraints ..................... 100 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 176
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
M Steering Pilot ................................. 182
General notes ................................ 174
M+S tires ............................................ 356 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 211
Malfunction message Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 192
see Display messages Parking Pilot .................................. 195
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
tions) .................................................. 332 occupant protection PLUS) .............. 59
mbrace Rear view camera .......................... 199
Call priority .................................... 317 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 208
Display message ............................ 254 Message memory (on-board com-
Downloading destinations puter) .................................................. 248
(COMAND) ..................................... 318 Mirror
Downloading routes ....................... 320 Vanity mirror (sun visor) ................ 310
Emergency call .............................. 315 Mirror turn signal
General notes ................................ 314 Cleaning ......................................... 334
Geo fencing ................................... 321 Mirrors
Info call button .............................. 317 see Exterior mirrors
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 319
Index 15
see Rear-view mirror O

see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-
Conditions ....................................... 52
face) .............................................. 296
Faults ............................................... 55
Connecting (device manager) ........ 297
Operation ......................................... 52
Frequencies ................................... 384
System self-test ............................... 54
Installation ..................................... 384
Occupant safety
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 240
Air bags ........................................... 49
Transmission output (maximum) .... 384
Modifying the programming Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 59
(SmartKey) ........................................... 79
Belt warning ..................................... 48
MOExtended tires .............................. 340
Children in the vehicle ..................... 59
Mounting wheels
Important safety notes .................... 44
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 378
Introduction to the restraint sys-
Mounting a new wheel ................... 377
tem .................................................. 44
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 375
Occupant Classification System
Raising the vehicle ......................... 376
(OCS) ............................................... 51
Removing a wheel .......................... 377
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
Securing the vehicle against roll-
lamps ............................................... 45
ing away ........................................ 375
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 65
MP3
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-
Operation ....................................... 239
pant protection) ............................... 58
ual .................................................. 292 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
Multifunction display occupant protection PLUS) .............. 59
Function/notes ............................. 235 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 45
Permanent display ......................... 243 Seat belt .......................................... 45
Multifunction steering wheel OCS
Operating the on-board computer .. 234 Conditions ....................................... 52
Overview .......................................... 38 Faults ............................................... 55
Multimedia system Operation ......................................... 52
Switching on and off ...................... 293 System self-test ............................... 54
Music files Odometer ........................................... 236
see also Digital Operator's Man- Off-road driving
ual .................................................. 292 Approach/departure angle ............ 394
Checklist after driving off-road ...... 172
N Checklist before driving off-road .... 171
Fording depth ................................ 393
Navigation General information ....................... 170
Entering a destination .................... 294 Important safety notes .................. 170
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 237 Maximum gradient climbing abil-
see also Digital Operator's Man- ity .................................................. 394
ual .................................................. 292 Traveling uphill ............................... 173
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- Off-road lights .................................... 118
cle ....................................................... 139 Off-Road program (vehicles with-
out Off-Road Engineering package)
Function/notes ............................. 219
16 Index
Off-road programs (vehicles with Important safety notes .................... 30

Off-Road Engineering package) Operating system
Function/notes ............................. 220 see On-board computer
Off-road drive program .................. 220 Operation
Offroad Plus drive program ............ 221 Digital Operator's Manual ................ 26
Off-road programs (vehicles with Operator's Manual
the Off-Road Engineering package) Overview .......................................... 28
Displays in the COMAND display ... 223 Vehicle equipment ........................... 28
Off-road system Outside temperature display ........... 233
4MATIC .......................................... 218 Overhead control panel ...................... 42
DSR ............................................... 218 Override feature
LOW RANGE off-road gear ............. 221 Rear side windows ........................... 65
Off-road 4ETS .................................. 70
Off-road ABS .................................... 67 P
Off-road ESP® .................................. 71
Paddle shifters
Off-road programs (vehicles with
see Steering wheel paddle shifters
Off-Road Engineering package) ...... 220
Oil Paint code number ............................ 385
see Engine oil Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 332
On and Offroad menu (on-board Panic alarm .......................................... 44
computer) .......................................... 245 Panorama roof with power tilt/
On-board computer sliding panel
AMG menu ..................................... 245 Important safety notes .................... 92
Assistance menu ........................... 241 Opening/closing the roller sun-
Audio menu ................................... 239 blind ................................................. 95
Convenience submenu .................. 244 Operating ......................................... 94
Display messages .......................... 248 Operating the roller sunblinds for
Displaying a service message ........ 329 the sliding sunroof ........................... 94
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 181 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 96
Factory settings submenu ............. 245 Reversing feature ............................. 93
Important safety notes .................. 233 Parking
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 243 Important safety notes .................. 161
Lighting submenu .......................... 243 Parking brake ................................ 162
Menu overview .............................. 236 Position of exterior mirror, front-
Message memory .......................... 248 passenger side ............................... 112
Navigation menu ............................ 237 Rear view camera .......................... 199
On and Offroad menu .................... 245 see PARKTRONIC
Operation ....................................... 234 Parking aid
RACETIMER ................................... 246 Parking Pilot .................................. 195
Service menu ................................. 242 see 360° camera
Settings menu ............................... 243 see Exterior mirrors
Standard display ............................ 236 see PARKTRONIC
Telephone menu ............................ 240 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Trip menu ...................................... 236 Deactivating/activating ................. 194
Vehicle submenu ........................... 244 Driving system ............................... 192
Video DVD operation ..................... 239 Function/notes ............................. 192
Operating safety Important safety notes .................. 192
Declaration of conformity ................ 30 Problems (malfunctions) ................ 195
Index 17
Sensor range ................................. 193 Protection against theft

Towing a trailer .............................. 192 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75
Warning display ............................. 194 Immobilizer ...................................... 75
Parking assistance Protection of the environment
see Driving system General notes .................................. 27
Parking brake Pulling away
Applying automatically ................... 163 Automatic transmission ................. 143
Applying or releasing manually ...... 163 General notes ................................ 143
Display message ............................ 251 Hill start assist ............................... 143
Electric parking brake .................... 162 Trailer ............................................ 143
Emergency braking ........................ 164
General notes ................................ 162 Q
Releasing automatically ................. 163
QR code
Warning lamp ................................. 287
Parking lamps Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Rescue card ..................................... 32
Switching on/off ........................... 116
Parking Pilot Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31
Canceling ....................................... 199
Detecting parking spaces .............. 196 R
Display Message ............................ 269 RACE TIMER (on-board computer,
Exiting a parking space .................. 198 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 246
Function/notes ............................. 195 Radiator cover ................................... 326
Important safety notes .................. 195 Radio
Parking .......................................... 197 Selecting a station ......................... 239
PASSENGER AIR BAG Radio mode
Display message ............................ 258 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Indicator lamps ................................ 45 ual .................................................. 292
Problem (malfunction) ................... 258 Radio-controlled devices (instal-
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 65 ling) ..................................................... 324
Phone book Radio-wave reception/transmis-
see also Digital Operator's Man- sion in the vehicle
ual .................................................. 292 Declaration of conformity ................ 30
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Reading lamp ..................................... 119
tions) .................................................. 335 Rear bench seat
Power locks ......................................... 84 Folding forwards/back .................. 304
Power washers .................................. 331 Rear compartment
Power windows Exit/entry position (3rd row of
see Side windows seats) ............................................. 103
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Setting the air vents ...................... 137
protection) Setting the temperature ................ 132
Display message ............................ 255 Rear fog lamp
Operation ......................................... 58 Display message ............................ 260
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory Switching on/off ........................... 116
occupant protection PLUS) Rear Seat Entertainment System
Display message ............................ 255 AUX jacks ...................................... 299
Operation ......................................... 59 AUX jacks CD/DVD drive .............. 299
18 Index
Rear seats Warning lamp ................................. 287

Adjusting ....................................... 101 Warning lamp (function) ................... 45
Display message ............................ 277 Reversing feature
Rear view camera Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 93
Cleaning instructions ..................... 334 Roller sunblinds ............................... 95
Display in the multimedia system .. 200 Side windows ................................... 89
Function/notes ............................. 199 Sliding sunroof ................................. 93
Switching on/off ........................... 200 Tailgate ............................................ 85
Rear window defroster Reversing lamps (display mes-
Problem (malfunction) ................... 135 sage) ................................................... 260
Switching on/off ........................... 134 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 29
Rear window wiper Roller sunblind
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 124 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Switching on/off ........................... 123 sliding panel ..................................... 94
Rear-view mirror Rear side windows ......................... 310
Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 110 Roof carrier ........................................ 308
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 112 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Reflective safety jacket .................... 338 guidelines) ......................................... 337
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Roof load (maximum) ........................ 392
tem) Route (navigation)
Important safety notes .................. 391 see Route guidance (navigation)
Refueling Route guidance
Fuel gauge ....................................... 37 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Important safety notes .................. 155 ual .................................................. 292
Refueling process .......................... 156 Route guidance (navigation) ............ 237
see Fuel Route guidance active ...................... 238
Remote control
Garage door opener ....................... 321 S
Replacing bulbs
General notes ................................ 120 Safety
High-beam headlamps ................... 121 Children in the vehicle ..................... 59
Important safety notes .................. 120 see Occupant safety
Installing/removing the cover see Operating safety
(front wheel arch) .......................... 121 Safety system
Low-beam headlamps .................... 121 see Driving safety systems
Overview of bulb types .................. 120 SD card
Turn signals (front) ......................... 122 Inserting ........................................ 298
Reporting safety defects .................... 32 Inserting/removing ........................ 298
Rescue card ......................................... 32 Removing ....................................... 298
Reserve (fuel tank) SD memory card
see Fuel see also Digital Operator's Man-
Reserve fuel ual .................................................. 292
Display message ............................ 263 Selecting ........................................ 239
Warning lamp ................................. 288 Search & Send
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 135 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Restraint system ual .................................................. 292
Display message ............................ 256 Seat
Introduction ..................................... 44 Correct driver's seat position ........... 97
Index 19
Seat belts Service message

Adjusting the driver's and front- see ASSYST PLUS
passenger seat belt ......................... 48 Service products
Adjusting the height ......................... 48 Brake fluid ..................................... 390
Cleaning ......................................... 336 Coolant (engine) ............................ 390
Correct usage .................................. 47 DEF special additives ..................... 389
Fastening ......................................... 48 Engine oil ....................................... 389
Important safety guidelines ............. 46 Fuel ................................................ 387
Introduction ..................................... 45 Important safety notes .................. 386
Releasing ......................................... 48 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
Switching belt adjustment on/off tem) ............................................... 391
(on-board computer) ...................... 244 Washer fluid ................................... 391
Warning lamp ................................. 280 Setting the air distribution ............... 133
Warning lamp (function) ................... 48 Setting the airflow ............................ 133
Seats Setting the date/time format
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- ual .................................................. 292
port ................................................ 106 Setting the language
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 99 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Calling up a stored setting (mem- ual .................................................. 292
ory function) .................................. 114 Setting the time
Cleaning the cover ......................... 336 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Entry position (3rd row of seats) .... 103 ual .................................................. 292
Exit position (3rd row of seats) ...... 104 Settings
Folding down/up (third row of Factory (on-board computer) ......... 245
seats) ............................................. 101 On-board computer ....................... 243
Folding the 2nd row of seats SETUP (on-board computer,
forward electrically ........................ 105 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 246
Folding the 2nd row of seats Side impact air bag ............................. 51
forward manually ........................... 103 Side marker lamp (display mes-
Folding the rear bench seat for- sage) ................................................... 260
wards/back ................................... 303 Side windows
Important safety notes .................... 97 Cleaning ......................................... 333
Overview .......................................... 97 Convenience closing feature ............ 90
Seat heating problem .................... 108 Convenience opening feature .......... 90
Seat ventilation problem ................ 108 Hinged side windows ....................... 89
Storing settings (memory func- Important safety information ........... 88
tion) ............................................... 113 Opening/closing .............................. 89
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 106 Overview .......................................... 88
Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 107 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92
Section Resetting ......................................... 91
Sliding sunroof ................................. 92 Reversing feature ............................. 89
Selector lever SIRIUS services
Cleaning ......................................... 336 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 334 ual .................................................. 292
Service menu (on-board com- Sliding sunroof
puter) .................................................. 242 Important safety notes .................... 92
20 Index
Opening/closing .............................. 93 Start/Stop button

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 96 Starting the engine ........................ 142
Resetting ......................................... 94 Start/stop function
see Panorama roof with power see ECO start/stop function
tilt/sliding panel Starting (engine) ................................ 141
SmartKey STEER CONTROL .................................. 75
Changing the battery ....................... 80 Steering
Changing the programming ............. 79 Display message ............................ 277
Checking the battery ....................... 80 Steering Pilot
Convenience closing feature ............ 91 Activating/deactivating ................. 241
Convenience opening feature .......... 90 Display message ............................ 271
Display message ............................ 278 Steering wheel
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 77 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 109
Important safety notes .................... 77 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 108
KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 79 Button overview ............................... 38
Loss ................................................. 81 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 234
Mechanical key ................................ 79 Cleaning ......................................... 336
Overview .......................................... 77 Important safety notes .................. 108
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 140 Steering wheel heating .................. 109
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81 Storing settings (memory func-
Starting the engine ........................ 142 tion) ............................................... 113
Smartphone Steering wheel heating
Starting the engine ........................ 142 Problem (malfunction) ................... 109
SMS Switching on/off ........................... 109
see also Digital Operator's Man- Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 152
ual .................................................. 292 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 246
Snow chains Stowage areas ................................... 300
Information .................................... 356 Stowage compartments
Sockets Armrest (under) ............................. 301
Center console .............................. 312 Center console .............................. 302
General notes ................................ 312 Center console (rear) ..................... 302
Luggage compartment ................... 313 Cup holders ................................... 308
Rear compartment ......................... 312 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 302
Sound Glove box ....................................... 301
Switching on/off ........................... 293 Important safety information ......... 300
Special seat belt retractor .................. 60 Stowage net ................................... 302
Specialist workshop ............................ 31 Stowage net ....................................... 302
Speed, controlling Summer tires
see Cruise control In winter ........................................ 356
Speedometer Sun visor ............................................ 310
Digital ............................................ 237 Suspension setting
In the Instrument cluster ................. 37 AIRMATIC ...................................... 188
Segments ...................................... 233 AMG adaptive sport suspension
Selecting the display unit ............... 243 system ........................................... 191
Standing lamps Suspension tuning
Display message ............................ 260 SETUP (on-board computer,
Switching on/off ........................... 116 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 246
Index 21
SUV see also Digital Operator's Man-

(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 30 ual .................................................. 292
Switching air-recirculation mode Temperature
on/off ................................................. 135 Coolant (display in the instrument
Switching on media mode cluster) .......................................... 234
Via the device list .......................... 298 Coolant (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 245
T Engine oil (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 245
Tachometer ........................................ 233 Outside temperature ...................... 233
Tailgate Setting (climate control) ................ 132
Display message ............................ 276 Transmission oil (on-board com-
Emergency unlocking ....................... 88 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 245
Important safety notes .................... 84 Through-loading feature ................... 303
Limiting the opening angle ............... 88 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 246
Opening dimensions ...................... 392 Tire pressure
Opening/closing (automatically
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 361
from inside) ...................................... 87
Checking manually ........................ 360
Opening/closing (automatically
Display message ............................ 273
from outside) ................................... 86
Maximum ....................................... 360
Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 85
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 342
Power closing .................................. 84
Notes ............................................. 359
Tank
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 343
see Fuel tank
Recommended ............................... 357
Tank content
Tire pressure loss warning system
Fuel gauge ....................................... 37
General notes ................................ 360
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 386
Restarting ...................................... 361
Information .................................... 384 Tire pressure monitor
Tires/wheels ................................. 379
Checking the tire pressure elec-
Trailer loads ................................... 395
tronically ........................................ 363
Vehicle data ................................... 392
Function/notes ............................. 361
Telephone
General notes ................................ 361
Accepting a call (multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 240
Radio type approval for the tire
Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
pressure monitor ........................... 364
necting) ......................................... 296
Restarting ...................................... 364
Authorizing a mobile phone via the
Warning lamp ................................. 291
device manager (connecting) ......... 297
Warning message .......................... 363
Connecting a mobile phone
Tire pressure table ............................ 358
(device manager) ........................... 297
TIREFIT kit
Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
eral information) ............................ 296
Storage location ............................ 339
Display message ............................ 277
Tire pressure not reached .............. 342
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 240
Tire pressure reached .................... 343
Number from the phone book ........ 240
Using ............................................. 341
Redialing ........................................ 240
Tires
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 240
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 373
22 Index
Average weight of the vehicle Service life ..................................... 355

occupants (definition) .................... 372 Sidewall (definition) ....................... 374
Bar (definition) ............................... 372 Snow chains .................................. 356
Changing a wheel .......................... 374 Speed rating (definition) ................ 373
Characteristics .............................. 372 Storing ........................................... 375
Checking ........................................ 354 Structure and characteristics
Curb weight (definition) ................. 373 (definition) ..................................... 372
Definition of terms ......................... 372 Summer tires in winter .................. 356
Direction of rotation ...................... 375 Temperature .................................. 368
Display message ............................ 273 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Distribution of the vehicle occu- (definition) ..................................... 374
pants (definition) ............................ 374 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 373
DOT (Department of Transporta- Tire pressure (definition) ................ 373
tion) (definition) ............................. 372 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 372
DOT, Tire Identification Number Tire size (data) ............................... 379
(TIN) ............................................... 371 Tire size designation, load-bearing
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) capacity, speed rating .................... 369
(definition) ..................................... 372 Tire tread ....................................... 355
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi- Tire tread (definition) ..................... 373
nition) ............................................ 373 Total load limit (definition) ............. 374
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- Traction ......................................... 368
inition) ........................................... 373 Traction (definition) ....................... 374
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Tread wear ..................................... 368
ing) (definition) .............................. 373 TWR (permissible trailer drawbar
Important safety notes .................. 354 noseweight) (definition) ................. 374
Increased vehicle weight due to Uniform Tire Quality Grading
optional equipment (definition) ...... 372 Standards ...................................... 367
Information on driving .................... 354 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 373 Standards (definition) .................... 372
Labeling (overview) ........................ 369 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 374
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 374 Wheel and tire combination ........... 379
Load index ..................................... 371 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 372
Load index (definition) ................... 373 see Flat tire
M+S tires ....................................... 356 Tool
Maximum load on a tire (defini- see Vehicle tool kit
tion) ............................................... 373 Top Tether ............................................ 63
Maximum loaded vehicle weight Tow-starting
(definition) ..................................... 373 Emergency engine starting ............ 352
Maximum permissible tire pres- Important safety notes .................. 349
sure (definition) ............................. 373 Towing a trailer
Maximum tire load ......................... 371 Axle load, permissible .................... 395
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 373 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 335
MOExtended tires .......................... 356 Coupling up a trailer ...................... 227
Optional equipment weight (defi- Decoupling a trailer ....................... 229
nition) ............................................ 374 Driving tips .................................... 225
PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- Important safety notes .................. 224
inition) ........................................... 373 Installing the ball coupling ............. 226
Replacing ....................................... 374 Lights display message .................. 260
Index 23
Mounting dimensions .................... 395 Trip computer (on-board com-

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 192 puter) .................................................. 236
Power supply ................................. 230 Trip odometer
Pulling away with a trailer .............. 143 Calling up ....................................... 236
Removing the ball coupling ............ 229 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 237
Trailer loads ................................... 395 Trunk
Towing away see Tailgate
Important safety guidelines ........... 349 Turn signals
Installing the towing eye ................ 350 Display message ............................ 260
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 351 Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 122
Removing the towing eye ............... 350 Switching on/off ........................... 116
Transporting the vehicle ................ 351 Two-way radio
With both axles on the ground ....... 350 Frequencies ................................... 384
Towing eye ......................................... 339 Installation ..................................... 384
Traffic reports Transmission output (maximum) .... 384
see also Digital Operator's Man- TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-
ual .................................................. 292 nition) ................................................. 374
Traffic Sign Assist Type identification plate
Activating/deactivating the warn- see Vehicle identification plate
ing function .................................... 241
Display message ............................ 268 U
Function/notes ............................. 208
Unlocking
Instrument cluster display ............. 209 Emergency unlocking ....................... 84
Trailer coupling From inside the vehicle (central
see Towing a trailer unlocking button) ............................. 83
Trailer loads and drawbar nose- Upshift indicator (on-board com-
weights ............................................... 229 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 245
Trailer towing USB devices
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 215 Connecting to the Media Inter-
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 218 face ............................................... 299
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 211
Permissible trailer loads and V
drawbar noseweights ..................... 229 Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 310
Transfer case ..................................... 155 Vehicle
Transmission Correct use ...................................... 31
see Automatic transmission Data acquisition ............................... 32
Transmission position display ......... 149 Display message ............................ 275
Transporting the vehicle .................. 351 Equipment ....................................... 28
Traveling uphill Individual settings .......................... 243
Brow of hill ..................................... 174 Limited Warranty ............................. 32
Driving downhill ............................. 174 Loading .......................................... 364
Maximum gradient-climbing capa- Locking (in an emergency) ............... 84
bility ............................................... 173 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 77
Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- Lowering ........................................ 378
tions) .................................................. 336 Maintenance .................................... 29
Operating safety .............................. 30
24 Index
Parking .......................................... 161 Overview .......................................... 37

Parking for a long period ................ 164 Parking brake ................................ 287
Pulling away ................................... 143 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 45
Raising ........................................... 376 Reserve fuel ................................... 288
Reporting problems ......................... 31 Restraint system ............................ 287
Securing from rolling away ............ 375 Seat belt ........................................ 280
Towing away .................................. 349 Tire pressure monitor .................... 291
Transporting .................................. 351 Warranty .............................................. 28
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 84 Washer fluid
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 77 Display message ............................ 278
Vehicle data ................................... 392 Weather display (COMAND)
Vehicle battery see also Digital Operator's Man-
see Battery (vehicle) ual .................................................. 292
Vehicle data ....................................... 392 Wheel and tire combinations
Vehicle data (off-road driving) Tires ............................................... 379
Approach/departure angle ............ 394 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 378
Fording depth ................................ 393 Wheel chock ...................................... 375
Maximum gradient climbing abil- Wheels
ity .................................................. 394 Changing a wheel .......................... 374
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 392 Checking ........................................ 354
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 84 Cleaning ......................................... 333
Vehicle identification number Emergency spare wheel ................. 380
see VIN Important safety notes .................. 354
Vehicle identification plate .............. 385 Information on driving .................... 354
Vehicle level Interchanging/changing ................ 374
AIRMATIC ...................................... 190 Mounting a new wheel ................... 377
Vehicle level (display message) ....... 265 Mounting a wheel .......................... 375
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 339 Overview ........................................ 354
Video Removing a wheel .......................... 377
Operating the DVD ......................... 239 Snow chains .................................. 356
see also Digital Operator's Man- Storing ........................................... 375
ual .................................................. 292 Tightening torque ........................... 378
VIN ...................................................... 385 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 379
Seat ............................................... 386 Window curtain air bag
Type plate ...................................... 385 Display message ............................ 257
Operation ......................................... 51
W Windows
see Side windows
Warning and indicator lamps Windshield
ABS ................................................ 282 Defrosting ...................................... 133
Brakes ........................................... 281 Infrared reflective .......................... 324
Coolant .......................................... 288 Windshield washer fluid
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 290 see Windshield washer system
Distance warning ........................... 290 Windshield washer system
Engine diagnostics ......................... 288 Adding washer fluid ....................... 329
ESP® .............................................. 284 Important safety notes .................. 391
ESP® OFF ....................................... 285 Windshield wipers
Fuel tank ........................................ 288 Problem (malfunction) ................... 124
Index 25
Rear window wiper ........................ 123

Replacing the wiper blades ............ 123
Switching on/off ........................... 122
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 169
Winter operation
Overview ........................................ 356
Radiator cover ............................... 326
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 356
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 333
Replacing ....................................... 123
Replacing (rear window) ................ 124
Replacing (windshield) ................... 123
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 336
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 133
26 Digital Operator's Manual
Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

ual
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-
mation about the safe operation of your vehicle. General notes
The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-
Please observe the information about the oper-
hensive and specifically adapted information on
ation of the controller (Y page 293).
your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-
tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-
ual via the multimedia system. Content pages
i You will not incur any costs when calling up The content pages can be accessed by means of
the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital a visual search, a keyword search or using the
Operator's Manual works without connecting contents.
to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Operator's Manual:
RVisual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access
the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-
cle interior" view.
RKeyword search
X To scroll forward/back: turn 3 the con-
The keyword search allows you to search for a
troller.
keyword by entering characters. Further
information can be found in the Digital Oper- X To display in full-screen or animation: slide
ator's Manual in the "Audio 20" or "COMAND" 8 the controller to the left :.
section under the "Character entry (teleph- X To select information text or save book-
ony)" keyword. marks: slide 9 the controller to the
RContents right ;.
You can select individual sections in the con- X To select a link: slide 6 the controller
tents. down =.
i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva- X To exit a content page: select the %
ted for safety reasons while driving. symbol ?.
X To call up the menu of the Digital Opera-
tor's Manual: select Þ symbol A.
Operation
Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-
ual
X Press the Ø button on the center console.
The overview relating to the vehicle appears.
X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by
turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller.
X Confirm 7 the message about the warning
and safety notes.
The menu for the Digital Operator's Manual
appears.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 27
Protecting the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Introduction
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the operating instructions require you
and humanity into account. to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or
You too can help to protect the environment re-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-
by operating your vehicle in an environmental rules and regulations when disposing of
materials. In this way you will help to protect the
tally responsible manner.
environment.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors: Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Roperating conditions of your vehicle
Ryour personal driving style H Environmental note
You can influence both factors. You should Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
bear the following in mind: assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions: quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
parts.
sumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
are correct. ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
the following areas of your vehicle:
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
Rdoors
them. Rdoor pillars
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute Rdoor sills
to environmental protection. You should Rseats
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rcockpit
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rinstrument cluster
qualified specialist workshop. Rcenter console
Personal driving style: Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
starting the engine. efficiency of the restraint systems.
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
is stationary. qualified specialist workshop.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance You could jeopardize the operating safety of
from the vehicle in front. your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
braking.
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
Z
28 Service and vehicle operation
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu- Service and vehicle operation
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that Warranty
have been specifically approved for your vehi-
Introduction
cle. The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to accordance with the warranty terms and condi-
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- tions in the Service and Warranty Information
cifically developed, manufactured or selected booklet.
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
should be used. accordance with the following warranty terms
More than 300,000 different genuine and conditions:
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Mercedes-Benz models. REmission System Warranty
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain REmission Performance Warranty
a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
necessary service and repair work. In addition, setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
strategically located parts delivery centers pro- and Vermont Emission Control System War-
vide quick and reliable parts service. ranty
Always specify the vehicle identification number RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz laws)
parts (Y page 385).
Replacement parts and accessories are covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
warranties. These are available at any author-
Operator's Manual ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
i This Operator's Manual describes all models Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-
and all standard and optional equipment of ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-
your vehicle available at the time of going to mation booklet will be posted to you.
print. Country-specific differences are possi-
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func- Information for customers in Califor-
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may nia
therefore differ from that shown in the Under California law you may be entitled to a
descriptions and illustrations. replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
The original purchase contract documentation purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-
for your vehicle contains a list of all the systems able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz
in your vehicle. USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service
Should you have any questions concerning facilities fail to fix one or more substantial
equipment and operation, please consult an defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. covered by its express warranty.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book- During the period of 18 months from original
let are important documents and should be kept delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of
in the vehicle. 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,
a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-
sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more
of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction
results in a condition that is likely to cause
Service and vehicle operation 29
death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is Change of address or change of own-
driven, that defect or malfunction has been ership
subject to repair two or more times, and you
have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, In the event of a change of address, please send
Introduction
LLC in writing of the need for its repair. us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
of a less serious nature than category (1) Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
has been subject to repair four or more (USA) at the hotline number
times and you have directly notified 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its Customer Service Center (Canada) at
repair. 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of ing you in a timely manner should the need arise.
repair of the same or different substantial If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the
total of more than 30 calendar days. next owner.
Please send your written notice to: If you have purchased a used car, please send us
the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive (USA) at the hotline number
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Maintenance
Vehicle operation outside the USA
USA only: and Canada
Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet
with you when you bring the vehicle to an When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service the following points:
advisor will record every service for you in the RService facilities or replacement parts may
Service and Warranty Booklet. not be readily available.
Canada only: RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
Have every service in a qualified specialist work- converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
shop confirmed in the service report. can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
RThe fuel may have a considerably lower
octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause
Roadside Assistance engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-
gram offers technical help in the event of a ery Program. For details, consult an authorized
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis- Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the
tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 following addresses.
hours a day, 365 days a year.
In the USA
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372)
(USA) Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
1-800-387-0100 (Canada) European Delivery Department
For additional information, refer to the One Mercedes Drive
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" In Canada
section in the Service and Warranty Booklet Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu- European Delivery Department
ment wallet.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Z
30 Operating safety
Sports Utility Vehicle G WARNING

Modifications to electronic components, their
G WARNING
software as well as wiring can impair their
Introduction
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle function and/or the function of other net-
may start to skid and roll over in the event of worked components. In particular, systems
an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road result, these may no longer function as inten-
conditions. There is a risk of an accident. ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
Always adapt your speed and driving style to the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the accident and injury.
prevailing road and weather conditions. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll- tronic components or their software. You
over rate than other types of vehicles. should have all work to electrical and elec-
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe specialist workshop.
or fatal injury.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signif- ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
icantly more likely to die than a person wearing Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
a seat belt. curb or an unpaved road
You and all vehicle occupants should always Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
wear your seat belts. curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
Operating safety In situations like this, the body, the under-
body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
Important safety notes damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unex-
G WARNING pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
If you do not have the prescribed service/ longer withstand the loads they are designed
maintenance work or any required repairs to.
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
system failures. There is a risk of an accident. bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody and
Always have the prescribed service/mainte- the underbody paneling. If these materials
nance work as well as any required repairs come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
G WARNING and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk paying attention to road and traffic condi-
of fire. tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, cialist workshop.
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become Declarations of conformity
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-
qualified specialist workshop. ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the two following two conditions: 1)
Operating safety 31
These devices may not cause harmful interfer- mation being reset, for example. This may lead
ence, and 2) These devices must accept any to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
interference received, including interference the next emissions test during the main inspec-
that may cause undesired operation. Changes tion.
Introduction
or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment." Qualified specialist workshop
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol- fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to
not cause interference, and (2) These devices correctly carry out the work required on your
must accept any interference, including inter- vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-
ference that may cause undesired operation of evant to safety.
the device." Always have the following work carried out at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety
Diagnostics connection Rservice and maintenance work
The diagnostics connection is only intended for Rrepair work

the connection of diagnostic equipment at a Ralterations, installation work and modifica-
qualified specialist workshop. tions
Rwork on electronic components
G WARNING
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the Correct use
operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
operating safety of the vehicle could be affec- If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-
ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.
ted. There is a risk of an accident.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con- Observe the following information when driving
nection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle:
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rthe vehicle technical data
G WARNING Rtraffic rules and regulations
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. vehicles
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are Problems with your vehicle
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter If you should experience a problem with your
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
securely and as specified in order to ensure affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
loose floormats and do not place floormats on ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-
top of one another. fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-
isfaction, please discuss the problem again with
the Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, con-
! If the engine is switched off and equipment tact us at one of the following addresses.
on the diagnostics connection is used, the
starter battery may discharge. In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor- Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Z
32 Data stored in the vehicle
3 Mercedes Drive QR codes for the rescue card

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
Introduction
Customer Relations Department and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. event of an accident, rescue services can use
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 card contains the most important information
about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the
routing of the electric cables.
Reporting safety defects You can find more information at
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
USA only:
The following text is reproduced as required of
all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the Data stored in the vehicle
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966. Information from electronic control
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
units
which could cause a crash or could cause injury There are electronic control units installed in
or death, you should immediately inform the your vehicle. Some of these are necessary for
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration your vehicle to operate safely, while some offer
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz support during driving (driver assistance sys-
USA, LLC. tems). In addition, your vehicle offers comfort
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may and entertainment functions that are also made
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety possible by electronic control units.
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order Electronic control units contain data storage
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA systems that can temporarily or permanently
cannot become involved in individual problems save technical information concerning the vehi-
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz cle's condition, component stress and mainte-
USA, LLC. nance requirements as well as technical events
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle and malfunctions.
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 This information generally documents the con-
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// dition of a component, a module, a system or the
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, surroundings, for example:
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, Roperating states of system components (e.g.
DC 20590. fill levels, battery status, tire pressure)
You can also obtain other information about Rstatus messages concerning the vehicle or its
motor vehicle safety from individual components (e.g. wheel rpm/
http://www.safercar.gov speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration, indi-
cation of whether seat belts are fastened)
Rmalfunctions and defects in important system
Limited Warranty components (e.g. lights, brakes)
Rinformation about events leading to vehicle
! Observe the notes in this Operator's Manual
regarding the correct operation of your vehi- damage
cle and possible damage to the vehicle. Dam- Rsystem responses in special driving situations
age to the vehicle which is caused by violation (e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of sta-
of these notes is not covered by the bility control systems)
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the new Rambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain
or used-vehicle warranty. sensor)
In addition to performing the actual control unit
function, these data are used by manufacturers
Data stored in the vehicle 33
to detect and rectify malfunctions and to opti- If your vehicle is equipped appropriately, you
mize vehicle functions. Most of these data are can connect your smartphone or another mobile
volatile and processed only in the vehicle itself. end device to the vehicle. You can control this by
Only a small part of the data is stored in event or means of the control elements integrated in the
Introduction
malfunction memories. vehicle. The smartphone's picture and sound
When you use services, the technical data from can be output via the multimedia system. Spe-
the vehicle can be read out by service network cific items of information are also sent to your
employees or third parties. Services can include smartphone.
repair services, maintenance processes, war- Depending on the type of integration, this can
ranty cases and quality assurance measures. include:
The data is read out via the legally prescribed Rgeneral vehicle information
diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The rele-
Rposition data
vant offices in the service network or third par-
ties collect, process and use the data. These This allows the use of selected smartphone
data document the vehicle's technical states, apps, such as navigation or music player apps.
are used to help in finding malfunctions and There is no additional interaction between the
improving quality and are sent to the manufac- smartphone and the vehicle, particularly active
turer where necessary. In addition, the manu- access to vehicle data. The type of additional
facturer is subject to product liability. The man- data processing is determined by the provider of
ufacturer needs technical data from vehicles for the app being used. Whether you can configure
this purpose. settings for it and, if so, which ones, depends on
Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be the app and your smartphone's operating sys-
reset by a service center during repair or service tem.
work.
You can incorporate data into the vehicle's com-
fort and infotainment functions yourself as part Service provider
of the selected equipment.
Wireless network connection
These include, for example:
Rmultimedia data such as music, films or pho- If your vehicle has a wireless network connec-
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia tion, data can be exchanged between your vehi-
system cle and other systems. The wireless network
Raddress book data for use in conjunction with
connection is made possible by the vehicle's
an integrated hands-free system or an inte- own transmitter and receiver or by mobile devi-
grated navigation system ces that you have brought into the vehicle (e.g.
smartphones). Online functions can be used via
Rnavigation destinations that have been
this wireless network connection. These include
entered online services and applications/Apps provided
Rdata about using Internet services by the manufacturer or other providers.
These data can be saved locally in the vehicle or
are located on a device that you have connected Services provided by the manufacturer
to the vehicle. If this data is saved in the vehicle,
you can delete it at any time. These data are sent In the case of the manufacturer's online serv-
to third parties only at your request, particularly ices, the manufacturer describes the functions
when you use online services in accordance with in a suitable place and the associated informa-
the settings that you have selected. tion subject to data protection legislation. Per-
You can save and change comfort settings/ sonal data can be used in order to provide online
customizations in the vehicle at any time. services. The data exchange for this takes place
via a secure connection, e.g. with the manufac-
Depending on the piece of equipment in ques-
turer's IT systems intended for the purpose. Col-
tion, these can include, for example:
lecting, processing and using personal data
Rseat and steering wheel position settings beyond the provision of services is permitted
Rsuspension and climate control settings only on the basis of a statutory permit or decla-
Rcustom settings such as interior lighting ration of consent.
Z
34 Data stored in the vehicle
You can usually activate and deactivate the serv- The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
ices and functions (some of which are subject to such data as:
charge). In many cases, this also applies to the RHow various systems in your vehicle were
vehicle's entire data connection. However, this
Introduction
operating
does not apply in particular to legally prescribed
RWhether or not the driver and passenger
functions and services such as the "eCall" emer-
gency call system. safety belts were buckled/fastened
RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
Services from third parties accelerator and/or brake pedal and

RHow fast the vehicle was traveling
If it is possible to use online services from other These data can help provide a better under-
providers, these services are the responsibility standing of the circumstances in which crashes
of the provider in question and subject to that and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recor-
provider's data protection conditions and terms ded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
of use. The manufacturer has no influence over situation occurs; no data are recorded by the
the content exchanged here. EDR under normal driving conditions and no
For this reason, please ask the service provider personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash
for information about the type, extent and pur- location) are recorded. However, other parties,
pose of the collection and use of personal data such as law enforcement could combine the
when services are provided by third parties. EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
COMAND/mbrace Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or special equipment is required. In addition to the
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit- the special equipment, such as law enforce-
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be ment, can read the information by accessing the
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys- vehicle or the EDR.
tem.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
For additional information please refer to the ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi- Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
tions. data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
Event data recorders extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an
without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
ment; by federal, state or local government; in
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
relating to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
as required by law.
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-
ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-
tem Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
Information on copyright 35
This means that in the event of such conflict, the

federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Introduction
Information on copyright
Free and open-source software
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle can be found on
the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet
and, including updates, on the following web-
site:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Z
36 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shifter 152 F Adjusts the steering wheel
manually 108
; Combination switch 116
G Adjusts the steering wheel
= Instrument cluster 37 electrically 108
? Horn Steering wheel heating 109
A DIRECT SELECT lever 148 H Cruise control lever 175
B Parking Assist PARKTRONIC I Opens the hood 325
warning display 194
J Diagnostics connection 31
C Overhead control panel 42
K Electric parking brake 162
D Climate control systems 125
L Light switch 115
E Ignition lock 140
Start/Stop button 140
Instrument cluster 37
Instrument cluster
At a glance
: Speedometer with segments 233 ? Tachometer 233
Warning and indicator lamps: Warning and indicator lamps:
å ESP® OFF 284 R Rear fog lamp 116
! ABS 282 ; Check Engine 288
Brakes 281 h Tire pressure monitor 291
$ (USA only) 6 Restraint system 45
J (Canada only) ü Seat belts 280
L Low-beam headlamps 116 % Diesel engine: preglow 142
T Parking lamps 116 A Coolant temperature gauge 234
÷ ESP® 284 Warning and indicator lamps:
K High-beam headlamps 116 ? Coolant 288
Electric parking brake (red) 287
F (USA only) B Fuel level indicator
! (Canada only) Warning and indicator lamps:
! Electric parking brake 8 Reserve fuel with fuel
(yellow) 287 filler flap location indicator
(right-hand side) 288
· Distance warning 290
C Instrument cluster lighting 233
; #! Turn signals 116
= Multifunction display 235
i Information on displaying the outside tem- found under "Outside temperature display"
perature in the multifunction display can be (Y page 233).
38 Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance

: Multifunction display 235 ? =;
; Multimedia system display Selects a menu 234
9:
= ? Selects a submenu or scrolls
Switches on voice-operated through lists 234
navigation or the Voice Con- a
trol System
Confirms a selection 234
8
Hides display messages 248
Mute
%
WX
Back 234
Adjusts the volume
Switches off voice-operated
~ navigation or the Voice Con-
Rejects or ends a call 240 trol System
Exits phone book/redial
memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory
i In vehicles with multimedia system i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20

COMAND you can find further information: you can find further information:
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual Operator's Manual
Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in Ron the voice-operated control of the navi-
the Digital Operator's Manual gation in the manufacturer's operating
Ron the Voice Control System in the sepa- instructions
rate operating instructions
Center console 39
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance
: Multimedia system; see the B £ Hazard warning lamps 117
Digital Operator's Manual
C PASSENGER AIRBAG indica-
; c Seat heating 106 tor lamps 45
= s Seat ventilation 107 Anti-theft alarm system indi-
cator lamp 75
? c Parking Assist
D å ESP® 70
PARKTRONIC 192
A è ECO start/stop func-
tion 144
40 Center console
Center console, lower section

At a glance
i Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering Function Page

package
L Touchpad; see Digital Opera-
Function Page tor's Manual
F Stowage compartment 302 M % Back button (see the
Cup holder 308 Digital Operator's Manual)
Ashtray 311 N Multimedia system control-
Cigarette lighter 312 ler; see Digital Operator's
Socket 312 Manual
G Selector wheel for level con- O g Switches to the favor-
trol 184 ites button (see the Digital
Operator's Manual)
H Ã DSR (Downhill Speed
Regulation) 218 P Switches to the vehicle set-
tings display (see the Digital
I r Manual gearshifting Operator's Manual)
(permanent setting) 152
Q + LOW RANGE off-road
J DYNAMIC SELECT controller 147 gear 221
K Stowage compartment with
Media Interface 301
Center console 41
At a glance
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package and Function Page
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
L % Back button (see the
Function Page Digital Operator's Manual)
F Stowage compartment 302 M Multimedia system control-
Cup holder 308 ler; see Digital Operator's
Ashtray 311 Manual
Cigarette lighter 312 N g Switches to the favor-
Socket 312 ites button (see the Digital
Operator's Manual)
G Ã DSR (Downhill Speed
Regulation) 218 O Switches to the vehicle set-
tings display (see the Digital
H r Manual gearshifting Operator's Manual)
(permanent setting) 152
AMG adaptive sport suspen-
I DYNAMIC SELECT controller 147 sion system (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) 191
J Stowage compartment with
Media Interface 301 P Á Level control 190
K Touchpad; see Digital Opera-
tor's Manual
42 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

At a glance

: p Switches the left-hand C Eyeglasses compartment 302
reading lamp on/off 119
D F Breakdown assistance
; c Switches the front inte- call button (mbrace system) 316
rior lighting on 119
E G SOS button (mbrace
= u Switches the rear inte- system) 315
rior lighting on or off 119
F ï Info call button
? | Switches the front inte- (mbrace system) 317
rior lighting/automatic inte-
rior lighting control off 120 G Rear-view mirror 110
A p Switches the right- H Buttons for the garage door

hand reading lamp on/off 119 opener 323
B 3 Opens/closes the pan- I Microphone for mbrace

orama roof with power tilt/ (emergency call system),
sliding panel and roller sun- telephone and the Voice
blinds 94 Control System1
1 The Voice Control System is only available in combination with COMAND. Please observe the separate oper-
ating instructions.
Door control panel 43
Door control panel
At a glance
: Opens the door 83 B W Opens/closes the side
windows 89
; % & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 83 C ± Opens/closes the
hinged power side windows 89
= r45=
Stores settings for the seat, D p Opens/closes the tail-
exterior mirrors and steering gate 87
column (memory function) 113
E n Activates/deactivates
? Adjusts the seats 97 the override feature for the
side windows in the rear
A 7Zö\ compartment 65
Adjusts and folds the exterior
mirrors in/out electrically 110
44 Occupant safety
Panic alarm As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 97).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 49).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
Safety
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-

ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that par-
ticular accident situation are deployed. How-
X To activate: press ! button : for at ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not
least one second. protect against objects penetrating the vehicle
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the from the outside.
alarm system is armed. Information on restraint system operation can
X To deactivate: press ! button : again. be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
or Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 56).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. See "Children in the vehicle" for information on
or children traveling with you in the vehicle as well
X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.
as on child restraint systems (Y page 59).
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle.
Important safety notes
Occupant safety G WARNING
Introduction to the restraint system Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- restraint system may then not perform its
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of intended protective function and may fail in an
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during This poses an increased risk of injury or even
an accident. fatal injury.
The restraint system comprises: Never modify parts of the restraint system.
RSeat belt system Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
RAir bags components or their software.
RChild restraint system
If it is necessary to modify components of the
RChild seat securing systems restraint system to accommodate a person with
The components of the restraint system work in disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-
conjunction with each other. They can only Benz Center for details. USA only: for further
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all information contact our Customer Assistance
vehicle occupants: Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (1‑800‑367‑6372).
(Y page 47) Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted driving aids which have been approved specifi-
properly (Y page 97) cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Occupant safety 45
Restraint system warning lamp The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
The functions of the restraint system are RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
regular intervals while the engine is running.
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
good time.
in the event of an accident.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
Safety
switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-
then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-
dent.
nents of the restraint system are in operational
readiness. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
system warning lamp:
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
on Depending on the person in the front-passenger
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the seat, the front-passenger front air bag must
engine running either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-
Rlights up again while the engine is running lowing points. You must make sure of this both
before and during a journey.
G WARNING
RChildren in a child restraint system:
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, whether the front-passenger front air bag is
restraint system components may be trig- enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as led child restraint system, and the age and
intended during an accident. This can affect size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe
for example the Emergency Tensioning the notes on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Chil-
Device or the air bag. This poses an increased dren in the vehicle" (Y page 59). There you
risk of injury or even fatal injury. will also find instructions on rearward and
Have the restraint system checked and forward-facing child restraint systems on the
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as front-passenger seat.
soon as possible. RAll other persons: depending on the classi-
fication of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-
bled or deactivated (Y page 51). Be sure to
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 45) and "Air bags"
(Y page 49). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling
over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-
part of the Occupant Classification System thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
(OCS).
Z
46 Occupant safety
occupant in the best position in relation to the G WARNING

air bag.
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
The seat belt system comprises:
perform its intended protective function. An
RSeat belts
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the sec- dent or when braking or changing direction
ond row of seats as well as the seat belts in
the third row abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts
or even fatal injury.
Safety
and the outer seat belts in the second row of Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
seats as well as the seat belts in the third row their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet ting properly.
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac- The components of the restraint system work in
ted any further. conjunction with each other. They can only
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close vehicle occupants:
against the body. However it does not pull the Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the (Y page 47)
backrest. Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor- properly (Y page 97)
rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of
an incorrectly fastened seat belt. G WARNING
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to The seat belt does not offer the intended level
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the of protection if you have not moved the back-
vehicle occupant. rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are ing or in the event of an accident, you could
synchronized with the front air bags, which
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu- abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
pants during an accident. poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the Adjust the seat properly before beginning
buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other- your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
wise, in addition to other systems, the Emer- is in an almost vertical position and that the
gency Tensioning Device could also be trig- shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
gered in the event of an accident and would across the center of your shoulder.
need to be replaced.
G WARNING
Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-
is required by law in: tional and suitable restraint system. If the
Rall 50 states seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
Rthe U.S. territories form its intended protective function. An
Rthe District of Columbia incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
Rall Canadian provinces injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle dent or when braking or changing direction
occupants should correctly fasten their seat abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
belts before starting the journey. or even fatal injury.
Occupant safety 47
For this reason, always secure persons under Proper use of the seat belts
5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
systems. (Y page 46).
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
If a child younger than twelve years old and belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
vehicle: wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint is in motion.
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-
Safety
When fastening the seat belt, always make sure
cle. The child restraint system must be appro- that:
priate to the age, weight and size of the child
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
into the belt buckle belonging to that seat
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across your body
(Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation and oper- Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
ating instructions coat.
Ralways observe the instructions and safety Rthe seat belt is not twisted
notes on the "Occupant classification system Only then can the forces which occur be dis-
(OCS)" (Y page 51) tributed over the area of the belt.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed
G WARNING across the center of your shoulder
The seat belts may not perform their intended The shoulder section of the seat belt should
protective function if: not touch your neck or be routed under your
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely arm or behind your back. Where possible,
adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.
dirty, bleached or dyed
Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lap
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or as low down as possible
extremely dirty The lap belt must always be routed across
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi- This applies particularly to pregnant women.
fied. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, section of the belt.
although the damage may not be visible, e.g. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-
due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged ted or fragile objects
seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. If you have such items located on or in your
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store
could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy these in a suitable place.
when necessary. This poses an increased risk Ronly one person is using a seat belt
of injury or even fatal injury. Infants and children must never travel sitting
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event
of an accident, they could be crushed
sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia
between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- the seat belt is also being used by one of the
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked vehicle's occupants
immediately at a qualified specialist work- Also ensure that there are never objects
shop. between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
Only use seat belts that have been approved for restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-
gage or loads (Y page 300).
Z
48 Occupant safety
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Releasing seat belts

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.
(Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of seat Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
belts (Y page 47). trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
can no longer fulfill their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Safety
X Press the release button in the belt buckle,

hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt
back.
Seat belt adjustment

The belt adjustment is a convenience function
Basic illustration integrated into PRE-SAFE®. With this function,
X Adjust the seat (Y page 97). the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are
The seat backrest must be in an almost adjusted to the upper body of the vehicle occu-
upright position. pant.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet The seat belt strap will slightly tighten if:
and engage belt tongue ; into belt Rthe belt tongue is inserted into the buckle and
buckle :. Rthe ignition is switched on
The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the
The seat belt adjustment will apply a certain
front-passenger seat may be tightened auto-
tightening force if any slack is detected between
matically, see "Belt adjustment"
the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
(Y page 48).
grab hold of the seat belt.
X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section
The belt adjustment can be switched on and off
of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your
using the on-board computer (Y page 244).
body.
The shoulder section of the seat belt must Belt warning for the driver and front
always be routed across the center of the shoul- passenger
der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
X To raise: slide the belt outlet up. The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
The belt outlet will engage in various posi- ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
tions. pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up
continuously or flash. In addition, there may be
X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide
a warning tone.
the belt outlet down.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has
X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired
already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-
position and make sure that the belt outlet ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the
engages. engine is started. If the front doors are closed
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt has
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning
securely fasten child restraint systems in the lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As
vehicle. Further information can be found under soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat
"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 60). belts are fastened or a front door is opened
again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the
engine is started, an additional warning tone will
sound. The warning tone switches off after six
Occupant safety 49
seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas- Always make sure that there are no objects
tened. between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph pants.
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning RAdjust the seats properly before beginning
tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with your journey. Always make sure that the seat
increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the is in an almost upright position. The center of
driver or front passenger have fastened their the head restraint must support the head at
seat belts. about eye level.
Safety
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn- as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-
ing is activated again. tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.
Air bags RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-
Introduction ing. Do not lean forward or lean against the

door or side window. You may otherwise be in
The installation point of an air bag can be rec- the deployment area of the air bags.
ognized by the AIRBAG marking. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front
An air bag complements the correctly fastened of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The board, for example. Your feet may otherwise
air bag provides additional protection in appli- be in the deployment area of the air bag.
cable accident situations. RFor this reason, always secure persons less
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-
different air bag systems function independ- tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot
ently from one another (Y page 56). be worn correctly.
However, no system available today can com- If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. observe the following notes:
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury RAlways secure children under twelve years of
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable
which the air bag must be deployed. child restraint systems.
RChild restraint systems should be installed on
Important safety notes the rear seats.
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child
G WARNING restraint system on the front-passenger seat
If you do not sit in the correct seat position, when the front-passenger front air bag is
the air bag cannot protect as intended and deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-
could even cause additional injury when
passenger front air bag is deactivated
deployed. This poses an increased risk of (Y page 45).
injury or even fatal injury. RAlways observe the instructions and safety
To avoid hazardous situations, always make notes on the "Occupant Classification System
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the
vehicle" (Y page 59) in addition to the child
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, restraint system manufacturer's installation
including pregnant women and operating instructions.
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-
est possible distance to the air bags
Rfollow the following instructions
Z
50 Occupant safety
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the front-passenger side may be triggered
an air bag from functioning correctly. Before and have to be replaced.
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
sure that:
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air bag
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar
Safety
Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,

hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,
rear side trim or side walls Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer-
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;
the pockets of your clothing. Store such deploys in front of and above the glove box.
objects in a suitable place When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
G WARNING pants in the front seats.
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer informs you about the status of the front-
function correctly. There is an increased risk passenger front air bag (Y page 45).
of injury. The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
to it. Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the front-passenger
seat is occupied (Y page 51). The
G WARNING PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
Sensors to control the air bags are located in not lit (Y page 52)
the doors. Modifications or work not per- Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
formed correctly to the doors or door panel- high accident severity
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
function of the sensors being impaired. The air Driver's knee bag
bags might therefore not function properly
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Front air bags

Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering
! Do not place heavy objects on the front- column. The driver's knee bag is deployed
passenger seat. This could cause the system together with the front air bag.
to identify the seat as being occupied. In the
event of an accident, the restraint systems on
Occupant safety 51
The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh, If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,
knee and lower leg protection for the occupant the side impact air bag on the front-passenger
in the driver's seat. side deploys if an appropriate accident situation
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
Side impact air bags of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre- Window curtain air bags
vent deployment of the air bags integrated
Safety
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. In addition, the operation of
the occupant classification system (OCS)
could be adversely affected. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into

the side of the roof frame and deploy in the area
extending from the front door (A-pillar) to the
rear side window (D-pillar).
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or arms.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed
on the side on which the impact occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
Front side impact air bags : and second row seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
rear side impact air bags ; deploy next to the deployed in other accident situations
outer bolster of the seat backrest. (Y page 56).
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. It also offers addi-
tional pelvis protection for occupants in the Occupant Classification System
front seats. However, it does not protect the: (OCS)
RHead
RNeck Introduction
RArms The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
If the restraint system control unit detects a side egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.
impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on Depending on that result, the front-passenger
the side on which the impact occurs. front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger The system does not deactivate:
side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe OCS system detects that the front- Rthe window curtain air bag
passenger seat is occupied or Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the
belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
Z
52 Occupant safety
In the following situation, the side impact air bag Occupant Classification System opera-
and the Emergency Tensioning Device are deac- tion (OCS)
tivated:
ROCS has not categorized the person on the
front-passenger seat as an adult or a person
of corresponding stature and
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue of the seat belt is
not inserted into the front-passenger seat belt
buckle
Safety
Requirements
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
Rin an almost upright position with their back ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
against the seat backrest
The indicator lamps inform you whether the
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
If the front passenger does not observe these enabled.
conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or
tion, e.g. because the front passenger:
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- ignition lock.
selves on a vehicle armrest The system carries out self-diagnostics.
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
from the seat cushion AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child taneously for approximately six seconds.
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be The indicator lamps display the status of the
sure to observe the correct positioning of the front-passenger front air bag.
child restraint system. Never place objects
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
cushion. The entire base of the child restraint onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
system must always rest on the seat cushion of off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as in the event of an accident.
flat as possible against the backrest of the front- RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
passenger seat. passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
The child restraint system must not touch the then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
roof or be subjected to a load by the head dent.
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
and the head restraint position accordingly. off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys- front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
tem manufacturer's installation and operating indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
instructions. If the status of the front-passenger front air bag
changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag
display message appears in the instrument clus-
ter (Y page 258). When the front-passenger
seat is occupied, always pay attention to the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
aware of the status of the front-passenger front
air bag both before and during the journey.
Occupant safety 53
G WARNING G WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is restraint system on the front-passenger seat
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of and you position the front-passenger seat too
an accident and cannot perform its intended close to the dashboard, the child could, in the
protective function. A person in the front- event of an accident:
passenger seat could then, for example, come Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
Safety
cially if the person is sitting too close to the cator lamp is lit, for example
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
injury or even fatal injury.
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
always ensure that:
fatal injury.
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
Move the front-passenger seat as far back as
passenger seat is correct and the front- possible. Always make sure that the shoulder
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle
bled in accordance with the person in the belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on
front-passenger seat the child restraint system. The shoulder belt
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved strap must be routed forwards and down-
back as far back as possible. wards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If nec-
Rthe person is seated correctly. essary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and
Make sure, both before and during the jour- the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always
ney, that the status of the front-passenger observe the child restraint system manufac-
front air bag is correct. turer's installation instructions.
If OCS determines that:

G WARNING
RThe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
restraint system on the front-passenger seat lights up after the system self-test and
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator remains lit. This indicates that the front-
lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag passenger front air bag is deactivated.
can deploy in the event of an accident. The RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
child could be struck by the air bag. This poses child of up to twelve months old, in a standard
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the
Make sure that the front-passenger front air system self-test and remains lit. This indi-
bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. deactivated.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIR- child, in a standard child restraint system, the
BAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can
go out after the system self-test. This indi-
to the child can occur.
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
activated. The result of the classification is
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
dependent on, among other factors, the child
stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child
restraint system and the child's stature. It is
restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
recommended that you install the child
You can find more information on OCS under
restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
"Problems with the Occupant Classification Sys-
tem" (Y page 55).
Z
54 Occupant safety
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a System self-test

person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF G DANGER
indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
the system self-test depending on the result
of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
not light up during the system self-test, the
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat system is malfunctioning. The front-
as far back as possible. Alternatively, a per- passenger front air bag might be triggered
Safety
son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat. unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator in the event of an accident with high deceler-
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or
should not use the front-passenger seat. even fatal injury.
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
adult or a person of adult stature, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp be used. Do not install a child restraint system
goes out after the system self-test. This indi- on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is pant Classification System (OCS) checked
activated. and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to cialist workshop.
observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 59). G WARNING
When the Occupant Classification System If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint
system warning lamp on the instrument cluster lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
lamp light up simultaneously. The front- not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
passenger front air bag is deactivated in this this case, the front-passenger front air bag
case and does not deploy during an accident. cannot perform its intended protective func-
Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
checked and repaired immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom- passenger seat.
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes- That person could, for example, come into
Benz Center for this purpose. contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
repair work carried out at a qualified specialist even fatal injury.
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
for this purpose. always ensure that:
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Rthe classification of the person in the front-
mends that you only use seat accessories that passenger seat is correct and the front-
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
bled in accordance with the person in the
mean that the front-passenger front air bag will
also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys- front-passenger seat
tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-
front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, rectly fastened seatbelt
the front-passenger front air bag is either ena-
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
bled or deactivated.
as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
Occupant safety 55
passenger seat may not be used. Do not facing child restraint system must, as far as
install a child restraint system on the front- possible, be resting on the backrest of the
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi- front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
immediately at a qualified specialist work- lation instructions.
shop.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR
G WARNING BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp displays the status of the front-passenger
Safety
Objects between the seat surface and the front air bag (Y page 52). If the front-passenger
child restraint system could affect OCS oper- front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR
ation. This could result in the front-passenger BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds
air bag not functioning as intended during an and then goes out.
accident. This poses an increased risk of If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
injury or even fatal injury. off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
Do not place any objects between the seat front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
surface and the child restraint system. The indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
entire base of the child restraint system must For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-
always rest on the seat cushion of the front- lems with the Occupant Classification System"
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward- (Y page 55).
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 54).
Z
56 Occupant safety
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
BAG OFF indicator lamp rect.
lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
even though the front- on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 52).
passenger seat is occu-
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
pied by an adult or a per-
passenger seat may not be used.
son of a stature corre-
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Safety
sponding to that of an
adult. Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.

BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child
does not light up and/or seat.
does not stay on.
X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
Runoccupied against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
Roccupied by the adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
weight of a child up to X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
twelve months old in a belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
child restraint system seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-
ingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-
mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear
seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning G WARNING

Devices and air bags A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
tection in an accident. There is an increased
G WARNING risk of injury.
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-
been deployed. There is a risk of injury. ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a bag replaced.
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
It is important for your safety and that of your
cialist workshop as soon as possible. passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
Occupant safety 57
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
continue to perform their protective function for triggered, if:
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. Rthe ignition is switched on
G WARNING Rthe components of the restraint system are
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have operational. You can find further information
under "Restraint system warning lamp"
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera- (Y page 45)
tional and are unable to perform their inten- Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in
ded protective function. This poses an the belt buckle of the respective front seat
Safety
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency compartment are triggered independently of the
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a lock status of the seat belts.
qualified specialist workshop. If the restraint system control unit detects a
more severe accident, further components of
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig- the restraint system are activated independ-
ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous ently of each other in certain frontal collision
situations. This procedure is reversible. situations:
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered RFront air bags and driver's knee bag
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-
and some powder may also be released. The mines that deployment can offer additional
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. protection to that provided by the seat belt
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- The front-passenger front air bag is activated or
ing. The powder that is released generally does deactivated depending on the person on the
not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front
short-term breathing difficulties in people with air bag can only deploy in an accident if the
asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
immediately or open the window in order to pre- BAG indicator lamps (Y page 45).
vent breathing difficulties. Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. In the
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, with propellant gas. The front air bag is fully
which may require special handling and regard deployed with the maximum amount of propel-
for the environment. National guidelines must lant gas if a second deployment threshold is
be observed during disposal. In California, see reached within a few milliseconds.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-
Perchlorate/index.cfm. sioning Devices and the air bags is determined
by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
Method of operation acceleration which occurs at various points in
the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint nature. Deployment should take place in good
system control unit evaluates important physi- time at the start of the collision.
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel- The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
eration, such as: and the direction of the force are essentially
Rduration determined by:
Rdirection Rthe distribution of forces during the collision
Rintensity Rthe collision angle
Based on the evaluation of this data, the Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle
restraint system control unit triggers the Emer- Rthe characteristics of the object with which
gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or the vehicle has collided
rear collision.
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-
sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do
Z
58 Occupant safety
they provide an indication of air bag deploy- PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant

ment.
protection system)
The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-
out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if Introduction
only parts which are relatively easily deformed
are affected and the rate of deceleration is not In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehi-
though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma- cle occupants.
tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid
Safety
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem- Important safety notes

bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs
as a result. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
If the restraint system control unit detects a side footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger
impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable that the seats and/or objects could be dam-
components of the restraint system are aged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.
deployed independently of each other depend- Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-
ing on the apparent type of accident.
SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of an
RSide impact air bags on the side where the
accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your
impact takes place, independently of the driving style to suit the prevailing road and
Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of weather conditions and maintain a safe distance
the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
seats in the second row
The side impact air bag on the front- Function
passenger side deploys under the following
conditions: PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
- the OCS system detects that the front-
Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when
passenger seat is occupied or BAS is activated
- the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-
the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, steers or oversteers severely
independently of the use of the seat belt and Ron vehicles with the Driving Assistance PLUS
independently of whether the front- package: when Active Brake Assist intervenes
passenger seat is occupied powerfully or the radar sensor system detects
REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system an imminent danger of collision in certain sit-
determines that deployment can offer addi- uations
tional protection in this situation
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and
depending on the hazardous situation detected:
front-passenger side in certain situations
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
determines that deployment can offer addi- Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and the
tional protection to that provided by the seat sliding sunroof are closed.
belt Rvehicles with the memory function: the front-
i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfav-
The different air bag systems work independ- orable position.
ently of each other. Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: the air pres-
How the air bag system works is determined sure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest
by the severity of the accident detected, is increased.
especially the vehicle deceleration or accel- If the hazardous situation passes without result-
eration and the apparent type of accident: ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt
pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour
RFrontal collision
seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is
RSide impact
reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®
RRollover can then be reversed.
Children in the vehicle 59
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures
X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly depending on the hazardous situation detected:
when the vehicle is stationary. Rif the radar sensor system detects that a
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts
the locking mechanism is released. are pre-tensioned.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa- end collision is imminent:
tion about the convenience function can be - the brake pressure is increased if the driver
found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 48). applies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-
Safety
tionary.
- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu- The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is can-
pant protection system PLUS) celed:
Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a
Introduction gear is engaged
PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer
with the Driving Assistance PLUS package. detected
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Rif Distance Pilot DISTRONIC indicates an
PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end intention to pull away
collision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit- If the hazardous situation passes without result-
uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive ing in an accident, the original settings are
measures to protect the vehicle occupants. restored.

Automatic measures after an acci-
The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot dent
prevent an imminent collision.
The driver is not warned about the intervention Immediately after an accident, the following
of PRE-SAFE® PLUS. measures are implemented, depending on the
type and severity of the impact:
PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehi-
Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
cle is backing up.
Rthe emergency lighting is activated
When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-
ing space with assistance from Parking Pilot, Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the brakes. Rthe front side windows are lowered
Rvehicles with a memory function: the electri-
Function cally adjustable steering wheel is raised when
the driver's door is opened
PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa- Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply
tions if the radar sensor system detects an is cut off
imminent head-on or rear-end collision. Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
call
Children in the vehicle

Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
Z
60 Children in the vehicle
a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
are generally better protected there. restraint system has been exposed to direct
If a child younger than twelve years old and sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle: child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
The child restraint system must be appropri- their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
ate to the age, weight and size of the child properly. Particular attention must be paid to
Safety
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety children.

notes in this section in addition to the child Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
restraint system manufacturer's installation (Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of seat
instructions belts (Y page 47).
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
notes on the "Occupant classification system proper seat belt positioning for children over
(OCS)" (Y page 51) 40 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a
G WARNING three-point seat belt can be properly fastened
without a booster seat.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake. Special seatbelt retractor
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the G WARNING
parking position P.
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
Rstart the engine.
child restraint system will no longer be
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
an accident and injury. portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
When leaving the vehicle, always take the be immediately refastened. There is an
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
G WARNING the special seat belt retractor and secure the
If persons, particularly children are subjected child restraint system properly.
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's
seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
retractor. When activated, the special seat belt
vehicle. retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot
slacken once the child seat is secured.
G WARNING Installing a child restraint system:
If the child restraint system is subjected to X Make sure you observe the child restraint
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- system manufacturer's installation instruc-
dren may burn themselves on these parts, tions.
particularly on the metal parts of the child X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-
restraint system. There is a risk of injury. let.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
Activating the special seat belt retractor: designed for them. Only replace damaged
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia covers with genuine covers.
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should G WARNING
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt
retractor is enabled. If the child restraint system is installed incor-
X Push the child restraint system down so that rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
sudden change in direction. The child
Safety
Removing the child restraint system and deac-
tivating the special seat belt retractor: restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
X Make sure you observe the child restraint
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions. Always install child restraint systems prop-
X Press the release button of the seat belt erly, even if they are not being used. Make
buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
towards the belt sash guide. tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
You will find further information on stowing
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-
Child restraint system lines" (Y page 300).
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems G WARNING

is required by law in: Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
Rall 50 states tems which have been damaged or subjected
Rthe U.S. territories to a load in an accident can no longer protect
Rthe District of Columbia as intended. The child cannot then be
Rall Canadian provinces restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
If you install a rearward-facing child restraint braking or sudden changes of direction. There
system on the center rear seat, the rear arm rest is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
must be folded back as far as possible. fatal.
You can obtain further information about the Replace child restraint systems which have
correct child restraint system from any author- been damaged or subjected to a load in an
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
G WARNING ing systems on the child restraint system
If the child restraint system is installed incor- checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as before you install a child restraint system
intended. The child cannot then be restrained again.
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or The securing systems of child restraint systems
sudden changes of direction. There is an are:
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Rthe seat belt system
Make sure that you observe the child restraint Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
system manufacturer's installation instruc- Rthe Top Tether anchorages
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
that the base of the child restraint system is the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
always resting completely on the seat cush- information on the "Occupant Classification
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under System (OCS)" (Y page 51). There you will also
or behind the child restraint system. Only use find information on deactivating the front-
child restraint systems with the original cover passenger front air bag.
Z
All child restraint systems must meet the fol- Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
lowing standards: type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
213 and 225 rings
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards To ensure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
213 and 210.2 restraint system can perform its protective func-
tion as intended, the backrest of the respective
Confirmation that the child restraint system cor- outer seat in the second row must be in the
responds to the standards can be found on an upright position.
instruction label on the child restraint system.
Safety
This confirmation can also be found in the instal- ! When installing the child restraint system,
lation instructions that are included with the make sure that the seat belt for the middle
child restraint system. seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- otherwise be damaged.
rior and on the child restraint system.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-

ing system
G WARNING
For LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys-
tems in which the child is secured using the
safety belt integrated in the child restraint
system, the maximum permissible weight of
the child and child restraint system together LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for the outer
is 73 lbs (33 kg). seat in the second row of seats
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), the
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system
with integrated safety belt no longer offers
sufficient protection. The LATCH-type (ISO-
FIX) child seat securing system may be over-
loaded, and the child may not be restrained in
an accident, for example. This poses an
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), use
only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys- LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for the third
row of seats
tem in which the child is also secured with the
vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child Before installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on the second row of seats:
restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if
available. X Move the backrests in the second row of
seats to an upright position (Y page 101).
Regularly check that the permissible gross X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
weight of the child together with the child system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
restraint system is still maintained. rings :.
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal- ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
lation and operating instructions for the child specially designed child restraint systems on
restraint system used. the rear seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also The Top Tether anchorages for the second row
be used and can be installed using the vehicle's of seats are located on the rear of the seat
seat belt system. Install the child seat according backrests. For the third row of seats, use the
to the manufacturer's instructions. cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment
floor.
Top Tether
Introduction
Safety
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured with
a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.
This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
If the child restraint system is equipped with a
Top Tether belt, this should always be used.

X Move head restraint = upwards
G WARNING (Y page 100).
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
system with Top Tether. Always comply with
could fold forwards in the event of an acci- the child restraint system manufacturer's
dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of installation instructions when doing so.
direction. As a result, child restraint systems X Route Top Tether belt B under head restraint
cannot perform their intended protective = between the two head restraint bars.
function. Rear seat backrests that are not X Guide Top Tether belt B down between cargo
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. compartment cover : and seat backrest ;.
in the event of an accident. This poses an X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. B into Top Tether anchorage ?.
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal- Make sure that:
ling a Top Tether belt. Adjust the rear seat RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top
backrests so that they are in an upright posi- Tether anchorage ? as shown.
tion. RTop Tether belt B is not twisted.
RTop Tether belt B is routed between seat
Make sure that the backrest in the rear com- backrest ; and cargo compartment
partment engages fully. To do so, pull firmly on cover : if cargo compartment cover : is
the seat backrest. installed.
RTop Tether belt B is routed between seat
Top Tether anchorages backrest ; and the cargo net if the cargo
net is installed.
X Tension Top Tether belt B. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
X Move head restraint = back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 100). Make sure
that you do not interfere with the correct rout-
ing of Top Tether belt B.
Z
Child restraint system on the front- correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to
passenger seat the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint
system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed
General notes forward and down from the vehicle belt outlet. If
necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the
Accident statistics show that children secured front-passenger seat accordingly.
in the rear seats are safer than children secured Always observe the child restraint system man-
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install tions.
the child restraint system on a rear seat.
Safety
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat, Child-proof locks
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System Important safety notes
(OCS)" (Y page 51).
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as G WARNING
a result of: If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front- could:
passenger seat
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
passenger front air bag or road users
Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash- traffic
board Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped
Rearward-facing child restraint system
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward- Always activate the child-proof locks and
facing child restraint system on the front- override feature if children are traveling in the
passenger seat, always make sure that the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
lamp is permanently lit (Y page 45) is the front- leave children unattended in the vehicle.
passenger front air bag deactivated.
Always observe the child restraint system man- Override feature for:
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- Rthe rear doors (Y page 65)
tions. Rthe rear side windows (Y page 65)
Forward-facing child restraint system G WARNING

If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-
facing child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always move the front- Rrelease the parking brake.
passenger seat as far back as possible. The Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front- parking position P.
passenger seat. The backrest of the child Rstart the engine.
restraint system must lie as flat as possible In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
against the backrest of the front-passenger
seat. The child restraint system must not touch ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
the roof or be subjected to a load by the head an accident and injury.
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is
Pets in the vehicle 65
When leaving the vehicle, always take the X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never up in the direction of arrow :.
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are work-
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
ing properly.
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
G WARNING
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
Override feature for the rear side win-
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
Safety
dows
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
X To activate/deactivate: press button :.
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear
restraint system has been exposed to direct side windows is disabled. Operation is only
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the possible using the switches in the driver's
child in it. Never leave children unattended in door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is
the vehicle. possible using the switches in the rear com-
partment.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
As a result, they could:
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
You secure each door individually with the child- endangering other road users
proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured
with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from Unsecured animals could also be flung around
inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
the door can be opened from the outside. den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
Z
66 Driving safety systems
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
cle. Always secure animals properly during
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans- General information
port box. ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This
allows you to continue steering the vehicle when
braking.
Driving safety systems
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
Safety
Overview of driving safety systems

on. It goes out when the engine is running.
In this section, you will find information about ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
the following driving safety systems: (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you
(Y page 66) only brake gently.
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67)
RActive Brake Assist (Y page 67) Important safety notes
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
(Y page 70) tion (Y page 66).
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 72) G WARNING
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72) If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function braking. The steerability and braking charac-
(Y page 72) teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
RSteering Pilot STEER CONTROL ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
(Y page 75) tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
ding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
Important safety notes diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei- When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override including driving safety systems, will also
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are become inoperative. Observe the information
merely aids designed to assist driving. You are on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 282) and dis-
responsible for maintaining the distance to the play messages which may be shown in the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in instrument cluster (Y page 249).
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt
your driving style to suit the prevailing road and Braking
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
The driving safety systems described only work brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
as effectively as possible when there is ade- uation is over.
quate contact between the tires and the road X To make a full brake application: depress
surface. Pay particular attention to the informa- the brake pedal with full force.
tion regarding tires, recommended minimum If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" pulsing in the brake pedal.
section (Y page 354). The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. reminder to take extra care while driving.
Only in this way will the driving safety systems
described in this section work as effectively as
possible.
Driving safety systems 67
Off-road ABS Active Brake Assist

An ABS system specifically suited to off-road General information
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road program is activated on: i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
RVehicles without the Offroad Engineering tion (Y page 66).
package (Y page 219) Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warn-
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack- ing function with an autonomous braking func-
age (Y page 220) tion and situation-dependent braking assis-
Safety
At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the front tance
wheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig- Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the
ging-in effect achieved in the process reduces risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in
the stopping distance on off-road terrain. This front or reduce the effects of such a collision.
limits steering capability. If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk
of collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and
BAS (Brake Assist System) audible collision warning, autonomous braking
can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply
General information the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adap-
tive Brake Assist supports you with situation-
BAS operates in emergency braking situations. dependent braking assistance.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS Active Brake Assist is only available in certain
automatically boosts the braking force, thus countries.
shortening the stopping distance.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- impaired if:
tion (Y page 66).
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
G WARNING covering the sensors
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance Rthere is snow or heavy rain
in an emergency braking situation is Rthere is interference by other radar sources
increased. There is a risk of an accident. Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
In an emergency braking situation, depress ple in parking garages
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
the wheels from locking. motorbike

Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
Ryou are driving a new vehicle or servicing on
Braking the Active Brake Assist system has just been
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until carried out
the emergency braking situation is over. Observe the notes in the section on breaking-
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. in (Y page 139).
The brakes will function as usual once you Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle.
Z
Activating/deactivating In such cases, the distance warning function

Active Brake Assist is automatically active after may:
switching on the ignition. Rgive an unnecessary warning
You can activate or deactivate Active Brake Rnot give a warning
Assist (Y page 242) in the on-board computer.
When deactivated, the distance warning func- There is a risk of an accident.
tion and the autonomous braking function are Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
also deactivated. uation and do not rely solely on the distance
Safety
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ warning function.

symbol appears in the assistance graphic dis-
play. Function
If DSR (Y page 218) is activated, Active Brake Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph
Assist is deactivated. (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns
you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An
Distance warning function intermittent warning tone will then sound, and
the · distance warning lamp will light up in
General information the instrument cluster.
The distance warning function can help you to X Brake immediately in order to increase the
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a distance from the vehicle in front.
vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a or
collision. If the distance warning function X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
so.
be warned visually and acoustically.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
Important safety notes complicated but non-critical driving conditions
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- may also cause the system to display a warning.
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 66). With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obstacles
G WARNING that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-
The distance warning function does not react: ded period of time.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
Rto people or animals (70 km/h), the distance warning function can
Rto oncoming vehicles also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop-
Rto crossing traffic ped or parked vehicles.
Rwhen cornering
Autonomous braking function
The distance warning function may not give
warnings in all critical situations. There is a If the driver does not react to the distance warn-
risk of an accident. ing signal in a critical situation, Active Brake
Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- braking function.
uation and be ready to brake. The autonomous braking function is available in
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing the following speed ranges:
road and traffic conditions. R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects
R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
G WARNING objects
The distance warning function cannot always Due to the nature of the system, particularly
clearly identify objects and complex traffic complicated but non-critical driving conditions
situations. may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-
tion to intervene.
If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) Important safety notes

are activated simultaneously (Y page 58). i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 66).
Situation-dependent braking assis-
tance G WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
General information identify objects and complex traffic situa-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sections.
tion (Y page 66).
Safety
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might:
With the help of the radar sensor system, Adap- Rintervene unnecessarily
tive Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in
the path of your vehicle for an extended period Rnot intervene
of time. There is a risk of an accident.
If Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli- Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
brake pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If
you apply the brakes forcefully, situation- intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
dependent braking assistance adapts to the sit-
uation and automatically increases the brake G WARNING
pressure to a degree appropriate to the traffic Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
situation.
Rto people or animals
Situation-dependent braking assistance pro-
vides braking assistance in hazardous situations Rto oncoming vehicles
at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar Rto crossing traffic
sensor technology to assess the traffic situa-
tion. Rwhen cornering
Situation-dependent braking assistance is capa- As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not
ble of reacting to moving objects that have intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
already been detected as such at least once risk of an accident.
over the period of observation, up to vehicle
speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h). Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
Situation-dependent braking assistance reacts
to stationary obstacles up to a speed of approx-
Due to the nature of the system, complex but
imately 44 mph (70 km/h).
non-critical driving conditions may also cause
If situation-dependent braking assistance Active Brake Assist to intervene.
demands particularly high brake pressure, pre-
Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due to
ventative passenger protection measures (PRE-
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
SAFE®) are triggered simultaneously brake system is still available with full brake
(Y page 58). boosting effect and BAS.
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
The brakes will work normally again if:
Ryou release the brake pedal. General notes
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi- tion (Y page 66).
cle.
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.
Situation-dependent braking assistance is then power transmission between the tires and the
deactivated. road surface.
Z
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from ! Only operate the vehicle for a maximum of
the direction desired by the driver, one or more ten seconds on a brake test dynamometer.
wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The Switch off the ignition.
engine output is also modified to keep the vehi- Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth-
cle on the desired course within physical limits. erwise destroy the brake system.
ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on
wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize ! A function or performance test should only
the vehicle during braking. be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.
Before you operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult a qualified
Safety
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) workshop. You could otherwise damage the
4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. drive train or the brake system.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- ESP® is only deactivated if the å warning
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull lamp is lit continuously.
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning
example if the road surface is slippery on one lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available
side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer- due to a malfunction.
red to the wheel or wheels with traction. Observe the information on warning lamps
Traction control remains active, even if you (Y page 284) and display messages which may
deactivate ESP®. be shown in the instrument cluster
In appropriate driving situations, activate the (Y page 249).
offroad program:
i Only use wheels with the recommended tire
X Vehicles without the Offroad Engineering sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.
package (Y page 219)
X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-
Characteristics of ESP®
age (Y page 220)
General information
Off-road 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
tem) beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
active.
An ETS system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once an off- If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp
road program is activated: flashes in the instrument cluster.
RVehicles without the Offroad Engineering If ESP® intervenes:
package (Y page 219) X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack- stances.
age (Y page 220) X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
Important safety notes X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions.
G WARNING
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to ECO start/stop function
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv- The ECO start/stop function switches the
ing safety systems are deactivated. This engine off automatically when the vehicle stops
increases the risk of skidding and an accident. moving. The engine starts automatically when
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if
qualified specialist workshop. ESP® was deactivated before the engine was
automatically switched off.
Deactivating/activating ESP® X To deactivate: press button :.

The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
Important safety notes instrument cluster lights up.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- X To activate: press button :.
tion (Y page 66). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
You can select between the following states of instrument cluster goes out.
ESP®:
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
RESP® is activated.
Safety
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
RESP® is deactivated.
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the
G WARNING instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
If you deactivate ESP®:
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident. RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
REngine torque is no longer limited and the
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
drive wheels are able to spin.
bed in the following.
RTraction control is still activated.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow- RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor
ing situations: is it activated if you brake firmly with assis-
tance from ESP®
Rwhen using snow chains
RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it
Rin deep snow
activated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-
Ron sand or gravel
venes.
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
which provides better grip. is no longer available; nor is it activated if you
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations brake firmly with assistance from ESP®
described above no longer apply. ESP® will RESP® still provides support when you brake
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if firmly.
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
spin.
Offroad ESP® (vehicles with Off-Road
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an Engineering package)
extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain. An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
Deactivating/activating ESP® road program is activated on:
RVehicles without the Offroad Engineering
package (Y page 219)
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-
age (Y page 220)
Offroad ESP® intervenes with a delay if there is
oversteering or understeering, thus improving
traction.
Crosswind Assist
General information
Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability of
your vehicle to drive straight ahead. The cross-
Z
wind driving assistance function integrated in Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
ESP® noticeably reduces these impairments. function
ESP® intervenes automatically according to the
direction and intensity of the crosswinds affect- General information
ing your vehicle.
i Pay attention to the important safety notes
ESP® intervenes with stabilizing braking to in the "Driving safety systems" section
assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane. (Y page 66).
Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds
above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
Safety
ahead or cornering gently. can help you to minimize the risk of a collision
with a vehicle in front or a pedestrian and reduce
Important safety notes the effects of such a collision. If the Active Brake
Assist with cross-traffic function detects a risk
Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is of collision, you will be warned visually and
switched off or deactivated because of a mal- acoustically and, if necessary, your brake appli-
function. cation will be assisted according to the situa-
tion. If you do not react, the system can also
react by braking automatically. In the event of a
EBD (electronic brake force distribu- detected risk of collision due to crossing traffic,
tion) you will also be visually and acoustically warned
as well as assisted by the brake boosting effect
General information according to the situation.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
only available in vehicles with the Driving Assis-
on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
tance Plus package.
while braking.
For Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion to assist you when driving, the radar sensor
Important safety notes system and the camera system must be opera-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tional.
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 66). If the radar sensor system or the camera system
is malfunctioning, Active Brake Assist with
G WARNING cross-traffic function is restricted or no longer
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can available. The brake system is still available with
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the complete brake boosting effect and BAS.
risk of skidding and an accident. The radar sensor system and camera system
help Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
You should therefore adapt your driving style tion to detect obstacles that are in the path of
to the different handling characteristics. Have your vehicle for an extended period of time.
the brake system checked at a qualified spe- In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-
cialist workshop. cle can be detected.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
Observe information regarding indicator and detects pedestrians using typical characteris-
warning lamps (Y page 282) as well as display tics such as body contours and the posture of a
messages (Y page 251). person standing upright.
i Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" section
ADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 73).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
offers increased braking comfort. In addition to
the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
the HOLD function (Y page 187) and hill start
assist (Y page 143).
Important safety notes In order to maintain the appropriate distance to

the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,
G WARNING you must apply the brakes yourself.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function G WARNING
will initially brake your vehicle by a partial
application of the brakes if a danger of colli-
does not react:
sion is detected. There may be a collision
unless you brake yourself. Even after subse- Rto small people, e.g. children
Safety
quent full application of the brakes a collision Rto animals
cannot always be avoided, particularly when Rto oncoming vehicles
approaching at too high a speed. There is a Rwhen cornering
risk of an accident.
As a result, Active Brake Assist with cross-
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to traffic function may not warn you or engage in
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do all critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
so. dent.
In the event of a partial application of the brakes, Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full uation and be ready to brake.
braking pressure.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
G WARNING ognition can be impaired.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function Recognition by the radar sensor system is also
cannot always clearly identify objects and impaired if:
complex traffic situations. Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
In such cases, Active Brake Assist with cross- covering the sensors
traffic function might: Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
Rissue an unnecessary warning or engage
ple in parking garages
Rneither give a warning nor intervene Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
There is a risk of an accident. motorbike
Always pay particular attention to the traffic Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
situation and be prepared to brake, especially relative to the center of your vehicle
if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func- Rvehicles quickly move into the radar sensor
tion alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a system detection range

non-critical driving situation. Recognition by the camera system is also
impaired in the event of:
G WARNING Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered
Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun
being low in the sky
cannot always clearly identify people, partic-
Rdarkness
ularly if they are moving. Active Brake Assist
Ror if:
with cross-traffic function cannot intervene in
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path
these cases. There is a risk of an accident.
of the vehicle
Always pay particular attention to the traffic - the camera system no longer recognizes a
situation and be prepared to brake, especially pedestrian as a person due to special cloth-
if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func- ing or other objects
tion alerts you. - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects
- the typical outline of a person is not distin-
guishable from the background
Z
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
have the configuration and operation of the may perform automatic emergency braking, up
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist to the point of full brake application. Automatic
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow emergency braking is not performed until imme-
speeds where there is no visible damage to the diately prior to an imminent accident.
front of the vehicle. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical sit-
Following damage to the windshield, have the uation or during autonomous braking, braking
configuration and operation of the camera sys- assistance is provided according to the situa-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop. tion. If necessary, this increases the brake pres-
Safety
sure up to full brake application.

Function To avoid a collision, Active Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function calculates the brake force
X To activate or deactivate: activate or deac- necessary if:
tivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
Ryou approach an obstacle, and
function using the on-board computer
(Y page 242). RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
If the Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic has detected a risk of a collision
function is deactivated, the æ symbol When driving at a speed under 20 mph
appears in the multifunction display. (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,
If you have activated DSR (Y page 218), the Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is activated. The increase in brake pressure from
deactivated. Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
carried out at the last possible moment.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
this function warns you if you rapidly approach a When driving at a speed above 20 mph
vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal
will then sound and the · distance warning sharply, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. function automatically increases the brake pres-
sure to a degree suited to the traffic situation.
X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
or provides braking assistance in hazardous situa-
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do tions with vehicles in front within a speed range
so. between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function (250 km/h).
can also brake the vehicle automatically under Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
the following conditions: (70 km/h) the Active Brake Assist with cross-
Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seat
traffic function assists you with braking in haz-
ardous situations with:
belts fastened
and Rstationary obstacles in the path of the vehicle,
Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately

e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h) Rstationary pedestrians in the path of the vehi-
cle
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic Robstacles crossing your path that move in the
function may react to: detection range of the sensors and are detec-
ted
Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
emergency braking situation is over.
Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
i If there is an increased risk of a collision, You can prevent the intervention of Active Brake
preventive passenger protection measures Assist with cross-traffic function at any time by:
(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 58). Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front Ractivating kickdown
remains and you do not brake, take evasive Rreleasing the brake pedal
Protection against theft 75
The braking application of Active Brake Assist i The immobilizer is always deactivated when
with cross-traffic function is ended automati- you start the engine.
cally if: In the event that the engine cannot be started
Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision tem is not operational. Contact an authorized
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (in the USA) or
front of your vehicle
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Safety
STEER CONTROL ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
General information
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
This steering assistance is provided in particular
if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake
Rthe vehicle starts to skid

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- KEYLESS-GO.
tion (Y page 66). Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
No steering assistance is provided from STEER is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
CONTROL, if: X To switch off using the SmartKey: unlock
RESP® the vehicle with the SmartKey.
is deactivated
RESP®
or
is malfunctioning
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Rthe steering is malfunctioning
X To switch off using KEYLESS-GO: unlock
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO.
further by the electrical power steering.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
Protection against theft cle.
Immobilizer A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Ra door
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
ignition off and open the driver's door. Rthe tailgate
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. Rthe hood
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from

being started without the correct SmartKey.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone
can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been
left inside the vehicle.
Z
76 Protection against theft
X To switch the alarm off with the Smart-

Key: press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
Safety
must be outside the vehicle.

or
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
cle.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close
the open door that triggered it, for example.
i If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-
tem automatically notifies the Customer
Assistance Center. This is done either by text
message or data connection. The emergency
call system sends the message or data provi-
ded that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.
SmartKey 77
SmartKey Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO

Start function key in the temperature-controlled
Important safety notes cup holder. Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
LESS-GO Start function key will not be detected.
G WARNING Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, not keep the SmartKey in the cargo compart-
they could: ment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be
detected, e.g. when starting the engine using
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other the Start/Stop button.
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
SmartKey functions
Opening and closing

Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the : & Locks the vehicle
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of ; F Opens/closes the tailgate
reach of children. = % Unlocks the vehicle
G WARNING X To unlock centrally: press the % button.

If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
If you attach heavy or large objects to the imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
Rthe vehicle is locked again
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
Ranti-theft protection is reactivated
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
risk of an accident. X To lock centrally: press the & button.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before following components:
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Rthe doors
Rthe tailgate
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- Rthe fuel filler flap
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected. The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
three times when locking.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-
ity of powerful electrical installations. You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
Do not keep the SmartKey: signal can be activated and deactivated using
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone the on-board computer (Y page 244).
or another SmartKey. You will receive visual and acoustic locking con-
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. firmation if all components were able to be
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. locked.
This can affect the functionality of the Smart-
Key.
Z
78 SmartKey
If activated in the multimedia system, the loca-

tor lighting also lights up in the dark (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
X To open the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: press and hold the F
button until the tailgate opens.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X To close the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca-
ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle,
press the F button on the SmartKey.
Opening and closing
When the tailgate closes you can then release X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-
the button. face of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :
or ;.
KEYLESS-GO Make sure that you do not touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
General notes X Convenience closing feature: touch
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY- period.
LESS-GO key in the vehicle (Y page 142). Further information on the convenience closing
feature (Y page 90).
Locking/unlocking centrally If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only the
cargo compartment of the vehicle is unlocked.
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the
SmartKey with you. You can combine the func- Deactivating and activating
tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-
If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an
tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using
extended period of time, you can deactivate the
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the
KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The
& button on the SmartKey.
SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby
The driver's door and the door at which the han- conserving battery power. For the purposes of
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be
must be outside the vehicle. When locking or nearby.
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance
X To deactivate: press the & button on the
between the SmartKey and the corresponding
door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, KEY-
is in the vehicle by periodically establishing a LESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 80).
radio connection between the vehicle and the
X To activate: press any button on the Smart-
SmartKey. This happens:
Key.
Rwhen starting the engine
or
Rwhile driving
Rwhen the external door handles are touched KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features
Rduring convenience closing are available again.
SmartKey 79
KEYLESS-GO start function Mechanical key

General notes General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart- unlocked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
Key in the vehicle (Y page 142). GO, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
Changing the settings of the locking tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
system (Y page 75).
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
You can change the settings of the locking sys-
Opening and closing

key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-
tem. This means that only the driver's door and matically.
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
alone. SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X To change the setting: press and hold down
the % and & buttons simultaneously Removing the mechanical key
for about six seconds until the battery indica-
tor lamp flashes twice (Y page 80).
If the setting of the locking system is changed
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X To unlock: press the % button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button. X Push release catch : in the direction of the
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol- arrow and at the same time remove mechan-
lows: ical key ; from the SmartKey.
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner For further information about:
surface of the door handle on the driver's RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 84)
door. RUnlocking the cargo compartment
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface (Y page 88)
of the door handle on the front-passenger RLocking the vehicle (Y page 84)
door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor Inserting the mechanical key
surface on one of the door handles
(Y page 78). X Push mechanical key ; completely into the
SmartKey until it engages and release
X To restore the factory settings: press and catch : is back in its basic position.
hold down the % and & buttons simul-
taneously for approximately six seconds until
the battery check lamp flashes twice
(Y page 80).
Z
80 SmartKey
SmartKey battery Checking the battery

G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
Opening and closing
immediately.
X Press the & or % button.
H Environmental note The battery is working properly if battery
Batteries contain dangerous check lamp : lights up briefly.
substances. It is against the The battery is discharged if battery check
law to dispose of them with lamp : does not light up briefly.
the household rubbish. They X Change the battery (Y page 80).
must be collected separately If the SmartKey battery is checked within the
and recycled to protect the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing
environment. the & or % button:
Dispose of batteries in an Rlocks or
environmentally friendly Runlocks the vehicle
manner. Take discharged i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
batteries to a qualified specialist workshop.
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat- Replacing the battery
teries.
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
material, which may require special handling (Y page 79).
and regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey

opening in the direction of the arrow until bat-
tery compartment cover : opens. Do not
hold battery compartment cover : closed
while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
SmartKey 81
X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment

cover : into the housing first and then press
to close it.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
(Y page 79).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on
the vehicle.
Opening and closing

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
Problems with the SmartKey

You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
the SmartKey. (Y page 80).
If this does not work:
X Unlock (Y page 84) or lock (Y page 84) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock or KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.

unlock the vehicle using X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78).
KEYLESS-GO.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 80).
mechanical key.
Z
82 SmartKey

mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Opening and closing
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-
trol function:
mechanical key.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 346).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 346).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked.

started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
Stop button. The Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 80).
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
Key. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors 83
Doors X Front door: pull door handle ;.

If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.
Important safety notes The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X Rear door: pull door handle ;.
G WARNING If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, and the door unlocks.
they could: X Pull door handle ; again.
The door can be opened.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Centrally locking and unlocking the
Opening and closing

Roperate the vehicle's equipment. vehicle from the inside
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from
motion if, for example, they: the inside. The buttons are located on both front
Rrelease the parking brake. doors.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
X To unlock: press button :.

Unlocking and opening doors from X To lock: press button ;.
the inside If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehi-
cle locks.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open the Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked
rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not or unlocked.
secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 65). You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the
If the vehicle has previously been locked from inside if the vehicle has been locked from the
the outside, opening a door from the inside will outside.
trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off You can open a front door from inside the vehi-
the alarm (Y page 75). cle even if it has been locked.
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:
Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-
ton for the central locking, or
Rif the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-
ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside is
unlocked.
Z
84 Cargo compartment
Automatic locking feature Unlocking/locking the driver's door

using the mechanical key
i If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using
the mechanical key, begin by pressing the
locking button for the interior locking mech-
anism while the driver's door is open. Then
proceed to lock the driver's door using the
mechanical key.
Opening and closing
X To deactivate: press and hold button : for

about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn- driver's door as far as it will go.
ing. X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-
You could therefore be locked out if: clockwise to position 1.
X To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as
Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
far as it will go to position 1.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
You can also switch the automatic locking func- tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
tion on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 75).
(Y page 244).
If you lock the vehicle as described above, the
fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm
system is not armed.
Power closing
Power closing pulls the doors and tailgate into
their locks automatically even if they are not Cargo compartment
completely closed.
X To power close a door: push the door into
the lock up to the first detent position. G WARNING
Power closing will pull the door fully closed.
X To power close the tailgate: lightly press Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
the tailgate downwards. gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
Power closing will pull the tailgate fully is open when the engine is running, particu-
closed. larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
Cargo compartment 85
G WARNING G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or The reversing feature does not respond:
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
Rover the last Ó in (8 mm) of the closing
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
movement
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction. The reversing feature cannot prevent some-
one from becoming trapped in these situa-
Always store objects so that they cannot be
tions in particular. There is a risk of injury.
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
Opening and closing

journey.
If somebody becomes trapped:
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind Rpull or press the remote operating switch
the tailgate. on the driver's door or
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be Rpress the closing or locking button on the
found in the "Vehicle data" section tailgate or
(Y page 392). Rpull the handle on the tailgate
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the cargo compartment. Observe the loading
guidelines (Y page 300).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com- Opening and closing manually from
partment. You could otherwise lock yourself outside
out.
You can: Opening
Rclose the tailgate manually from outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from inside
Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate
Runlock the tailgate from inside with the emer-
gency release
Tailgate reversing feature

On vehicles with the tailgate remote closing fea- X Press the % button on the SmartKey.
ture, the tailgate is equipped with automatic X Pull handle : and release it.
obstacle recognition with a reversing feature. If The tailgate opens automatically.
a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate
when automatically opening or closing, this pro-
cedure is stopped. If the tailgate is stopped dur-
ing the closing procedure, it will open again
automatically. The automatic obstacle recogni-
tion with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not
a substitute for your attentiveness when open-
ing and closing the tailgate.
Z
86 Cargo compartment
Closing is open when the engine is running, particu-

larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear

when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
Opening and closing
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is

opening or closing.
X Pull the tailgate down using recess :.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.
found in the "Vehicle data" section
X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & (Y page 392).
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the cargo the tailgate (Y page 85).
compartment, the tailgate will not lock.
Opening the tailgate automatically
Opening/closing automatically from You can open the tailgate automatically with the
the outside SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.
X Press and hold the F button on the Smart-
Important safety notes Key until the tailgate opens.
or
G WARNING X When the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate
Parts of the body could become trapped dur- handle and let it go again immediately.
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More- or
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in X With the tailgate stopped in an intermediate
the closing area or may enter the closing area position, pull the tailgate upwards.
during the closing process. There is a risk of You can release the tailgate as soon as the
injury. tailgate starts to open.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process. Closing the tailgate automatically
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Rpull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
Cargo compartment 87
X To close: press closing button : in the tail- open the tailgate pull on the remote operating
gate. switch.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO G WARNING
starting function: press and hold the F
button on the SmartKey until the tailgate Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
closes. gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
You can release the button as soon as the is open when the engine is running, particu-
tailgate starts to close. larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
or could enter the passenger compartment.
X Pull the tailgate down slightly. There is a risk of poisoning.
You can release the tailgate as soon as the
Opening and closing

tailgate starts to close.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
starting function: you can close and lock the ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
tailgate simultaneously. when opened. Therefore, make sure that
X Press locking button ; in the tailgate. there is sufficient clearance above and behind
If a KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO starting the tailgate.
function key is detected outside the vehicle, Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
the tailgate closes and locks. All the doors opening or closing.
must be shut and the SmartKey located in the The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
vicinity of the tailgate. found in the "Vehicle data" section
i The tailgate cannot be opened and closed (Y page 392).
with the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey in the
ignition. i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for
the tailgate (Y page 85).
If the tailgate touches an object while closing,
the closing procedure is interrupted and the
tailgate reopens. Opening and closing
If a KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO starting
function key is detected in the cargo com-
partment, the tailgate will not lock.
Opening/closing automatically from

inside
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. In addi- X To open: pull remote operating switch : for
tion, people may be standing in the closing the tailgate until the tailgate opens.
area or may enter the closing area, e.g. chil- X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or
dren, during the closing procedure. There is a 2 in the ignition lock.
risk of injury. X Press remote operating switch for tailgate :
until the tailgate is completely closed.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process. You can open and close the tailgate from the
Release the remote operating switch imme- driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and
unlocked.
diately if somebody becomes trapped. To re-
Z
88 Side windows
Limiting the opening angle of the tail- Opening

gate
General notes
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
open the tailgate fully when setting the open-
ing angle. The tailgate could otherwise be
damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle out-
side.
Activating
Opening and closing
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate.

This is possible in the top half of its opening X Take mechanical key ; out of the SmartKey
range, up to approximately 4 in (10 cm) before (Y page 79).
the stop. X Insert mechanical key ; or a suitable tool,
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the e.g. a thin screwdriver, into opening : in the
tailgate. paneling and push it in.
X To stop the opening procedure at the The tailgate is released.
desired position: press the closing button in X Open the tailgate.
the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
of the tailgate again. (Y page 79).
X To save the position: press and hold the
closing button in the tailgate until two short
tones sound.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
Side windows
tailgate will now stop in the stored position Important safety notes
when opening.
G WARNING
Deactivating While opening the side windows, body parts
X Press and hold the closing button in the tail- could become trapped between the side win-
gate until you hear a short tone. dow and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
Tailgate emergency release dow during the opening procedure. If some-
body becomes trapped, release the switch or
General notes pull the switch to close the side window again.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
when opened. Therefore, make sure that G WARNING
there is sufficient clearance above and behind While closing the side windows, body parts in
the tailgate. the closing area could become trapped. There
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be is a risk of injury.
found in the "Vehicle data" section When closing make sure that no parts of the
(Y page 392).
body are in the closing area. If somebody
If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked:
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
Rusing the SmartKey, or
the switch to open the side window again.
Rusing the remote operating switch in the door
control panel:
Use the emergency release.
Side windows 89
G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Opening and closing

: Front left
Side window reversing feature ; Front right
= Rear right
The side windows are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks ? Rear left
or restricts a side window during the closing X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
process, the side window opens again automat- ignition lock.
ically. However, the automatic reversing feature X To open manually: press and hold the cor-
is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responding switch.
responsibility of paying attention when closing a X To open fully: press the switch beyond the
side window.
pressure point and release it.
G WARNING Automatic operation is started.
X To close manually: pull the corresponding
The reversing feature does not react:
switch and hold it.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
gers pressure point and release it.
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing Automatic operation is started.
movement X To interrupt automatic operation: press/
Rduring resetting pull the corresponding switch again.
Rwhen closing the side window again man- If you press the switch beyond the pressure
point and release, automatic operation is star-
ually immediately after automatic reversing
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
This means that the reversing feature cannot automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- switch again.
uations. There is a risk of injury. You can continue to operate the side windows
Make sure that no body parts are in close after you switch off the engine or remove the
SmartKey. This function is available for up to five
proximity during the closing procedure. If
minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger
someone becomes trapped, press the switch door is opened.
to open the side window again. The side windows cannot be operated from the
rear when the override feature for the side win-
dows is activated (Y page 65).
Opening and closing the side win-
dows
Opening and closing the hinged side
The switches for all side windows are located on windows
the driver's door. There is also a switch on each
door for the corresponding side window. The hinged side windows are operated electri-
The switches on the driver's door take prece- cally from the from the driver's seat.
dence.
Z
90 Side windows
Convenience opening
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip
of the SmartKey at the door handle on the
driver's door.
X Press and hold the % button until the side
windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the
desired position.
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the
roller sunblinds are opened first.
Opening and closing
X Press and hold the % button again until the

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock. panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
in the desired position.
X To open fully: press switch : and release it.
X To interrupt convenience opening: release
X To close fully: pull switch : and release it.
the % button.
X To stop the closing procedure: press
switch : again.
If the hinged side windows become blocked dur- Convenience closing feature
ing closing, the closing procedure is stopped.
The hinged side windows then open again fully. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Convenience opening When the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
General notes
in the closing area of the side window and the
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
start function: you can ventilate the vehicle Observe the complete closing procedure
before you start driving.
when the convenience closing feature is oper-
To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
following functions simultaneously:
close proximity during the closing procedure.
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the side windows When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-
Ropen the hinged side windows ously:
Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof Rclose the side windows
with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller Rclose the hinged side windows
sunblinds Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's with power tilt/sliding panel
seat On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
The convenience opening feature can only be tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller
operated using the SmartKey. The SmartKey sunblinds.
must be close to the vehicle. For vehicles with- Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
out KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKey must be near
the driver's door handle. RRelease the & button to interrupt the clos-
ing procedure.
The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-
able when the vehicle is unlocked. RPress and hold the % button to open.
Side windows 91
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Using KEYLESS-GO

RRelease the sensor surfaces on the exterior
door handle to interrupt the closing proce-
dure.
RTo open, pull the same door handle immedi-
ately and hold it firmly. The door windows and
the sliding sunroof will open for as long as the
door handle is held but the door is not
opened.
Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:
Rthe side window (Y page 89)
Opening and closing

Rthe sliding sunroof (Y page 93)
Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel (Y page 93) XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with
Using the SmartKey power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
The SmartKey must be close to the vehicle. For i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor
vehicles without KEYLESS-GO, the SmartKey surface :.
must be near the driver's door handle. X Make sure that all the side windows and the
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power
of the SmartKey at the door handle on the tilt/sliding panel are closed.
driver's door. X Vehicles with a panorama roof with
X Press and hold the & button until the side power tilt/sliding panel: touch recessed
windows and the sliding sunroof or the pano- sensor surface : on the door handle again
rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
fully closed. with power tilt/sliding panel close.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the X To interrupt convenience closing: release
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power recessed sensor surface : on the door han-
tilt/sliding panel are closed. dle.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
X Press and hold the & button again until the Resetting the side windows
roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
power tilt/sliding panel close. you must reset it.
X To interrupt convenience closing: release X Close all the doors.
the & button. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed (Y page 89).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
the door control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 89).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the respective side window remains closed
after the button is released, then it has been
Z
92 Sliding sunroof
set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the

steps above.
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Opening and closing
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be X Remove the objects.
closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
closed and you cannot slightly:
see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
The side windows cannot The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
be opened or closed with X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary
convenience opening. (Y page 80).
If a side window will still not open or close due to a malfunction, consult a qualified specialist
workshop.
Sliding sunroof G WARNING

While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
body parts in close proximity could become
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding trapped. There is a risk of injury.
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel. In the following section, the term Make sure that no body parts are in close
"sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof proximity during the opening and closing pro-
variants. cedures.
Sliding sunroof 93
If somebody becomes trapped: G WARNING

Rrelease the switch immediately, or The reversing feature does not react:
Rduring automatic operation, push the Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
switch briefly in any direction gers
The opening or closing procedure will be stop- Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
ped. movement
Rduring resetting
G WARNING Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-
If children operate the sliding sunroof they ually immediately after automatic reversing
could become trapped, particularly if they are
Opening and closing

This means that the reversing feature cannot
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the uations. There is a risk of injury.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Make sure that no body parts are in close
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. proximity during the closing procedure.
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of If somebody becomes trapped:
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may Rrelease the switch immediately, or
occur.
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be automatic closing process
damaged. The closing process is stopped.
! The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-
ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi- Operating the sliding sunroof
cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if
water enters the vehicle interior. Opening and closing
Resonance noises can occur in addition to the
usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is
open. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-
tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-
tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side win-
dow. The noise will be reduced or eliminated.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel. In the following section, the term : To raise
"sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof
variants. ; To open
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto- = To close/lower
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing ignition lock.
process, the sliding sunroof opens again auto- X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corre-
matically. However, the automatic reversing sponding direction.
feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of
the responsibility of paying attention when clos- If you press the 2 switch beyond the pres-
ing the sliding sunroof. sure point, an automatic opening/closing proc-
ess is started in the corresponding direction.
Z
94 Sliding sunroof
You can stop automatic operation by pressing/ Operating the panorama roof with
pulling the switch again. power tilt/sliding panel
When opening and raising the roof, automatic
operation is only available if the sliding sunroof Opening and closing
is in the closed position.
The sun protection cover automatically opens
along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or
close the sun protection cover manually when
the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof
after switching off the engine or removing the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function is
Opening and closing
available for up to five minutes or until the driv-

er's or front-passenger door is opened.
Resetting
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened : To raise
or closed fully after resetting, contact a quali- ; To open
fied specialist workshop. = To close/lower
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
smoothly. can only be opened when the roller sunblind is
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the open.
ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear ignition lock.
(Y page 93). X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corre-
X Keep the 2 switch pressed for another sponding direction.
second. If you press/pull the 2 switch beyond the
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully pressure point, automatic operation is started in
opened and closed again (Y page 93). the corresponding direction. You can stop auto-
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above. matic operation by pressing/pulling the switch
again.
The automatic raising feature is available only
when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is closed.
Operating the roller sunblinds for the

panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
between the roller sunblind and frame or slid-
ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-
ing. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-
blind.
Sliding sunroof 95
If somebody becomes trapped: Opening and closing the roller sun-

blinds
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
ped.
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior

from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only be
opened and closed together when the pano-
rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
Opening and closing

Roller sunblind reversing feature
: Opens
The roller sunblinds are equipped with an auto- ; Opens
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts a roller sunblind during the closing = Closes
process, the roller sunblind opens again auto- X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
matically. However, the automatic reversing ignition lock.
feature is only an aid and is not a substitute of X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corre-
your attentiveness when closing the roller sun- sponding direction.
blind.
If you press the 2 switch beyond the pres-
G WARNING sure point, an automatic opening/closing proc-
The reversing feature does not react in par- ess is started in the corresponding direction.
You can stop automatic operation by pressing/
ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small pulling the switch again.
fingers. This means that the reversing feature
cannot prevent someone being trapped in Resetting the panorama roof with
these situations. There is a risk of injury. power tilt/sliding panel and the roller
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure sunblinds
that no body parts are in the sweep area.
! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel and the roller sunblinds cannot be fully
Rrelease the switch immediately, or opened or closed after resetting, contact a
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
qualified specialist workshop.
automatic closing process Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel and the roller sunblinds if the panorama
The closing process is stopped. roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller
sunblinds do not move smoothly.
ignition lock.
X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow = until
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is fully closed.
X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an additional
second.
X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow = until
the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
Z
96 Sliding sunroof
X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an additional X Make sure that the panorama roof with power
second. tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds can
be fully opened again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
Problems with the sliding sunroof

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel. In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof variants.
G WARNING
Opening and closing
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again
not be closed and you slightly:
cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2 switch in
the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold
it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2 switch in
the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold
it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea-
ture.
Seats 97
Correct driver's seat position Ryou should have a good overview of traffic
conditions
Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
G WARNING and is routed across the center of your shoul-
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do der and across your hips in the pelvic area
the following while driving: Further related subjects:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, RElectrical seat adjustment (Y page 98)
steering wheel or mirrors RAdjusting the steering wheel mechanically
Rfasten the seat belt (Y page 108) or electrically (Y page 109)
RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 48).
There is a risk of an accident.
RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- mirrors (Y page 110).
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt RVehicles with memory function: storing the
before starting the engine. seat, steering wheel, exterior mirror and
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Head-up display settings with the memory
function (Y page 113)
Seats
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is no

SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Observe the following when adjusting steering
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: G WARNING
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
possible occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
cushion has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you
can depress the pedals properly Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level (Y page 49) and "Children in the Vehicle"
by the center of the head restraint (Y page 59).
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
Ryou can move your legs freely
Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument
cluster clearly
Z
98 Seats
G WARNING Adjust the seat properly before beginning

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
the following while driving: is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
across the center of your shoulder.
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
There is a risk of an accident. heating, observe the following information:
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
before starting the engine.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat heat-
G WARNING ing should also not be used to dry the seats.
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and see "Interior care".
thereby injured. Children in particular could Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- Do not place sharp objects on the seat
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The
risk of injury. seats should only be occupied by passen-
gers, if possible.
While moving the seats, make sure that your Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
hands or other body parts do not get under the not cover the seats with insulating materi-
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys- als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,
tem. child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
G WARNING footwell under or behind the seats when mov-
If the head restraints are not installed or not ing the seats back. There is a risk that the
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro- seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
tection as intended. There is an increased risk i Further related subjects:
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
RCargo compartment enlargement (folding
event of an accident or when braking. down the rear bench seat) (Y page 303)
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head Adjusting the seats electrically
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury. : Head restraint height
; Seat cushion angle
= Seat height
Seats 99
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Adjusting the head restraints manually

A Backrest angle
Adjusting the head restraint height
i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-
SAFE® has been triggered, the front-
passenger seat will be moved to a better posi-
tion if it was previously in an unfavorable posi-
tion.
i Vehicles with memory function: when the
seat is moved forwards or backwards, the
headrest is moved up or down automatically.
Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
G WARNING
X To lower: press release catch : in the direc-
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
the following while driving: down to the desired position.
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the
head restraint
Rfasten the seat belt
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking. With this function you can adjust the distance
Always drive with the head restraints instal- between the head restraint and the back of the
seat occupant's head.
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
X To move forwards: pull the head restraint
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
forwards in the direction of the arrow until it
restraint supports the back of the head at engages.
about eye level.
There are several notches.
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and X To move backwards: press and hold release
rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the button : and push the head restraint back-
height and angle of the head restraints to the wards.
correct position. X When the head restraint is in the desired posi-
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the tion, release the button and make sure that
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to the head restraint is engaged in position.
your head. i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of
Observe the important safety notes regarding your head is as close to the head restraint as
the seats (Y page 97). possible.
Z
100 Seats
Adjusting the head restraints electri- X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press
cally release catch :.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide desired position.
the switch for the head restraint adjustment X To lower: press release catch : and push
(Y page 98) up or down in the direction of the
arrow. the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Adjusting the luxury head restraints Removing and installing the rear seat
head restraints
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the
stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that

the notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear it
engage in position.
X To adjust the side bolsters: push or pull

Rear seats (second and third row of
right-hand and/or left-hand side bolster :
into the desired position. seats)
X To adjust the fore-and-aft position of the Important safety notes
head restraint: push or pull the head
restraint in the direction of arrow ;. G WARNING
i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they
your head is as close to the head restraint as can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden
possible.
braking or an accident.
Rear seat head restraints RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to be
forced into the seat belt by a seat or back-
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint rest which is not engaged. The seat belt can
height no longer offer the intended level of pro-
tection and could even cause injuries.
RA child restraint system would no longer be
anchored or positioned correctly and would
not be able to perform its required function.
RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objects
or loads in the cargo compartment.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Always make sure that the seat and backrest
are engaged as described:
Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seat
with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Rafter you have adjusted the seat
Seats 101
Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has You can adjust the angle of the backrests in the
been used second row of seats. There are ten detent posi-
tions to choose from.
Rafter the cargo compartment enlargement
X Pull the left or right release lever ; upwards
has been folded forwards in the direction of the arrow until relevant
backrest : is fully released.
G WARNING X Pull backrest : forwards in the direction of
The seat does not engage in the entry/exit the arrow and allow it to engage.
position. The seat could fold back suddenly, X To ensure that the backrest has engaged, lean
e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing firmly against backrest :.
direction suddenly or in the event of an acci-
dent. Persons in the sweep of the seat could Folding the seats up/down (third row of
become trapped. There is a risk of injury. seats)
Always fold back a seat which has been folded

forwards before you pull away. Make sure that
General notes
the seat and backrest engage fully. ! Make sure that there is nothing on the fol-
ded-down seats in the cargo compartment.
The cargo compartment must be empty for
G WARNING the third row of seats to be folded up. The
Children could become trapped if they adjust seats or the objects in the cargo compart-
the seats, particularly when unattended. ment could otherwise be damaged.
There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the seats in the third row are
When leaving the vehicle, always take the empty and not blocked before folding them
down.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The third row of seats consists of two electrically
foldable individual seats, which can be lowered
into the cargo compartment.
G WARNING
If the seat is not correctly locked in position, the
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle display message: 3rd Seat Row, Right Not
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the Locked appears in the multifunction display.
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. If you fold the seat back until it engages, the
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one display message disappears.
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fully
engaged.
The switches for folding the left or right-hand
Adjusting the backrest angle (second seats up and down are marked: L for the left-
row of seats) hand seat when viewed in the direction of travel,
R for the right-hand seat when viewed in the
direction of travel.
Z
102 Seats
Folding up/down in the rear compart- X To fold down: briefly pull switch :.
ment The seat folds down.
X To stop the automatic folding: briefly pull
switch : again.
Detachable panel (third row of seats)

! If there are objects underneath the seat, the
seat can no longer be folded up or down fully.
The seat could be damaged.
Only drive with the panel completely installed.
Example: R switch
X To fold down: fold the right-hand outer seat
in the second row of seats forwards
(Y page 103).
X Briefly pull switch :.
The seat folds up.
X To stop the automatic folding: briefly pull
switch : again.
X To fold down: briefly press switch :.
The seat folds down. If you drop objects underneath the seats in the
third row, you can remove the panel in order to
X To stop the automatic folding: briefly press
reach beneath the seat.
switch : again.
X To open: fold the corresponding seat up or
Folding up/down in the cargo compart- down (Y page 101).
ment X Once the seat is folded halfway up or down,
briefly press the button again to stop the
automatic movement.
X Grasp the panel recess.
X Pull the panel in the direction of the arrow and
remove it.
X To close: fold the corresponding seat up or
down (Y page 101).
X Once the seat is folded halfway up or down,
briefly press the button again to stop the
automatic movement.
X Attach the panel using the guide pins.
X Push the panel downwards until it engages.
Example: L switch X Fold the seat up and down fully to check that
X To fold down: fold the right-hand outer seat the panel is seated correctly.
in the second row of seats forwards
(Y page 103).
X Briefly press switch :.
The seat folds up.
X To stop the automatic folding up: briefly
press switch : again.
Seats 103
Folding down the seats in the second If the right outer rear seat in the second row of
row manually seats is in the entry/exit position: the display
message: 2nd Seat Row, Right Not Locked
Important safety notes appears in the multifunction display, for exam-
ple.
G WARNING If you fold the seat back until it engages, the
If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they display message disappears.
can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fully
braking or an accident. engaged.
RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to be i Further related subjects:
forced into the seat belt by a seat or back- RCargo compartment enlargement (folding
rest which is not engaged. The seat belt can the second row of seats forwards)
no longer offer the intended level of pro- (Y page 303)
tection and could even cause injuries. RFolding the seats in the third row forwards/

back (Y page 101)
anchored or positioned correctly and would Entry position
Always make sure that the seat and backrest
are engaged as described:
Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seat
with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Rafter you have adjusted the seat
Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has
been used X Move the head restraint to the lowest position
Rafter the cargo compartment enlargement (Y page 100).
has been folded forwards X Pull release handle ; in the direction of the
arrow to the pressure point and hold it in this
position.
G WARNING The backrest folds forwards.
The seat does not engage in the entry/exit
You have two options for folding the seat down
position. The seat could fold back suddenly, fully.
e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing
X Pull release handle ; again in the direction of
direction suddenly or in the event of an acci- the arrow to the pressure point and hold it in
dent. Persons in the sweep of the seat could this position.
become trapped. There is a risk of injury. or
Always fold back a seat which has been folded X Pull on release loop : in the direction of the
forwards before you pull away. Make sure that arrow and hold in this position.
the seat and backrest engage fully. X Lift up the seat until it folds forwards.
i Vehicles with memory function: the front
General notes seats move forwards slightly.
Getting into or out of the third row of seats: you
can fold forward the right outer seat in the sec-
ond row of seats.
Z
104 Seats
X Pull on release loop : in the direction of the

arrow and hold in this position.
The backrest folds forwards.
X Pull on release loop : again in the direction
of the arrow and hold in this position.
X Lift up the seat until it folds forwards.
i Vehicles with memory function: the front
seats move forwards slightly.
Entry position
Exit position
G WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Exit position
i Vehicles with memory function: in order to
i Further related subjects: return the front seats to the saved position,
RImportant safety notes on air bags call up the saved seat setting using the mem-
(Y page 49) ory buttons.
RSecuring children in the vehicle Moving the outer seats back to the normal
(Y page 59) position (second row of seats)
G WARNING
If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they
can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden
braking or an accident.
RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to be
forced into the seat belt by a seat or back-
rest which is not engaged. The seat belt can
no longer offer the intended level of pro-
tection and could even cause injuries.
If you wish to exit the third row of seats, fold anchored or positioned correctly and would
down the outer seat on the right-hand side as
follows.
The release loop for the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-
ture is located at the bottom on the back of the or loads in the cargo compartment.
right outer seat in the second row of seats. There is an increased risk of injury.
Seats 105
Always make sure that the seat and backrest Always make sure that the seat and backrest
are engaged as described: are engaged as described:
Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seat Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seat
with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Rafter you have adjusted the seat Rafter you have adjusted the seat
Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has
been used been used
Rafter the cargo compartment enlargement Rafter the cargo compartment enlargement
has been folded forwards has been folded forwards
G WARNING G WARNING
The seat does not engage in the entry/exit The seat does not engage in the entry/exit

position. The seat could fold back suddenly, position. The seat could fold back suddenly,
e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing
direction suddenly or in the event of an acci- direction suddenly or in the event of an acci-
dent. Persons in the sweep of the seat could dent. Persons in the sweep of the seat could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury. become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Always fold back a seat which has been folded Always fold back a seat which has been folded
forwards before you pull away. Make sure that forwards before you pull away. Make sure that
the seat and backrest engage fully. the seat and backrest engage fully.
X To lock the seat: fold back the seat until it General notes
engages. To enter or exit the third row of seats: the outer
X Fold back the backrest until it engages. left and right seats of the second row can be
folded down electrically.
Folding down the seats in the second One of the outer seats of the second row is in the
row electrically entry/exit position: the multifunction display
shows, e.g. the 2nd Seat Row, Right Not
Important safety notes Locked display message.
If you fold the seat back until it engages, the
G WARNING display message disappears.
If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fully
can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden engaged.
braking or an accident. i Further related subjects:
RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to be RCargo compartment enlargement (folding
forced into the seat belt by a seat or back- the second row of seats forwards)
rest which is not engaged. The seat belt can (Y page 303)
no longer offer the intended level of pro- RFolding the seats in the third row forwards/
tection and could even cause injuries. back (Y page 101)
RA child restraint system would no longer be Folding down the seats
anchored or positioned correctly and would The seats can be folded down electrically if the
not be able to perform its required function. vehicle is stationary and the respective rear
RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objects door is open.
Z
106 Seats
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
X Press button :.
The head restraint retracts, the backrest folds
forwards and the seat folds forwards. : Raises the backrest contour
The seat can be manually returned to its initial ; Softens the backrest contour
position (Y page 103). = Lowers the backrest contour
? Hardens the backrest contour
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
Adjusting the multicontour seat backrests individually to provide optimum sup-
port for your back.
The multicontour seat can be adjusted via the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
Seat heating and seat ventilation

Switching the seat heating on/off
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a
risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.
Driver's and front-passenger seat

Seats 107
Rear seats
The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes.

The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.
The system automatically switches off approximately 35 minutes after it is set to level 1.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 140).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.
Activating/deactivating seat ventilation
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the blower setting you have selected.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 140).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired blower setting is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off.
i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature
(Y page 90). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level.
Z
108 Steering wheel
Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation

The seat heating or seat The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ventilation has switched ers are switched on.
off prematurely or can- X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
not be switched on. rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat
ventilation will switch back on automatically.
Steering wheel control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering

G WARNING wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
the following while driving:
Rfasten the seat belt
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
G WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they : Release lever
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of ; Adjusts the steering wheel height
injury. = Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the and-aft adjustment)
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Push release lever : down completely.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The steering column is unlocked.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can tion.
still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in X Push release lever : up completely.
the ignition lock. The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked. When
doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or
Adjusting the steering wheel man- down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
ually direction.
G WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
Steering wheel 109
Adjusting the steering wheel electri- Steering wheel heating

cally
Switching on/off

: Adjusts the steering wheel height
; Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
and-aft adjustment) tion lock (Y page 140).
The steering wheel can also be adjusted when X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-
the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. tion of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
i Further related subjects:
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 109) the ignition and open the driver's door, the
RStoring settings (Y page 113) steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Problems with the steering wheel heating

The steering wheel heat- The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ing has switched off pre- ers are switched on.
maturely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
switched on. rear window defroster or interior lighting.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if

there is a risk of entrapment by the steering
Important safety notes wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
G WARNING Press one of the memory function position but-
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts tons. This function is only available on vehicles
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle with memory function.
occupants – particularly children – could
G WARNING
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ture, they can become trapped, particularly
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
Z
110 Mirrors
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. gered in an accident, the steering column will
move upwards when the driver's door is opened.
G WARNING This occurs irrespective of the position of the
SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it eas-
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT ier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is
accident. activated in the on-board computer
Always wait until the adjustment process is (Y page 244).
complete before driving off.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in Mirrors

and out of your vehicle easier.

You can activate and deactivate the EASY- Rear-view mirror
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer
(Y page 244).
Position of the steering wheel when the

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings up when you:
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Ropen the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is in
position 1.
Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is in
position u or 1 in the ignition lock.
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : for-
i The steering wheel only moves up if it has wards or back.
not already reached the upper stop.
Position of the steering wheel for driv-

Exterior mirrors
ing
The steering wheel is moved to the last selected Adjusting the exterior mirrors
position when:
G WARNING
Rthe driver's door is closed
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
the following while driving:
or
Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehi- Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
cles with KEYLESS-GO steering wheel or mirrors
When you close the driver's door with the igni- Rfasten the seat belt
tion switched on, the steering wheel is also There is a risk of an accident.
automatically moved to the previously set posi-
tion. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
The last position of the steering column is stored ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
when you: before starting the engine.
Rswitch the ignition off
Rsave the setting with the memory function
(Y page 113).
Mirrors 111
G WARNING Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger electrically
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.

ignition lock (Y page 140).
X Briefly press :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
i If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-
rior mirrors.
ignition lock (Y page 140). Resetting the exterior mirrors
X Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but-
ton :. If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be
Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side: reset. Otherwise, the exterior mirrors will not
press button ;. fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when
The indicator lamp in the corresponding but- locking" function in the on-board computer
ton lights up in red. (Y page 245).
The indicator lamp goes out again after some X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
time. You can adjust the selected exterior tion lock (Y page 140).
mirror using button = as long as the indicator
X Briefly press :.
lamp is lit.
X Press button = up, down, or to the right or
left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
to the correct position. You should have a automatically
good overview of traffic conditions.
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field activated in the on-board computer
of vision. (Y page 245):
The exterior mirrors are heated automatically if Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
the rear window defroster is switched on and the soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
outside temperature is low.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati-
cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.
Z
112 Mirrors
Exterior mirror pushed out of position The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on
the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of mode if the following conditions are met simul-
position, proceed as follows: taneously:
X Vehicles without electrically folding exte- Rthe ignition is switched on and
rior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
the correct position manually.
sor in the rear-view mirror
X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding but-
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting
ton : until you hear a click and the mirror is switched on.
engages in position audibly.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 110). Parking position for the exterior mir-
ror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position

Automatic anti-glare mirrors
You can position the front-passenger side exte-
G WARNING rior mirror in such a way that you can see the
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage
matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte reverse gear. You can store this position.
is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res- Using reverse gear
piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
observe the following:
RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
induce vomiting. : Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your ; Button for the front-passenger side exterior
mirror
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
= Adjustment button
attention immediately.
? Memory button M
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with electrolyte.
X Bring the vehicle to a standstill.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
tion lock (Y page 140).
attention immediately. X Press button ;.
Memory function 113
X Engage reverse gear. Memory function

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the default setting parking posi- Storing settings
tion.
X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to G WARNING
a position that allows you to see the rear If you use the memory function on the driver's
wheel and the curb. side while driving, you could lose control of
The parking position is stored.
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
i If you shift the transmission to another posi- being made. There is a risk of an accident.
tion, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving position. Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
Using the memory button
G WARNING
You can store the parking position of the exte-

rior mirror on the front-passenger side using When the memory function adjusts the seat or
memory button M ?. The reverse gear must not steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-
be engaged during the process. pants – particularly children – could become
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- trapped. There is a risk of injury.
tion lock (Y page 140). While the memory function is making adjust-
X Press button ;. ments, make sure that no one has any body
X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
a position that allows you to see the rear wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-
wheel and the curb. diately release the memory function position
X Press memory button M ? and one of the button. The adjustment process is stopped.
arrows on button = within three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior G WARNING
mirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the Children could become trapped if they acti-
steps. vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
Calling up a stored parking position set- When leaving the vehicle, always take the
ting SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
tion lock (Y page 140). The memory function can be used at any time,
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignition
passenger side using button ;. lock.
X Engage reverse gear. With the memory function, you can store up to
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger three different settings, e.g. for three different
side moves to the stored parking position. people.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side The following settings are stored as a single
moves back to its original position: memory preset:
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
(15 km/h) restraint
Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror Rdriver's side: steering wheel position
on the driver's side Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
Z
114 Memory function
X Adjust the seat (Y page 98).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel
(Y page 109) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 110).
X Press memory button M and then press mem-
ory position button 1, 2 or 3 within three sec-
onds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. A tone sounds when the settings
have been completed.
The memory function can still be used if the
SmartKey has been removed.
Calling up a stored setting

X Press and hold the relevant storage position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel
and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as
you release the storage position buttons.
Exterior lighting 115
Exterior lighting Automatic headlamp mode

c is the favored light switch position. The
General notes light setting is automatically selected according
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom- to the brightness of the ambient light (excep-
mends that you drive with the lights switched on tion: poor visibility due to weather conditions
even during the daytime. In some countries, such as fog, snow or spray):
operation of the headlamps varies due to legal RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
requirements and self-imposed obligations. the parking lamps are switched on/off auto-
matically depending on the brightness of the
ambient light.
Setting the exterior lighting RWith the engine running (USA only): if you
have switched on the Daytime Running
Setting options Lights function in the on-board computer,
the daytime running lamps or the parking
Exterior lighting can be set using: lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched
Rthe light switch on or off automatically depending on the
Rthe combination switch (Y page 116) brightness of the ambient light.
Lights and windshield wipers

Rthe on-board computer (Y page 243) X To switch on automatic headlamp mode:
turn the light switch to c.
Light switch G WARNING
Operation When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp mode is only an aid.

The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-
ing at all times.
Canada only:
1 W Left-hand standing lamps The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
2 X Right-hand standing lamps of your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and ning lamps function is required by law in Can-
instrument cluster lighting ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
4 c Automatic headlamp mode, controlled When the engine is running and the vehicle is
by the light sensor stationary: if you move the selector lever from a
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps driving position to P, the daytime running
B R Rear fog lamp lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three
minutes.
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the
X Turn the light switch to c. light switch to the T position, the daytime
The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand- running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
ing lamps) switches off automatically if you: If the engine is running and you turn the light
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock switch to L, the manual settings take prec-
edence over the daytime running lamps.
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
position u in the ignition lock USA only:
Z
116 Exterior lighting
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility X To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
daytime running lamps function must be ment cluster lights up.
switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 243). Standing lamps
If the engine is running and you turn the light Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
switch to T or L, the manual settings corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
take precedence over the daytime running X To switch on the standing lamps: the
lamps.
SmartKey should not be in the ignition lock or
Low-beam headlamps in key position u in the ignition lock.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head- the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on vehicle).
and the light switch is set to the L position. Vehicles towing a trailer: both the right-hand
This is a particularly useful function in the event and left-hand standing lamps (tail lamps) are
of rain and fog. always illuminated on the trailer.
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock or start the engine. Combination switch
X Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick
fog. Please take note of the country-specific
regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or
start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or c. : High-beam headlamps
X Press the R button. ; Turn signal, right
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru- = High-beam flasher
ment cluster lights up. ? Turn signal, left
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
R button. switch briefly to the pressure point in the
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru- direction of arrow ; or ?.
ment cluster goes out. The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
Parking lamps
X To indicate: press the combination switch
! If the battery charge is very low, the parking beyond the pressure point in the direction of
lamps or standing lamps are automatically arrow ; or ?.
switched off to enable the next engine start. X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit
turn the light switch to L or Ã.
area, in accordance with the relevant legal
stipulations. Avoid using the T parking X Press the combination switch beyond the
lamps over a period of several hours. If pos- pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
sible, switch on the right-hand X or left- In the Ã position, the high-beam head-
hand W standing lamps. lamps are only switched on when it is dark and
the engine is running.
Exterior lighting 117
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- Intelligent Light System

ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on. General notes
X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
move the combination switch back to its nor- The Intelligent Light System is a system that
mal position. adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- prevailing driving and weather conditions. It
ment cluster goes out. offers advanced functions for improved illumi-
nation of the road surface, e.g. depending on the
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: if vehicle speed or weather conditions. The sys-
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, it auto- tem includes the active light function, cornering
matically controls activation and deactivation of light function, highway mode and extended
the high-beam headlamps (Y page 118). range fog lamps. The system is only active when
it is dark.
You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent
Hazard warning lamps Light System" using the on-board computer
(Y page 243).

Active light function
The active light function is a system that moves
the headlamps according to the steering move-
ments of the front wheels. In this way, relevant
areas remain illuminated while driving. This
allows you to recognize pedestrians, cyclists
and animals sooner.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist: the active
light function evaluates the course of the lane in
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: which you are driving and adjusts the light in
press button :. advance.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
turn signal using the combination switch, only
the turn signal lamp on the corresponding Cornering light function
side of the vehicle will flash. The cornering light function improves the illu-
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: mination of the road over a wide angle in the
press button :. direction you are turning, enabling better visi-
The hazard warning lamps automatically switch bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be
on if: activated when the low-beam headlamps are
switched on.
Ran air bag is deployed or
Active:
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed
Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a
standstill (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-
Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above
6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli- (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
cation. the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the time, but is automatically switched off after no
ignition is switched off. more than three minutes.
Z
118 Exterior lighting
Highway mode detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the

high-beam headlamps.
Highway mode increases the range of the beam. The system's optical sensor is located behind
Active: if you are driving at a speed above the windshield near the overhead control panel.
110 km/h and do not make any large steering
movements for at least 1,000 m or if you are
driving at a speed above 130 km/h.
Not active: if you are driving at speeds below G WARNING
80 km/h following activation.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
Extended range fog lamps
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
The extended range fog lamps reduce the glare
experienced by the driver and improve the illu- Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
mination of the edge of the road. Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
Active: if you are driving at speeds below On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
40 mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rear Assist may fail to recognize other road users
fog lamp.
that have lights, or may recognize them too

Not active: if, following activation, you are driv- late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-
ing at speeds above 60 mph (100 km/h) or if you
switch off the rear fog lamp matic high-beam headlamps will not be deac-
tivated or will be activated regardless. There is
Off-road lights a risk of an accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
The off-road lights facilitate the early recogni- and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
tion of objects/obstacles when driving off-road
good time.
thanks to a symmetrical, wider and brighter dis-
tribution of light from the low-beam headlamps.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
Active: when driving at speeds no faster than account road, weather or traffic conditions.
30 mph (50 km/h) and the off-road program Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
selector wheel is in position 1 or 2. responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
Not active: when driving at speeds above to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-
30 mph (50 km/h). ditions.
When the off-road lights are switched on, the In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
cornering light function is permanently activa- impaired if:
ted, the active light function is deactivated and Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
the headlamp range control is set to static snow
mode.
Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
General notes on/off
You can use this function to set the headlamps X To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
to change between low beam and high beam X Press the combination switch beyond the
automatically. The system recognizes vehicles pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
with their lights on, either approaching from the The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
opposite direction or traveling in front of your display lights up when it is dark and the light
vehicle, and consequently switches the head- sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.
lamps from high beam to low beam. If you are driving at speeds above approx-
The system automatically adapts the low-beam imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
headlamp range depending on the distance to
the other vehicle. Once the system no longer
Interior lighting 119
The headlamp range is set automatically = v Switches the rear interior lighting on/
depending on the distance between the vehi- off
cle and other road users. ? | Switches the front interior lighting/
If you are driving at speeds above approx- automatic interior lighting control off
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road A p Switches the right-hand front reading
users have been detected: lamp on/off
The high-beam headlamps are switched on B Switches the automatic interior lighting con-
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the trol on
instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users
have been detected or the roads are ade-
quately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-
cator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.

X To switch off: move the combination switch
back to its normal position or move the light
switch to another position. Rear overhead control panel (second row of seats)
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
: To switch the reading lamp on/off
display goes out.
Headlamps fogged up on the inside

Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of the
headlamp.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting Rear overhead control panel (third row of seats)
: Reading lamp
Interior lighting control

General notes
The interior light functions are automatically
switched off after some time to prevent the
vehicle's battery from discharging, unless the
SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
The color and brightness of the ambient lighting
are set using the multimedia system (see Digital
Overhead control panel Operator's Manual).
: p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
; c Switches the front interior lighting on
Z
120 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
Automatic interior lighting control Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halo-

X To switch on: set the switch to center posi- gen headlamps)
tion B.
X To switch off: set the switch to the |
position. G WARNING
The interior lighting automatically switches on if Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
you: when operating. If you change a bulb, you
Runlock the vehicle could burn yourself on these components.
Ropen a door There is a risk of injury.
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Allow these components to cool down before
The interior lighting is switched on for a set time changing a bulb.
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its
the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's glass tube has been scratched.
Manual). The bulb may explode if:
Ryou touch it
Rit is hot
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
Ryou drop it
The interior lighting is activated automatically if Ryou scratch it
the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been
X To switch off the crash-responsive emer- designed for this purpose. Only install spare
gency lighting: press the hazard warning bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
lamp button. age.
or Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with
SmartKey. your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it
off with a lint-free cloth.
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with
headlamps) liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 120).
The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself
are equipped with light-emitting diodes. Do not replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
replace the vehicle's bulbs yourself. Contact a
If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-
qualified specialist workshop which has the nec-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
essary specialist knowledge and tools to carry
out the work required. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.
You must therefore make sure that these func- Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
tion correctly at all times. Have the headlamp vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
setting checked regularly. that these function correctly at all times. Have
the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Overview of bulb replacement - bulb

types
You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) 121
Low-beam headlamps
Halogen headlamps
: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing
= Turn signal: W 5 W BV (Y page 121).
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.

X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
Removing and installing the cover in
pull out.
the front wheel housing
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 121).
High-beam headlamps
You must remove the cover from the front wheel

housing before you can change the front bulbs.
X To remove: switch off the lights.
X Turn the front wheel inwards.
X Remove securing pin ; using a suitable tool.
X Slide cover : up and remove it.
X To install: insert cover : again and slide it
down until it engages.
X Insert securing pin ;.
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Pull lever = upwards and remove bulb
holder ;.
X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
Z
122 Windshield wipers
X Simultaneously press on bulb holder ; and windshield using washer fluid after washing
pull lever = downwards. the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it clock-
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to
wise. optical influences and the windshield becom-
ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-
shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.
Turn signals This could then damage the windshield wiper
blades or scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch off
the windshield wipers in dry weather.
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and Combination switch
remove it. 1 $ Windshield wiper off
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set
pull out. to low sensitivity)
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;. set to high sensitivity)
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
right. B í Single wipe
C î To wipe with washer fluid
X Switch on the ignition.
Windshield wipers X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position.
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate
wiping frequency is set automatically according
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,
the windshield is dry, as this could damage the rain sensor is more sensitive than in
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col- the Ä position, causing the windshield wiper
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass to wipe more frequently.
if wiping takes place when the windshield is Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: the
dry. washer fluid is fed through the wiper blades and
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield when wiping with washer fluid î the washer
wipers in dry weather conditions, always use fluid is emitted directly from the blades.
washer fluid when operating the windshield If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will
wipers. no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the you from observing the traffic conditions.
windshield after the vehicle has been washed
in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-
dues may be the reason for this. Clean the
Windshield wipers 123
Switching the rear window wiper on/ Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
off you change the wiper blade. If you release the
wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls
onto the windshield/rear window, the wind-
shield/rear window may be damaged by the
force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Changing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper blades
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Combination switch X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
: è Rear window wiper switch
2 b Wipes with washer fluid

3 I Switches on intermittent wiping
4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping
5 b Wipes with washer fluid
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2
(Y page 140).
X Turn switch : on the combination switch to
the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
X Firmly press release knob : and pull wiper
blade ; upwards from the wiper arm in the
Replacing the wiper blades direction of the arrow.
Important safety notes Installing the wiper blades
G WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make

sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the
wiper. X Position new wiper blade : in the retainer on
! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm the wiper arm and slide it into place in the
has been folded away from the windshield/ direction of the arrow.
rear window. The wiper blade audibly engages.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear rectly.
window. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
Z
124 Windshield wipers
Replacing the rear window wiper blade X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
Removing a wiper blade X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ;
in the direction of the arrow until it releases.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
Installing a wiper blade

X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ;
in the opposite direction to the arrow until it
engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated cor-
rectly.
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window.
X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window
until it engages.
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
are jammed. movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-
tion lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Overview of climate control systems 125
Overview of climate control systems If you start the engine using your smartphone,
the last selected climate control setting is reac-
General notes tivated (Y page 142).
Observe the settings recommended on the fol- i The integrated filter filters out most parti-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog cles of dust and soot and completely filters
up. out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants
To prevent the windows from fogging up: and odors. A clogged filter reduces the
amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.
Climate control
Rswitch off climate control only briefly Depending on the operating conditions and
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly environmental influences, the interval for
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica- replacing the filter may be shorter than speci-
tion function fied.
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function i Vehicles with ionization of the interior
briefly, if required air and air filter: in addition to ionization, the
Climate control regulates the temperature and vehicle has an air filter with anti-allergenic
the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters properties that contribute to improved air fil-
undesirable substances out of the air. tration.
The residual heat function can only be activated
or deactivated with the ignition switched off
i It is possible that under certain circumstan-
ces the residual heat function may be activa-
(Y page 135).
ted automatically an hour after the SmartKey
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during has been removed in order to dry the auto-
warm weather, e.g. using the convenience matic climate control. The vehicle is then ven-
opening feature (Y page 90). This will speed tilated for 30 minutes.
up the cooling process and the desired inte-
rior temperature will be reached more
quickly.
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
USA only
Front control panel
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 132)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 133)
126 Overview of climate control systems
= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 134)

? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 131)
A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 132)
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 135)
D Sets the air distribution (Y page 133)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 133)
Reduces the airflow (Y page 133)
Climate control
F
G Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 131)
H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 132)
Rear control panel
I Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 132)
J Directs the air distribution through the rear air vents (Y page 133)
K Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 106)
L Directs the air distribution through the footwell vents (Y page 133)
M Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 131)
N Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 106)
Canada only
Front control panel
= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 133)
Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 135)
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 135)
D Sets the air distribution (Y page 133)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 133)
F Reduces the airflow (Y page 133)
G Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 131)
H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 132)
Rear control panel

I Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 132)
J Directs the air distribution through the rear air vents (Y page 133)
K Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 106)
L Directs the air distribution through the footwell vents (Y page 133)
M Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 131)
N Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 106)
Climate control
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
USA only
Front control panel
C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 133)
D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 131)
E Sets the air distribution (Y page 133)
F Increases the airflow (Y page 133)
G Reduces the airflow (Y page 133)
H Display
I Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 132)
J Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 135)
K Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 132)
Rear control panel

L Increases the airflow (Y page 133)
M Sets the temperature (Y page 132)
N Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 132)

O Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 133)
P Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 106)
Q Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 133)
R Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 131)
S Reduces the airflow (Y page 133)
T Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 106)
Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
= Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 135)
H Display
Rear control panel

P Switches the seat heating on the right-hand side on/off (Y page 106)
Q Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 133)

R Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 131)
S Reduces the airflow (Y page 133)
T Switches the seat heating on the left-hand side on/off (Y page 106)
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control with additional rear-com-
partment climate control
Climate control
USA only
Front control panel
D Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 131)
Switches off climate control
H Display
Rear control panel


P Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 133)
Q Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 131)
R Reduces the airflow (Y page 133)
Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 133)
C Switches the rear climate control on/off
H Display
Rear control panel

P Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 133)
Operating the climate control systems 131
Q Switches the rear climate control on/off (Y page 131)

R Reduces the airflow (Y page 133)
Optimum use of automatic climate Operating the climate control sys-

control tems
The following contains notes and recommenda- Activating/deactivating climate con-
Climate control
tions on optimum use of the dual-zone auto- trol
matic climate control or 3-zone automatic cli-
mate control. General notes
RYou can switch on climate control by using the
Ã and ¿ or Ã and Á buttons. When the climate control is switched off, the air
The indicator lamps in the Ã and supply and air circulation are also switched off.
¿ buttons or the Ã and Á buttons The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off
light up. climate control only briefly
RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate Activate climate control primarily using the
control: in automatic mode, you can also use Ã button (Y page 132).
the ñ button to set a climate mode In the rear compartment, you can also switch
(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM climate control on and off using the Ã and
level is recommended. ^ buttons.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function Activating/deactivating
briefly until the windshield is clear again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
X To activate: press the Ã button.
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
air-recirculation mode. up. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-
matic mode.
RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate
X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
control: use the ZONE function to adopt the
temperature settings on the driver's side for The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
the front-passenger side and the rear com- up.
partment as well. The indicator lamp above
the á button goes out.
RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate Switching cooling with air dehumidi-
control: use the "residual heat" function if fication on/off
you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle inte-
rior when the ignition is switched off. The Activating/deactivating
residual heat function can only be activated or
deactivated with the ignition switched off. X To activate: press the ¿ or Á button.
RIf you change the settings of the climate con-
The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button
trol system, the climate status display lights up.
appears for approximately three seconds at X To deactivate: press the ¿ or Á but-
the bottom of the screen in the multimedia ton.
system display. You will see the current set- The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button
tings of the various climate control functions. goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidifica-
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate tion" function has a delayed switch-off fea-
control system only operates at a reduced capa- ture.
city. If you require the full climate control output,
you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button (Y page 145).
132 Operating the climate control systems
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp in the Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-
¿ or Á button function.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The "Cool-
ing with air dehumidifi-
Climate control
cation" function cannot

be switched on.
Setting climate control to automatic X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
General notes X Press the Ã button.
X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main-
tained automatically at a constant level. The desired climate mode appears in the display.
system automatically regulates the temperature
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-
tribution. Setting the temperature
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is activated automatically in automatic mode. Dual-zone automatic climate control
In the rear compartment, you can also switch Different temperatures can be set for the driv-
climate control for the rear seats to automatic er's and front-passenger sides.
mode using the Ã button.
Automatic control
X To increase or decrease: turn control : or
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- B counter-clockwise or clockwise
tion lock (Y page 140). (Y page 125).
X Set the desired temperature. Only change the temperature setting in small
X To activate: press the Ã button. increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are 3-zone automatic climate control
activated.
X To switch to manual mode: press the _ You can select different temperature settings
button. for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well
as for the rear compartment.
3-zone automatic climate control: when auto-
matic mode is activated, you can select a cli-
mate mode (Y page 132). tion lock (Y page 140).
X To increase or decrease temperature in
the front compartment: turn control : or
Adjusting the climate mode settings B counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 127).
You can select the following climate mode set- Only change the temperature setting in small
tings in automatic mode: increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting X To increase or reduce the temperature in
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting the rear compartment using the front con-
trol panel: press the á button.
DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-
free setting The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
The temperature setting for the driver's side Setting

is adopted for the rear compartment and the
front-passenger side. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X Turn thumbwheel : to the left or right
(Y page 127). X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
Only change the temperature setting in small desired symbol appears in the display.
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X To increase or decrease the rear compart-
Climate control
ment temperature using the rear control Setting the airflow
panel: turn control M counter-clockwise or
clockwise on the rear control panel
(Y page 127).
X To increase: press the K button.
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X To reduce: press the I button.
i You can use 3-zone automatic climate con-

trol to set the airflow in the rear compartment
Setting the air distribution separately.
Air distribution settings
Front control panel Switching the ZONE function on/off
P Directs the airflow through the center X To activate: press the á button.
vents The indicator lamp above the á button
O Directs air through the footwell air vents lights up.
S Directs the airflow through the center Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
and footwell vents perature setting for the driver's side is not
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents adopted for the front-passenger side.
b Directs the airflow through the defroster 3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
and center vents (Canada only) perature setting for the driver's side is not
adopted for the front-passenger side and the
a Directs air through the defroster and
rear compartment.
footwell vents
X To deactivate: press the á button.
_ Directs the airflow through the defroster,
The indicator lamp above the á button
center and footwell air vents (Canada
goes out.
only)
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
Rear control panel perature setting for the driver's side is adop-
M Directs the airflow through the rear cen- ted for the front-passenger side.
ter and B-pillar air vents 3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
O Directs air through the footwell air vents perature setting for the driver's side is adop-
ted for the front-passenger side and the rear
i Using the rear control panel, you can also compartment.
activate both air distribution positions simul-
taneously. In order to do this, press both air
distribution buttons. The air is then routed
through all rear air vents. Defrosting the windshield
i Regardless of the air distribution setting, General notes
airflow is always directed through the side air
vents. The side air vents can only be closed You can use this function to defrost the wind-
when the controls on the side air vents are shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front
turned downwards. side windows on the inside.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function
as soon as the windshield is clear again.
134 Operating the climate control systems
Activating/deactivating Defrosting the windows

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Windows fogged up on the inside
X To activate: press the ¬ button. X Activate the ¿ or Á cooling with air
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights dehumidification function.
up. X Activate automatic mode Ã.
The climate control system switches to the X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
following settings:
Climate control
"windshield defrosting" function

Rhigh airflow (Y page 133).
Rhigh temperature i You should only select this setting until the
Rair distribution to the windshield and front
windshield is clear again.
side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off Windows fogged up on the outside
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. XActivate the windshield wipers.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes XPress the _ button repeatedly until the
out. The previously selected settings are P or O symbol appears in the display.
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains i You should only select this setting until the
deactivated. windshield is clear again.
i If you clean the windows regularly, they do
not fog up so quickly.
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in vehi-
cles for the USA. Rear window defroster
MAX COOL is only operational when the engine
is running. General notes
X To activate: press the Ù button. The rear window defroster has a high current
The indicator lamp in the Ù button lights draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
up. as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
X To deactivate: press the Ù button. window defroster switches off automatically
The indicator lamp in the Ù button goes after several minutes.
out. The previously selected settings are If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
restored. defroster may switch off.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control
switches to the following functions: Activating/deactivating
Rmaximum cooling X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Rmaximum airflow tion lock (Y page 140).
Rair-recirculation mode on X Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
ted prematurely or can- interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.
Climate control
Switching air-recirculation mode (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-
on/off cation" function is activated
General notes
Switching the residual heat on or off
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from General notes
outside. The air already inside the vehicle will
then be recirculated. The residual heat function is only available on
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win- vehicles for Canada.
dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at It is possible to make use of the residual heat of
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation the engine to continue heating the stationary
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog- vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has
ging up. been switched off. The heating time depends on
the set interior temperature.
Activating/deactivating
Activating/deactivating
tion lock (Y page 140). XTo activate: press the Ì or Á button.
X To activate: press the d button. The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button
The indicator lamp in the d button lights lights up.
up. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless
i In the event of high pollution levels (3-zone of the airflow setting.
automatic climate control only) or at high out- i If you activate the residual heat function at
side temperatures, air-recirculation mode is high temperatures, only the ventilation will be
automatically activated. When air-recircula- activated. The blower runs at medium speed.
tion mode is activated automatically, the indi-
cator lamp in the d button is not lit. X To deactivate: press the Ì or Á but-
Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. ton.
The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button
X To deactivate: press the d button. goes out.
The indicator lamp in the d button goes
out. Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
matically: Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rafter approximately five minutes at outside Rif the battery voltage drops
temperatures below approximately 41 ‡
(5 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling Ionization
with air dehumidification is deactivated Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside interior and attain an improved interior climate.
temperatures above approximately 41 ‡
136 Setting the air vents
The ionization of the interior air is odorless and Setting the center air vents
cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle inte-
rior.
You can switch ionization on and off via the mul-
timedia system (see the Digital Operator's Man-
ual).
Ionization can only be operated when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on. The side air
Climate control
vent on the driver's side must be open.
Setting the air vents

: Center air vent, left
G WARNING ; Center air vent, right
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air = Center vent thumbwheel, right
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in ? Center vent thumbwheel, left
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There X To open or close: turn thumbwheels =
is a risk of injury. and ? to the left or right.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to Setting the side air vents
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in the
engine compartment on the front-passenger
side free of blockages, such as ice, snow or
leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.
i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust the Example
sliders of the air vents to the center position. : Side window defroster vent
; Side air vent, left
= Thumbwheel for side air vent
X To open or close: turn thumbwheel = up or
down.
Setting the glove box air vent

! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-
midification" function. Otherwise, tempera-
ture-sensitive items stored in the glove box
could be damaged.
Setting the air vents 137
Setting the B-pillar air vent

Second row of seats
Climate control
: Air vent control
; Air vent
When the climate control system is activated,
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to : B-pillar air vent
cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on ; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent
the airflow and air distribution settings.
X To open or close: turn thumbwheel ; to the
X To open or close: turn thumbwheel : to the
left or right.
right or left.
Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
Setting the center vents in the rear com-
partment
B-pillar air vent in the headliner

: B-pillar air vent
; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent
X To open or close: turn thumbwheel ; up or
down.
Example: center vents with rear control panel

: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
= Rear control panel
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X To open or close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.
Z
138 Setting the air vents
Third row of seats

Climate control
B-pillar air vent in the headliner

: B-pillar air vent
; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent
X To open or close: turn thumbwheel ; up or
down.
Driving 139
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Driving

Important safety notes Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving G WARNING
safety systems adjusts automatically while a
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
has been delivered or after repairs. Full system pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
effectiveness is not reached until the end of this The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
Driving and parking

teach-in procedure. jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
reach their optimum braking effect after several stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its per-
formance in the future. G WARNING
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles of the pedals, e.g.:
(1500 km). Rshoes with thick soles
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,
Rshoes with high heels
during this period.
Rslippers
RChange gear in good time, before the tach-
ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area There is a risk of an accident.
of the tachometer. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake usage of the pedals.
the vehicle.
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal
G WARNING
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG
vehicles: safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)
for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). for example, the power steering and the brake
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
boosting effect. You will require considerably
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
RChange gear in good time. of an accident.
RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
drive in the Comfort drive program.
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase G WARNING
the engine speed gradually and accelerate the If the parking brake has not been fully
vehicle to full speed. released when driving, the parking brake can:
You should also observe these notes on break-
ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on Roverheat and cause a fire
your vehicle have been replaced. Rlose its hold function.
Always observe the maximum permissible There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
speed. the parking brake fully before driving off.
Z
140 Driving
! Do not warm up the engine while stationary. A check which periodically establishes a radio
Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
speeds and full throttle until the engine has Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
reached its operating temperature. the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
In vehicles with automatic transmission, starting the engine.
engage positions P and R only when the vehi- When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
cle is stationary. ignition lock, the system needs approximately
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive two seconds recognition time. You can then use
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. the Start/Stop button.
Driving and parking
You could otherwise damage the drive train. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the different Smart-
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the max- case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
imum engine speed is restricted in order to If you depress the brake pedal and press the
protect the engine. To protect the engine and Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv- ately.
ing at full throttle when the engine is cold.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
Key positions Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock
SmartKey Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78).
Do not keep the SmartKey:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
This can impair the functionality of the KEY-
LESS-GO key.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem-
perature-controlled cup holder (Y page 309).
g To remove the SmartKey Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be rec-
ognized.
1 Power supply for some consumers, such as
the windshield wipers If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:
and drive position Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition
3 To start the engine with the Start/Stop button
Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the
i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for unlocked again
the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.
The engine cannot be started. If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button
on the front door (Y page 83), you can continue
to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.
KEYLESS-GO The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
General notes Stop button for three seconds. This function
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a operates independently of the ECO start/stop
SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO automatic engine switch-off function.
function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
Driving 141
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As
long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Driving and parking

Starting the engine
: Start/Stop button Important safety notes
; Ignition lock
G WARNING
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
up. Further information on situations where an they could:
indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
the engine or lights up while driving
(Y page 281). people or road users.
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been Rget out and disrupt traffic.
pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
being removed from the ignition.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
X To switch on the power supply: press
motion if, for example, they:
Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can now Rrelease the parking brake.
activate the windshield wipers, for example. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
The power supply is switched off again if: park position P
Rthe driver's door is opened and RStart the engine.
Ryou press Start/Stop : button twice when in
this position
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
button : twice. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
The ignition is switched on. leave children or animals unattended in the
If you press Start/Stop button : once when vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
in this position, the ignition is deactivated reach of children.
again.
G WARNING
Removing the Start/Stop button Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
You can remove the Start/Stop button from the gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
using the SmartKey.
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
It is possible to switch between KEYLESS-GO
mode and key operation only when the trans- the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
mission is in position j. out sufficient ventilation.
X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;. G WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
Z
142 Driving
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk depressed.
X Press the Start/Stop button once
of fire.
(Y page 140).
Carry out regular checks to make sure that Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the engine
there are no flammable foreign materials in starts.
the engine compartment or in the exhaust Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow is
system. activated and the engine starts.
Driving and parking
General notes Starting procedure via smartphone

Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the catalytic Observe the important safety notes on starting
converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds the engine (Y page 141).
after a cold start. The sound of the engine may You can also start your engine via your smart-
change during this time. phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the
previously selected climate control setting is
Automatic transmission activated. In this way you can cool or heat the
interior of the vehicle before starting the jour-
X Shift the transmission to position j ney.
(Y page 148). Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is
The transmission position indicator on the safe to start and run the engine where your vehi-
multifunction display shows j cle is parked.
(Y page 149).
Observe the legal stipulations in the area where
i You can start the engine in transmission your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart-
position j and i. phone may be limited to certain countries or
regions.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey You can execute a maximum of two consecutive
starting attempts via your smartphone. If you
X To start a diesel engine: turn the SmartKey insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you
to position 2 in the ignition lock can carry out two more starting attempts.
(Y page 140). Once you have started the engine, you can
The % preglow indicator lamp in the instru- switch the engine off via your smartphone at any
ment cluster lights up. time.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni- You can only start the engine via your smart-
tion lock (Y page 140) and release it as soon phone if:
as the engine is running. Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: you can Rpark position j is selected
start the engine without preglow if the engine Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed
is warm. Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated
Rthe panic alarm is not activated
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the Rthe hood is closed
vehicle without inserting the SmartKey into the Rthe doors are closed and locked
ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed
inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey Also make sure that:
must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the
engine operates independently of the ECO Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled
start/stop automatic engine start function. Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
Driving 143
G WARNING Information on the automatic release of the

electric parking brake (Y page 163).
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during ser-
Pulling away with a trailer
vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of
injury.
Always secure the engine against uninten-
tional starting before carrying out mainte-
Driving and parking

nance or repair work.
Make sure that the engine cannot be started via

your smartphone before carrying out mainte-
nance or repairs. You can prevent an engine
start via your smartphone, for example, if you:
Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps
Rdo not lock the doors
Ropen the hood To ensure that you do not roll backwards when
pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the elec-
tric parking brake.
Pulling away X Press and hold handle :.
The electric parking brake continues to brake
General notes and prevent the vehicle from rolling back-
wards.
G WARNING The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
If the engine speed is above the idling speed only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
and you engage transmission position D or R, remains on.
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is X Depress the accelerator pedal.
a risk of an accident. X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is

held by the driving force of the engine, release
When engaging transmission position D or R, lever :.
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do the electric parking brake is released.
not simultaneously accelerate. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling goes out.
away.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
Hill start assist
You can open the doors from the inside at any Hill start assist helps you when pulling away for-
time. wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds
You can also deactivate the automatic locking the vehicle for a short time after you have
feature (Y page 244). removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
It is only possible to shift the transmission from gives you enough time to move your foot from
position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to
the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
released. If you do not depress the brake pedal, G WARNING
the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but
the parking lock remains engaged. After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds There is a risk of an accident and injury.
after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
verter to reach its operating temperature Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
more quickly. brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
Z
144 Driving
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-
assist. play.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop
Hill start assist is not active if: function is only available in drive programs
Comfort and Slippery.
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a
downhill gradient.
Rthe transmission is in position N.
Automatic engine switch-off
Rthe electric parking brake is applied. If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
Driving and parking
RESP® is malfunctioning. the ECO start/stop function switches off the

engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
ECO start/stop function when:
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
Introduction green
Rthe Sport Plus or Sport drive program is not
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped selected (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
under certain conditions. Rno Off-road program has been selected
The engine starts automatically when the driver Rthe outside temperature and the atmospheric
wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop air pressure is within the range that is suitable
function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel for the system
consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
Important safety notes has been reached
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged
G WARNING Rthe system detects that the windshield is not
If the engine is switched off automatically and fogged up when the air-conditioning system is
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted switched on
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. Rthe hood is closed
There is a risk of accident and injury. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off seat belt is fastened
the ignition and secure the vehicle against All of the vehicle's systems remain active when
the engine is stopped automatically.
rolling away.
The HOLD function can also be activated if the
engine has been switched off automatically. It is
General notes then not necessary to continue applying the
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine
starts automatically and the braking effect of
the HOLD function is deactivated.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): automatic engine switch-off can take
place a maximum of four times in a row (initial
stop, then three subsequent stops).
: ECO start/stop display Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-
The ECO start/stop function is activated when- secutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimi-
ever you start the engine using the SmartKey or ted.
the Start/Stop button.
If the engine has been switched off automati-
cally by the ECO start/stop function, the è
Driving 145
Automatic engine start Deactivating or activating the ECO

start/stop function
The engine starts automatically if:
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
pressing the ECO button cles)
Rin transmission position D or N the brake
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not
active
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal
Driving and parking

Ryou engage reverse gear R
Ryou move the transmission out of position P
Ryou switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive
program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Ryou activate manual gearshifting (Mercedes-
AMG vehicles)
Ryou switch to the Offroad drive program
(vehicles without Off-Road Engineering pack-
age) X To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Ryou switch to the Offroad or Offroad Plus
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
drive program (vehicles with Off-Road Engi-
neering package) Indicator lamp ; lights up.
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv- If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
er's door function has been deactivated manually or as
Rthe vehicle starts to roll the result of a malfunction.
Rthe brake system requires this Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set range
Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low
Shifting the transmission to position P does not
start the engine.
X To deactivate: in the Comfort drive pro-

gram, press ECO button :.
or
X Activate manual gearshifting (Y page 152).
or
X Switch to the Sport Plus or Sport drive pro-
gram (Y page 147).
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. When the
Sport Plus or Sport drive program is activa-
ted, the automatic transmission switches to
the Comfort drive program.
Z
146 Driving
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop

function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction.
Problems with the engine

Driving and parking
The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. Before attempting to start the engine again:
X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock back to position u.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 141). Avoid excessively long
and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the
battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 346).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
Vehicles with a gasoline There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical

engine: component of the engine management system.
The engine is not running X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
smoothly and is misfir- Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
ing. and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
gage shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently.
above 248 ‡ (120 †). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 328). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
DYNAMIC SELECT controller 147
DYNAMIC SELECT controller Slippery Optimal driving characteris-

tics on slippery or snow-
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change covered roads
the drive program. Depending on the drive pro-
gram selected the following vehicle character- Off-road Optimal driving characteris-
istics will change: tics for easily negotiable off-
road terrain
Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment) Off-road Plus Optimal driving characteris-
Driving and parking

Rthe transmission (vehicles with tics for rough terrain
Off-Road Engi-
Rthe suspension
neering pack-
Rthe steering age)
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
Each time you start the engine with the Smart- Further information on:
Key or the Start/Stop button, the Comfort drive
Rthe Individual, Sport, Comfort and Slippery
program is activated. For further information
about starting the engine, see (Y page 141). drive programs (Y page 151)
The Comfort drive program is recommended in Rthe Off-road drive program (vehicles without
city traffic and stop/start traffic situations. Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 219)
Rthe Off-road and Off-road Plus drive pro-
grams (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering
package) (Y page 220)
X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-

cles): turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as
many times as necessary until the desired
drive program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn DYNAMIC
multifunction display. After five seconds the SELECT controller : as many times as nec-
display goes out. essary until the desired drive program is
In addition, the current drive program settings selected.
are displayed in the multimedia system dis- The selected drive program appears in the
play. multifunction display. After five seconds the
display goes out.
Drive programs available (all vehicles
except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): In addition, the current drive program settings
are displayed in the multimedia system dis-
Individual Individual settings play.
Drive programs available (Mercedes-AMG
Sport Sporty driving characteris- vehicles):
tics
Comfort Comfortable and economi- Individual Individual settings
cal driving characteristics Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
Z
148 Automatic transmission
Sport Sporty driving characteris- The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its
tics original position. The current transmission posi-
tion j, k, i or h is shown on the trans-
Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving mission position display on the multifunction
characteristics display (Y page 149).
Slippery Optimal driving characteris-
tics on slippery or snow-
Engaging park position P
covered roads ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle
Driving and parking
is coasting, do not shift the automatic trans-

Additional information for drive programs mission directly from h to k, from k to h
(Y page 151). or directly to j. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in the
Automatic transmission direction of arrow j.
Engaging park position P automatically
G WARNING
Park position j is automatically engaged if:
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
RYou switch off the engine using the SmartKey
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
and remove the SmartKey
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
RYou switch off the engine using the SmartKey
accident.
or using the Start/Stop button and open the
After switching off the engine, always switch driver's door or front-passenger door
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- RYou open the driver's door when the vehicle is
cle from rolling away by applying the parking stationary or when driving at a very low speed
brake. and the transmission is in position h or k
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-
mission shifts automatically to transmission
position j if the HOLD function or Distance
DIRECT SELECT lever Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the infor-
mation on the HOLD function (Y page 187) and
Overview of transmission positions on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 179).
Engaging reverse gear R

! Only move the automatic transmission to
k when the vehicle is stationary.
X If the transmission is in position h or i:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever up past the first point of resistance.
j Park position with parking lock
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
Automatic transmission 149
Shifting to neutral N With the SmartKey:

G WARNING
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, depressed.
they could: X Shift to neutral i.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other X Release the brake pedal.
people or road users. X Release the electric parking brake.
Rget out and disrupt traffic. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
Driving and parking

in the ignition lock.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in With the Start/Stop button:
motion if, for example, they: X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
tion lock.
Rrelease the parking brake. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of X Switch on the ignition.
park position P X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
RStart the engine. depressed.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. X Shift to neutral i.
X Release the brake pedal.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Release the electric parking brake.
leave children or animals unattended in the X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of in the ignition lock.
reach of children.
Engaging drive position D
X If the transmission is in position h or k:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to X If the transmission is in position k or i:
the first point of resistance. push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the
first point of resistance.
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever up or down to the first point of resist- the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
ance. lever down past the first point of resistance.
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
mission shifts to i automatically. Transmission position and drive pro-
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv- gram display
er's door or the front-passenger door or remove The current transmission position and drive pro-
the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the auto- gram appear in the multifunction display.
matic transmission shifts to j automatically.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
the automatic transmission shifts automatically
to j.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-
cle cleaned in an automatic, tow-through car
wash: : Transmission position
; Gear
= Drive program
Z
The arrows in the transmission position display A Neutral

show how and into which transmission positions
you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. Do not shift the transmission to N
while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
If the transmission position display on the mul-
matic transmission could be dam-
tifunction display is not working, you should pull
aged.
away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you No power is transmitted from the
should select transmission position h and, in engine to the drive wheels.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles, drive program C or S. Releasing the brakes will allow you to
Driving and parking
move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push

it or tow it.
Transmission positions If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position N if the
B Park position vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.
Only shift the transmission into posi- on icy roads.
tion P when the vehicle is stationary If you switch the engine off with the
(Y page 161). The parking lock transmission in position R or D, the
should not be used as a brake when automatic transmission shifts to N
parking. Always apply the electronic automatically.
parking brake in addition to the park- ! Coasting in neutral i may
ing lock in order to secure the vehi- cause damage to the drive train.
cle.
If the vehicle electronics are malfunc- 7 Drive
tioning, the transmission may be The automatic transmission changes
locked in position P. Have the vehicle gear automatically. All forward gears
electronics checked immediately at a are available.
Park position P is automatically
engaged if: Driving tips
Ryou switch off the engine using the
SmartKey and remove the Smart- Changing gear
Key
The automatic transmission shifts through the
Ryou switch off the engine using the
individual gears automatically when it is in trans-
SmartKey or using the Start/Stop mission position h. This automatic gear shift-
button and open the driver's door ing behavior is determined by:
or front-passenger door
Rthe selected drive program
Rthe driver's door is opened when
the vehicle is stationary or driving Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
at very low speed and the trans- Rthe road speed
mission is in position D or R
C Reverse gear Accelerator pedal position
Only shift the transmission into posi- Your style of driving influences how the auto-
tion R when the vehicle is stationary. matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
Kickdown Comfort drive program

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. The Comfort drive program has the following
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the characteristics:
pressure point. Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmission
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower settings.
gear depending on the engine speed. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
desired speed is reached. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
Driving and parking

The automatic transmission shifts back up. forward and reverse gears, unless the accel-
erator pedal is depressed fully.
Rocking the vehicle free Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven
Shifting back and forth between transmission at lower engine speeds and the wheels being
positions h and k can help to free up the less likely to spin.
vehicle if it gets stuck in mud or snow. The vehi-
cle's engine management system limits the
speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when Sport drive program
shifting back and forth. To shift repeatedly The Sport drive program has the following char-
between transmission positions h and k, acteristics:
move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down
past the point of resistance. Rsporty engine and transmission settings.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.
Towing a trailer the fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission
X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range shift points.
on uphill gradients. Rthe suspension exhibits sporty damping (vehi-
X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, cles with AIRMATIC).
use the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 152) to select a lower gear, Drive program Sport Plus (Mercedes-
even if cruise control or Distance Pilot AMG vehicles)
DISTRONIC are activated.
The Sport Plus drive program has the following
characteristics:
Drive programs Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving
characteristics.
Slippery drive program Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.
The Slippery drive program has the following Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.
characteristics: the fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission
Rreduced engine and transmission settings for
shift points.
optimum propulsion on slippery or snow-cov-
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly firm
ered roads.
springing and damping settings (vehicles with
Roptimized ESP® stability control on slippery or
AIRMATIC).
snow-covered roads. Rthe ECO start/stop function is deactivated, it
Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability on can, however, be activated again using the
slippery or snow-covered roads, for example. ECO button (Y page 145).
Z
Individual drive program Temporary setting

In the Individual drive program, the following
properties of the drive program can be selected:
Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
Rthe transmission
Rthe suspension
Driving and parking
Rall vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):

the steering
Rall vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
availability of the ECO start/stop function
To select the gears in the Individual drive pro-
gram permanently using the steering wheel pad- X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
dle shifters, select the permanent manual gear- position h.
shift program. X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;.
Information about configuring the Individual
The temporary setting is active for a certain
drive program with the multimedia system can
amount of time. Under certain conditions, the
be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the
case of lateral acceleration, during overrun
mode or when driving on steep terrain.
Manual gear shifting X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle
General notes shifter ; and hold it in place.

or
You can change gear yourself using the steering X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be transmission position.
in position h to do this.
or
Depending on which steering wheel paddle X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
change the drive program.
immediately shifts into the next gear down or
up, if permitted.
To use manual shifting, you have two options: Permanent setting (all vehicles except
Rtemporary setting
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Rpermanent setting
If you activate manual gearshifting, the current
gear appears in the multifunction display
instead of transmission position h.
If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears
will be selected automatically.
X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to

position h.
X Press button :.
X To deactivate: press button :.

or
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
change the drive program.
Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG

vehicles)
Driving and parking

X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
cles): if the maximum engine speed in the
gear currently engaged is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic trans-
mission automatically shifts up to prevent
X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
engine damage.
position h.
X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
X Press button :.
shifter :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
X To deactivate: press button :. the next gear.
or Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to ing.
switch to the Individual drive program. If the engine were to exceed the maximum
Indicator lamp ; goes out. engine speed when shifting down, the auto-
matic transmission protects against engine
damage by not shifting down.
Shifting gears
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic Shift recommendation
transmission does not shift up automatically
even when the engine limiting speed for the
current gear is reached. When the engine lim-
iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X When the corresponding gearshift recom-
mendation : appears in the multifunction
display of the instrument cluster, shift to rec-
ommended gear ;.
Z
Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) X When the UP message appears in the multi-

function display, pull on the right-hand steer-
! In manual mode, the automatic transmis- ing wheel paddle shifter.
sion does not shift up automatically even
when the engine limiting speed for the current
gear is reached. When the engine limiting Kickdown
speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always possible in the temporary setting.
make sure that the engine speed does not
X For maximum acceleration, depress the
Driving and parking
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is

otherwise a risk of engine damage. accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
the steering wheel paddle shifters.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
mission shifts up to the next gear when the
: Gear indicator maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-
; Upshift indicator vents the engine from overrevving.
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-
function display.
Refueling 155
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
7G-TRONIC: The transmission is in emergency mode.
Driving and parking

The acceleration ability It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
is deteriorating. X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission no lon- X Shift the transmission to position P.
ger changes gear.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
9G-TRONIC: The transmission is in emergency mode.
The acceleration ability It is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is in
is deteriorating. position N.
The transmission no lon- X Stop the vehicle.
ger changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Transfer case ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed

with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- doing so will damage the transmission.
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-
mitted to both axles.
! Performance tests may only be carried out Refueling
on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system
or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Important safety notes
Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a
performance test. G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
! Because ESP® is an automatic system, the
engine and ignition must be switched off incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop sion.
button in position 0 or 1) when the electric You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
parking brake is being tested on a brake dyna- sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
mometer (maximum 10 seconds). and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may refueling.
seriously damage the brake system.
Z
156 Refueling
G WARNING engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a

qualified specialist workshop and have the
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
You must make sure that fuel does not come gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
Driving and parking
If you or others come into contact with fuel,

engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
observe the following: and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
RWash away fuel from skin immediately completely.
using soap and water. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, fuel system.
immediately rinse them thoroughly with ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
out delay. paintwork.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system
ing. could otherwise be blocked by particles from
RImmediately change out of clothing which the fuel can.
has come into contact with fuel. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-
eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge
G WARNING could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
explosion. (Y page 387).
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is Refueling
thereby discharged.
General information
G WARNING Pay attention to the important safety notes
Vehicles with a diesel engine: (Y page 155).
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
matically when you unlock or lock the vehicle
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
with the SmartKey or using KEYLESS-GO.
When the engine is running, exhaust system
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
components could overheat without being 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next
noticed. There is a risk of fire. to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline cle.
with diesel fuel.
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with a

diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if
you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
Refueling 157
Opening the fuel filler flap X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and
remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Driving and parking

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak
out.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is
: To open the fuel filler flap designed for refueling at diesel filling pumps.
; To insert the fuel filler cap
= Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled Closing the fuel filler flap
? Tire pressure table
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
X Switch off the engine. clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Close the fuel filler flap.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-
X Open the driver's door. cle.
The vehicle electronics are now in key posi- If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the
tion u. This is the same as the key having 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-
been removed. sage appears in the multifunction display
The driver’s door can be closed again. (Y page 263).
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
arrow :. lamp may light up (Y page 288).
The fuel filler flap swings up.
Z
158 Refueling
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G WARNING
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
Driving and parking

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in key position u. This is the same
as the SmartKey having been removed.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The engine does not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely
start. dry.
X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.
X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 140).
X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs
smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 140).
X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until it
runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:
The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 77).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only) When the supply of DEF is almost used up, the
Check Additive See Operator's Manual
General notes message is shown in the multifunction display.
If you drive the vehicle faster than 10 mph
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas after- (16 km/h), the Check Additive See Opera‐
treatment must be operated with the reducing tor's Manual message goes out after approx-
agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of the tasks per- imately one minute.
formed during maintenance.
Refueling 159
When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the If you or other persons come into contact with
Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown in DEF, observe the following:
the multifunction display. RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with
If the Remaining Starts: 16 message soap and water.
appears in the multifunction display, you can RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes,
start the engine another 16 times. If DEF is not immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean
refilled, you will subsequently be unable to water. Seek medical assistance without
start the engine. delay.
X Add at least 2 gal (7.5 l) of DEF.
Driving and parking

RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your mouth
X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds. out immediately. Drink plenty of water. Seek
X Start the engine. medical assistance without delay.
RChange out of clothing contaminated with
i Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified spe- DEF immediately.
cialist workshop.
! Only use DEF in accordance with
Use the special DEF refill bottle when adding ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with
DEF between maintenance intervals. You can DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This
obtain further information from an authorized may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-
Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact treatment system.
Roadside Assistance (Y page 29).
If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡ ! The vehicle must be parked on level ground
(Ò11 †), it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank can only be
frozen and there is an active warning indicator, it filled as intended with the vehicle parked on a
may not be possible to add DEF. Park the vehicle level surface. This avoids false level readings.
in a warmer place, e.g. in a garage, until DEF has Filling the tank is not permitted if the vehicle
become fluid again. It will then be possible to is not parked on a level surface. There is a
add DEF again. Alternatively, have the DEF tank danger of overfilling, which could result in
refilled at a qualified specialist workshop. damage to components of the BlueTEC
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas exhaust gas aftertreatment.
aftertreatment and DEF is available at any ! Immediately rinse off surfaces which come
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. into contact with DEF or remove DEF with a
damp cloth and cold water. If DEF has already
Important safety notes crystallized, clean using a sponge and cold
water. DEF residue crystallizes after a short
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas period and contaminates the affected surfa-
aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: ces. Furthermore, electrical components in
Rnot poisonous the vicinity may be damaged by DEF.
Rcolorless and odorless ! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be
Rnot flammable added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to the
When you open the DEF container, small fuel tank, this can lead to engine damage.
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. For further information on DEF, see
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are (Y page 389).
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous
membranes and to the eyes. You may experi-
ence a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and
throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are
possible.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank
only in well-ventilated areas.
DEF must not come into contact with your skin,
eyes or clothing and must not be swallowed.
Keep DEF away from children.
Z
160 Refueling
Opening/closing the DEF filler cap

Driving and parking
X Unscrew the cap from the opening on top of

DEF refill canister ;.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto- X Place disposable hose : on the opening of
matically when you open or close the vehicle DEF refill canister ; and screw it on clock-
with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO. wise until hand-tight.
X To open: switch the ignition off. Disposable hose : remains closed until you
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of fasten disposable hose : to the DEF filler
arrow :. neck of the vehicle.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X Turn blue DEF fuel filler cap ; counter-clock-
wise and remove it.
DEF filler cap ; is secured with a plastic
strip.
X To close: place DEF filler cap ; on the filler
neck and turn it clockwise.
X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the
direction of arrow :.
X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).
The Check Additive See Operator's
Manual message goes out after approx-
imately one minute. X Place disposable hose : on the filler neck on
i If the Check Additive See Operator's the vehicle and screw it on clockwise until
Manual message continues to be shown in hand-tight. When you feel resistance, dispos-
the multifunction display, you must add more able hose : is sufficiently secured.
DEF. X Lift up and tip DEF refill canister ;.
Filling stops when the DEF tank is completely
DEF refill canisters filled. Do not fill the DEF tank any further. DEF
refill canister ; can be removed when it has
! Do not screw the disposable hose on too been only partially emptied.
tight. The disposable hose could otherwise be X Turn disposable hose : on the filler neck of
damaged and DEF may leak out. the vehicle counter-clockwise and remove it.
X Turn disposable hose : on the opening of
DEF refill canister ; counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Reseal DEF refill canister ; with the cap.
DEF refill canisters are available at many gas
stations or at a qualified specialist workshop.
DEF refill canisters are often sold with a filler
hose. A filler hose that does not exactly fill the
vehicle's DEF tank offers no protection against
Parking 161
overfilling. DEF may leak if overfilled. Mercedes- Parking

Benz offers a special disposable hose with over-
fill protection. You can obtain this from any Important safety notes
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. DEF is avail-
able in a variety of containers and receptacles. G WARNING
Only use the disposable hose with the Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
Mercedes-Benz DEF refill canisters.
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
DEF refill bottle
Driving and parking

gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand- Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
tight. Otherwise, the thread of the DEF refill rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
bottle could be damaged and DEF could leak
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
out.
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
G WARNING
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill
bottle :. ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
X Place DEF refill bottle : on the filler neck as an accident and injury.
shown and screw it on clockwise until hand- When leaving the vehicle, always take the
tight. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
X Press DEF refill bottle : towards the filler leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
neck.
The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to one ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against
minute. rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-
i When DEF refill bottle : is no longer etrain could be damaged.
pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
taken off again after being only partially emp- rolling away unintentionally:
tied.
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied
X Release DEF refill bottle :.
Rthe transmission must be in position j and
X Turn DEF refill bottle : counter-clockwise the SmartKey must be removed from the igni-
and remove it. tion lock
X Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill bot- Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the
tle : again. curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients
DEF refill bottles are available at many gas sta- Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the
tions or at a qualified specialist workshop. Refill front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
bottles without a threaded cap do not provide example, on uphill or downhill gradients
overfill protection. DEF may leak if overfilled. Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the
Mercedes Benz offers special refill bottles with a rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
threaded seal. These are available at any author- example, on uphill or downhill gradients
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
162 Parking
Switching off the engine Electric parking brake

G WARNING General notes
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
G WARNING
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
accident. cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
After switching off the engine, always switch Rrelease the parking brake.
Driving and parking
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
cle from rolling away by applying the parking parking position P.
brake. Rstart the engine.
X Apply the electric parking brake. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
X Shift the transmission to position j.
an accident and injury.
X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to
position u in the ignition lock and remove it. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
The immobilizer is activated. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
X With KEYLESS-GO: leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 140)
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in The function of the electric parking brake is
the instrument cluster go out. dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in
If you switch the engine off with the transmis- the system, it may not be possible to apply the
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans- released parking brake.
mission shifts to i automatically.
X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
If you then open the driver's or front-passenger
level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling
door, the automatic transmission shifts to j
away.
automatically.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
If you want the automatic transmission to j.
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-
cle cleaned in an automatic, tow-through car It may not be possible to release an applied
wash: parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
X Vehicles with a SmartKey: switch on the
ignition.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the i The electric parking brake performs a func-
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. tion test at regular intervals while the engine
is switched off. The sounds that can be heard
while this is occurring are normal.
X All vehicles: depress the brake pedal and
keep it depressed.
X Engage neutral i.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
i The engine can be switched off in an emer-
gency while the vehicle is in motion by press-
ing and holding the Start/Stop button for
three seconds.
Parking 163
Applying or releasing manually The electric parking brake is also engaged auto-
matically if:
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle
to a standstill or
Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary
RParking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary
In addition, at least one of the following condi-
Driving and parking

tions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine is switched off
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
Rthere is a system malfunction
X To engage: push handle :.
Rthe power supply is insufficient
When the electric parking brake is engaged,
the F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period
red indicator lamp lights up in the instrument The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only)
cluster. indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights
i The electric parking brake can also be up.
applied when the SmartKey is removed. The electric parking brake is not automatically
X To release: pull handle :. engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada start/stop function.
goes out. Releasing automatically
i The electric parking brake can only be The electric parking brake is released automat-
released: ically when all of the following conditions are
Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 in the fulfilled:
ignition lock (Y page 140) or RThe engine is running.
Rif the ignition was switched on using the RThe seat belt tongue is engaged in the belt
Start/Stop button buckle.
To ensure that you do not roll backwards when RThe transmission is in position h or k and
pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the elec- you depress the accelerator pedal or, on a
tric parking brake (Y page 143). level surface, shift from transmission position
j to h or k.
Applying automatically RIf the transmission is in position k, the trunk
The electric parking brake is automatically lid must be closed.

applied when the transmission is in position j If the seat belt tongue is not engaged in the seat
and belt buckle, the following conditions must be
fulfilled:
Rthe engine is switched off or
RThe driver's door is closed.
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened RYou are shifting from transmission position
To prevent the electric parking brake from being j or have previously driven at speeds
automatically applied, pull handle :. greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).
RIf the transmission is in position k, the trunk
lid must be closed.
When the electric parking brake is released,
the ! indicator lamp goes out in the instru-
ment cluster.
Z
164 Driving tips
Emergency braking Driving tips

General notes
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
Driving and parking
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,

for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
The vehicle can also be braked during an emer- of an accident.
gency by using the electric parking brake. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
X While driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake. G WARNING
The vehicle is braked for as long as the handle
of the electric parking brake is pressed. The If you operate mobile communication equip-
longer the electric parking brake handle is ment when driving, you may be distracted
depressed, the greater the braking force. from the traffic situation. You could also lose
During braking: control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
Ra warning tone sounds
accident.
Rthe Release Park. Brake message appears Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada is stationary.
flashes Observe the legal requirements for the country
in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while
still, the electric parking brake is engaged. driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
Parking the vehicle for a long period when the traffic situation permits. If you are
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by before operating the telephone.
exhaustive discharging. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-
result of lack of use. ond.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek
Drive sensibly – save fuel
advice.
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
i You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist work- X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-
shop. ommended tire pressure.
X Remove unnecessary loads.
X Remove roof carriers when they are not nee-
ded.
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
Driving tips 165
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. You can obtain current information concerning
X Have all service and maintenance work car- the servicing of your vehicle at any time from a
ried out at the specified intervals. qualified specialist workshop. This could be an
overview of the maintenance work or any addi-
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in tional maintenance work, for example.
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-
rain.
ECO display
Drinking and driving
Driving and parking

The ECO display shows you how economical
G WARNING your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and in achieving the most economical driving style
driving are very dangerous combinations. for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
tions. Your driving style can significantly influ-
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can ence the vehicle's consumption.
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
ment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
ing drugs. : Acceleration
; Coasting
Emission control = Constant
? Additional range achieved
G WARNING Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust represents the additional range achieved since
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling the beginning of the journey as a result of an
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There adapted driving style.
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve
range, the Reserve Fuel message is shown in
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
the multifunction display instead of range ?.
out sufficient ventilation. The 8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster
also lights up (Y page 288).
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. Always have
work on the engine carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
must be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine settings must not be changed under
any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
service work must be carried out at regular
intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-
Benz service requirements.
Z
166 Driving tips
The ECO display consists of three sections, with In addition to driving style, the actual consump-
an inner and outer area. The sections corre- tion is affected by other factors, such as:
spond to the following three categories: Rload
: Acceleration (evaluation of all accel- Rtire pressure

eration processes): Rcold start
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner Rchoice of route

area lights up green: moderate Relectrical consumers switched on
acceleration, especially at higher These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
Driving and parking
speeds play.
Rthe outer area empties and the An economical driving style specially requires
inner area is gray: sporty acceler- driving at moderate engine speeds.
ation Achieving a higher value in the categories
; Coasting (evaluation of all decelera- "Acceleration" and "Constant":
tion processes): Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner Rdrive the vehicle in the Comfort drive pro-
area lights up green: anticipatory gram.
driving, keeping your distance and On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the
early release of the accelerator. highway, only the outer area for "constant" will
The vehicle can coast without use change.
of the brakes. The ECO display summarizes the driving style
Rthe outer area empties and the from the start of the journey to its completion.
inner area is gray: frequent heavy Therefore, there are more marked changes in
braking the outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon-
ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For more
= Constant (continuous evaluation marked changes, perform a manual rest
over the entire journey): (Y page 237).
Rthe outer area fills up and the inner For further information on the ECO display, see
area lights up green: constant (Y page 237).
speed and avoidance of unneces-
sary acceleration and deceleration
Rthe outer area empties and the Brakes
inner area is gray: fluctuations in
speed Important safety notes
The three inner areas display the current driving G WARNING

style and light up green as a result of a particu- If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
larly economical driving style. Depending on the an attempt to increase the engine's braking
driving situation, up to two areas may light up effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
simultaneously.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer
accidents.
areas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-
nomical driving. A higher level indicates a more Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
economical driving style. If the three outer areas ing on a slippery road surface.
are completely filled at the same time, the driver
has adopted the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing condi- Downhill gradients
tions. The ECO display border lights up. ! On long and steep gradients, you must
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a
consumption. The additionally achieved range lower gear in good time. This allows you to
displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not take advantage of the engine's braking effect.
indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
Driving tips 167
This helps you to avoid overheating the time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
brakes and wearing them out excessively. been washed or driven through deep water.
When you take advantage of engine braking, a You then have to depress the brake pedal more
drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
on a slippery road surface. This could cause vehicle in front.
damage to the drive train. This type of damage After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war- washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
ranty. the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
Driving and parking

while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the and protecting them against corrosion.
brakes to rub by constantly applying light pres-
sure to the pedal. This results in excessive and Limited braking performance on salt-
premature wear to the brake pads. treated roads
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
to shift into a lower gear in good time on long If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially due may form on the brake discs and brake
important if the vehicle is laden. pads. This can result in a significantly longer
This also applies if you have activated cruise braking distance.
control, the speed limiter or Distance Pilot RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
DISTRONIC. salt residue. Make sure that you do not
This will use the braking effect of the engine, so endanger other road users when doing so.
that less braking will be required to maintain the RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
speed. This relieves the load on the brake sys- beginning and end of a journey.
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
and wearing too quickly. ahead.
Heavy and light loads Servicing the brakes

G WARNING ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in
driving, the braking system can overheat. This the instrument cluster and
increases the stopping distance and can even Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is
cause the braking system to fail. There is a running

risk of an accident. Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never The brake fluid level may be too low due to
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
pedal at the same time. Have the brake system checked immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop to
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly arrange this.
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads. ! A function or performance test should only
be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy you wish to operate the vehicle on such a
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive dynamometer, please consult a qualified spe-
on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cialist workshop in advance. You could oth-
cool the brakes more quickly. erwise damage the drive train or the brake
system.
Wet roads
! Because ESP® is an automatic system, the
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain engine and ignition must be switched off
without braking, there may be a delayed reac- (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop
tion from the brakes when braking for the first button in position 0 or 1) when the electric
Z
168 Driving tips
parking brake is being tested on a brake dyna- You can obtain further information about this
mometer (maximum 10 seconds). from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may New and replaced brake pads and discs only
seriously damage the brake system. reach their optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
All checks and maintenance work on the brake
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
system must be carried out at a qualified spe-
Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and
cialist workshop.
braking accordingly during this break-in period.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-
Driving and parking
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

ingly high brake wear. Observe the # brake
If the brake system has only been subject to wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and
moderate loads, you should test the functional- note any brake status messages in the multi-
ity of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so, function display. Especially for high perform-
depress the brake pedal firmly when driving at a ance driving, it is important to maintain and have
high speed. This improves the grip of the brake the brake system checked regularly.
pads.
You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)
on (Y page 67) or of BAS PLUS on (Y page 72). Driving on wet roads
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have
brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle Hydroplaning
which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz
vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent If water has accumulated to a certain depth on
quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have the road surface, there is a danger of hydro-
not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles planing occurring, even if:
or which are not of an equivalent quality could Ryou drive at low speeds.
affect your vehicle's operating safety. Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
brake fluid that has been specially approved for conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre- you must drive in the following manner:
sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
fluid which has not been approved for Rlower your speed.
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an Ravoid ruts.
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's Ravoid sudden steering movements.
operating safety. Rbrake carefully.
High-performance brake system Driving on flooded roads

(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check
The high-performance brake system is designed the depth of any water before driving through
for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when it. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-
braking. This will depend on: erwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or
RSpeed the engine compartment. This can damage
RBraking force the electronic components in the engine or
REnvironmental conditions, such as tempera- the automatic transmission. Water can also
ture and humidity be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles
and this can cause engine damage.
The wear of individual components of the brake
system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
discs, depends on the individual driving style select the raised vehicle level before driving
and operating conditions. through a body of water.
For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-
age that will be valid under all circumstances. An
aggressive driving style will lead to high wear.
Driving tips 169
Off-road fording such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the

! Under no circumstances should you accel- vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
erate before entering the water. The bow becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
wave could cause water to enter and damage fatal injury.
the engine and other assemblies. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors while running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
fording. Otherwise, water could get into the around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
vehicle interior and damage the vehicle's ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
Driving and parking

electronics and interior equipment. window on the side of the vehicle that is not
REstablish how deep the water is and the char- facing into the wind.
acteristics of the body of water before ford-
ing. ! When scraping ice off the rear window, take
RSelect the highest possible vehicle level. care not to damage the rear-window seal or
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer- trim.
ing wheel paddle shifter. Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
RAvoid high engine speeds. specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
REnter and exit the water at a flat place and at Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-
a steady walking pace. faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and
RDrive slowly and at an even speed through the braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or
water. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
REnsure that a bow wave does not form as you If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
drive. stopped when moving at low speed:
RDo not stop and do not switch off the engine. X Shift the transmission to position i.
Water offers a high degree of resistance, and X Try to bring the vehicle under control using
the ground is slippery and in some cases corrective steering.
unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and danger-
ous to pull away in the water. When driving in snow with or without snow
chains, select driving program Slippery
RClean any mud from the tire tread after ford-
(Y page 147).
ing.
RApply the brakes to dry them after fording. i Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not
Always observe the fording depth values cover the radiator, e.g. with a protective
(Y page 393). cover. The measuring function of the on-
board diagnosis system may otherwise pro-
vide inaccurate values. Some of these values
are required by law and must therefore always
Winter driving be accurate.
G WARNING The outside temperature indicator is not
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. played after a short delay.
There is an increased danger of skidding and Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
accidents. point do not guarantee that the road surface is
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
ing on a slippery road surface. wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay
special attention to road conditions when tem-
peratures are around the freezing point.
G DANGER For more information on driving with snow
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate chains, see (Y page 356).
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
Z
170 Driving tips
For more information on driving with summer Components damaged in this way can unex-
tires, see (Y page 356). pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" longer withstand the loads they are designed
section (Y page 374). to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
Off-road driving twigs can gather between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. If these materials
Important safety notes come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
Driving and parking
system, they can catch fire.

G WARNING In such situations, have the vehicle checked
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
risk of an accident. paying attention to road and traffic condi-
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the cialist workshop.
vehicle. When driving off-road, substances such as sand,
mud and water or water mixed with oil may get
G WARNING into the brakes. This could result in a reduced
braking effect or in total brake failure and also in
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or increased wear and tear. The braking charac-
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with teristics change depending on the material
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk entering the brakes. Clean the brakes after driv-
of fire. ing off-road. If you detect a reduced braking
effect or grinding noises, have the brake system
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, checked in a qualified specialist workshop as
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In soon as possible. Adapt your driving style to the
particular, remove parts of plants or other different braking characteristics.
flammable materials which have become Driving off-road increases the likelihood of dam-
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a age to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead to
qualified specialist workshop. failure of the mechanical assembly or systems.
Adapt your driving style to suit the terrain con-
ditions. Drive carefully. Have damage to the
G WARNING vehicle rectified immediately at a qualified spe-
If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle center of cialist workshop.
gravity is raised. This could cause the vehicle Do not switch to transmission position N when
to tip over more easily on uphill or downhill driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle
gradients. There is a risk of an accident. using the service brake, you could lose control
of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for your
Select the lowest possible vehicle level.
vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
General notes
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road H Environmental note
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
Protection of the environment is of primary
curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road
importance. Treat nature with respect.
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
Observe all prohibiting signs.
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the under- Read this section carefully before driving your
body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be vehicle off-road. Practice by driving over more
damaged without the damage being visible. gentle off-road terrain first.
Driving tips 171
Familiarize yourself with the characteristics of RLook out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes,
your vehicle and the gear shift operation before tree stumps and furrows.
driving through difficult terrain. RTake care when turning on an uphill or down-
The following driving systems are specially hill slope or when driving across a slope. The
adapted to off-road driving: vehicle could otherwise tip over.
Rthe Off-road drive program (vehicles without RAlways keep the doors, the tailgate, the side
Off-Road Engineering package) windows and the sliding sunroof closed while
(Y page 219) the vehicle is in motion.
RDo not shift the automatic transmission to
Driving and parking

ROff-road and Off-road Plus drive programs
(vehicles with Off-Road Engineering package) position i.
(Y page 220) RObserve the notes on off-road fording
RLOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles with the (Y page 169).
Off-Road Engineering package) i Information about retrofitting special all-ter-
(Y page 221) rain tires is available from any qualified spe-
RDifferential lock (vehicles with the Off-Road cialist workshop.
Engineering package) (Y page 221)
ROff-road ABS (Y page 67)
i Do not use the HOLD function when driving
off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients
ROff-road 4ETS (Y page 70)
or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD
ROff-road ESP® (Y page 71) function cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-
RAIRMATIC package (vehicle level) faces.
(Y page 188)
RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Checklist before driving off-road
(Y page 218)
Observe the following notes:
! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up while
the vehicle is in motion, stop the vehicle in a
RStop the vehicle before starting to drive along safe place as soon as possible. Check the
an off-road route. If necessary, select the off- engine oil level. The engine oil warning lamp
road program (Y page 220) or shift to the warning must not be ignored. Continuing the
LOW RANGE off-road gear (Y page 221). journey while the symbol is displayed could
RSelect a vehicle level that is suitable for the lead to engine damage.
terrain. To avoid damaging the vehicle, make X Engine oil level: check the engine oil level
sure there is always sufficient ground clear- and add oil if necessary.
ance.
When driving on steep gradients, the engine
RCheck that items of cargo and loads are
oil level must be sufficiently high to ensure a
stowed safely and are well secured correct oil supply in the vehicle.
(Y page 305).
X DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check the
RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
level and add if necessary (Y page 158).
when driving on a downhill gradient. Activate
X Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jack is
DSR (Y page 218).
working and make sure you have the lug
RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
wrench, a robust tow cable and a folding
when driving down an incline. spade in the vehicle.
RAdapt your speed to the terrain. The rougher,
X Wheels and tires: check the tread depth and
steeper or more ruts on the terrain, the slower
pressure of the tires.
your speed should be.
X Check for damage and remove any foreign
RDo not jump with the vehicle as this will inter-
objects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/
rupt the vehicle's propulsion.
tires.
RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-road
X Replace any missing valve caps.
routes where visibility is poor. For safety rea-
sons, get out of the vehicle first and survey X Replace dented or damaged wheels.
the off-road route. X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a loss
of tire pressure and damage the tire bead.
Z
172 Driving tips
Before driving off-road, check the wheels and Driving on sand

replace them if necessary.
Observe the following rules when driving on
sand:
Checklist after driving off-road
RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
! If you detect damage to the vehicle after without Off-Road Engineering package)
driving off-road, have the vehicle checked (Y page 219).
immediately at a qualified specialist work- RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
shop. with Off-Road Engineering package)
Driving and parking
Driving over rough terrain places greater (Y page 220).

demands on your vehicle than driving on normal RSelect a higher vehicle level.
roads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle. RAvoid high engine speeds.
This allows you to detect damage promptly and RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddle
reduce the risk of an accident to yourself and shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate to
other road users. the terrain.
X If the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-
is selected: select the Individual, Sport, ance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could
Comfort or Slippery drive program become stuck in loose ground.
(Y page 147). RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi-
X Deactivate the LOW RANGE off-road gear ble. Make sure that:
(Y page 221). - the tire ruts are not too deep.
X Deactivate DSR (Y page 218). - the sand is sufficiently firm.
X Lower the vehicle level again to a level suita- - the ground clearance of the vehicle is suf-
ble to the road conditions, e.g. to the normal ficient.
level.
X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and
Tire ruts and gravel roads
check for damage.
X Clean the front and rear license plates. ! Check that the ruts are not too deep and
X Clean the wheels and tires with a water jet that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.
and remove any foreign objects. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the bottom out and get stuck.
vehicle underside with a water jet; check for Observe the following rules when driving along
any foreign objects and damage. ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loose
X Check whether twigs or other parts of plants gravel:
have become trapped. These increase the risk RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
of fire and can damage fuel pipes, brake without Off-Road Engineering package)
hoses or the rubber bellows of the axle joints (Y page 219).
and propeller shafts. RSelect the Offroad drive program (vehicles
X After the trip, examine without fail the entire
with Off-Road Engineering package)
undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, body- (Y page 220).
work structure, steering, chassis and exhaust
RSelect a higher vehicle level.
system for damage.
RAvoid high engine speeds.
X After driving for extended periods across
sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirty RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer-
conditions, have the brake discs, wheels, ing wheel paddle shifter.
brake pads/linings and axle joints checked RDrive slowly.
and cleaned. RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with the
X If you detect strong vibrations after off-road wheels of one side on the center grassy area,
travel, check for foreign objects in the wheels if possible.
and drive train and remove them if necessary.
Foreign objects can disturb the balance and
cause vibrations.
Driving tips 173
Driving over obstacles could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the risk of an accident.
vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
passengers for guidance when driving over fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
large obstacles. The passenger should always vehicle.
keep a safe distance from the vehicle when
doing so in order to avoid injury as a result of RObserve the rules on off-road driving.
unexpected vehicle movements. After driving RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines or
Driving and parking

off-road or over obstacles, check the vehicle
gradients, but instead follow the direct line of
for possible damage, especially to the under-
fall.
body and the components of the chassis.
RWhen driving down an incline, make use of the
engine's braking effect. Observe the engine
speed; do not overrev the engine.
without Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 219).
with Off-Road Engineering package)
(Y page 220).
RBefore driving on extreme uphill and downhill
gradients, select the LOW RANGE offroad
gear (vehicles with Off-Road Engineering
package) (Y page 221).
Observe the following rules when driving over
RDrive slowly.
tree stumps, large stones and other obstacles:
RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at appropri-
ate engine speeds (maximum 3,000 rpm).
without Off-Road Engineering package)
RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddle
(Y page 219).
shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time
on long and steep downhill gradients.
with Off-Road Engineering package) RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-road
(Y page 220).
driving.
RSelect LOW RANGE offroad gear (vehicles
with Off-Road Engineering package) Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away on
a hill. For further information about hill start
(Y page 221)
assist, see (Y page 143).
RRaise the vehicle level.
Do not switch to transmission position N when
RAvoid high engine speeds.
driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer- using the service brake, you could lose control
ing wheel paddle shifter. of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for your
RDrive very slowly. vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.
RDrive straight over the center of obstacles. Always observe the approach/departure angle
values (Y page 394).
Traveling uphill Maximum gradient-climbing capability

Approach/departure angle Always observe the maximum gradient climbing
ability values (Y page 394).
G WARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
Z
174 Driving systems
Hilltops Further information on driving safety systems

(Y page 66).
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly
reduce pressure on the accelerator immediately
before reaching the brow of the hill. Make use of
the vehicle's own impetus to travel over the Cruise control
brow.
General notes
This style of driving prevents:
Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the Cruise control maintains a constant road speed
Driving and parking
brow of a hill for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid

exceeding the set speed. You must select a
Rthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down
lower gear in good time on long and steep down-
the other side hill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or
towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make use of
Driving downhill the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the
load on the brake system and prevents the
RDrive slowly. brakes from overheating and wearing too
RDo not drive at an angle down steep inclines. quickly.
Steer into the line of fall and drive with the Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
front wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, the ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady
vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. speed for a prolonged period. You can store any
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand pad- road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
dle shifter before tackling steep downhill gra-
dients. i Cruise control should not be activated when
RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
driving off-road.
gently. When doing so, make sure that the
vehicle is facing in the direction of the line of Important safety notes
fall.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-
RCheck that the brakes are working normally
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
after a long downhill stretch. nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control
i The special off-road ABS setting enables a cannot take into account the road, traffic and
precise, brief and repeated locking of the weather conditions. Cruise control is only an
front wheels. This causes them to dig into aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
loose earth. Be aware that the front wheels vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
easily skid across the ground surface if com- good time and for staying in your lane.
pletely braked and therefore lose their ability Do not use cruise control:
to steer. Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
Driving systems Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
Intelligent Drive traction and the vehicle could then skid
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno- Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
vative driver assistance and safety systems heavy rain or snow
which enhance comfort and support the driver in If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi- driver of the speed stored.
nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-
stone on the path towards autonomous driving.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
elements of active and passive safety in one well
thought out system – for the safety of the vehi-
cle occupants and that of other road users.
Driving systems 175
Cruise control lever stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-

matically applying the brakes.
Storing or calling up a speed
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
Driving and parking

stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
: Activates or increases speed tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
; Activates or reduces speed do not know the stored speed, store the
= Deactivates cruise control desired speed again.
? Activates at the current speed/last stored
speed X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =.
When you activate cruise control, the stored
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
speed is shown in the multifunction display for
five seconds. Cruise control is operational and when first
activated stores the current speed or regu-
lates the speed of the vehicle to the stored
Activation conditions speed.
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled: Setting a speed
Rthe electric parking brake must be released.
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
RESP® must be active, but not intervening. the speed set.
Rthe transmission must be in position D. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
RDSR must be deactivated. higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
Rthe Offroad Plus drive program must be deac- X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
tivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineer- ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
ing package). the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
Storing, maintaining and calling up a up : or down ; the last speed stored is
speed increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
Storing and maintaining a speed ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. the cruise control lever up : or down ;
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or beyond the pressure point.
down ?. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. up : or down ; the last speed stored is
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto- increased or reduced.
matically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con-
stored speed is resumed when the gradient trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
evens out. Cruise control maintains the speed stored after you have finished overtak-
ing.
Z
176 Driving systems
Deactivating cruise control front or take evasive action provided it is safe to

do so.
There are several ways to deactivate cruise con- For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist you
trol: when driving, the radar sensor system must be
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- operational.
wards :. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range
or between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph
X Brake. (200 km/h).
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC while driv-
Driving and parking
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:

ing on roads with steep gradients.
Ryou engage the electric parking brake
Since Distance Pilot DISTRONIC transmits radar
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h) waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® the responsible authorities. You can refer to the
Ryou activate DSR relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.
Ryou activate the Offroad Plus program (vehi-
cles with the Off-Road Engineering package) i USA only:
Ryou shift the transmission to position N while This device has been approved by the FCC as
driving a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a is intended for use in an automotive radar
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ system only. Removing, tampering with, or
trol Off message in the multifunction display altering the device will void any warranties,
for approximately five seconds. and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved
i When you switch off the engine, the last way.
speed stored is cleared. Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
i Canada only: This device complies with
General notes RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed 1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
and automatically helps you maintain the dis- ference, and
tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles
2. This device must accept any interference
are detected with the aid of the radar sensor
received, including interference that may
system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes auto-
cause undesired operation of the device.
matically so that the set speed is not exceeded.
Do not tamper with, alter or use in any non-
You must select a lower gear in good time on
approved way.
long and steep downhill gradients, especially if
the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing Any unauthorized modification to this device
so, you will make use of the braking effect of the could void the user's authority to operate the
engine. This relieves the load on the brake sys- equipment.
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly. Important safety notes
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is
a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually G WARNING
and acoustically. Without your intervention, Dis- Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to:
tance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a colli-
sion. An intermittent warning tone will then Rpeople or animals
sound and the distance warning lamp will light Rstationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped
up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately or parked vehicles
in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in
Roncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
Driving systems 177
As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may for braking in good time and for staying in your
neither give warnings nor intervene in such lane.
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
uation and be ready to brake.
heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
G WARNING erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
Driving and parking

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always traction and the vehicle could then skid
clearly identify other road users and complex Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
traffic situations. snow
In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect nar-
row vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then vehicles driving on a different line.
brake the vehicle In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
Rneither give a warning nor intervene impaired if:
Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
There is a risk of an accident. covering the sensors

Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
warns you.
ple, in parking garages
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a
G WARNING vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle to the speed stored.
with up to 50% of the maximum possible This speed may:
deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi- Rbe too high if you are driving in a turning lane
cient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you or an exit lane
with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand lane
risk of an accident. that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand
Apply the brakes yourself in these situations lane
and try to take evasive action. Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane
that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the lane
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
brakes automatically in certain situations. driver of the speed stored.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
The Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Rcan neither reduce the risk of accident nor
override the laws of physics if you fail to adapt
your driving style.
Rcannot take into account road, weather or
traffic conditions.
Ris only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
Z
178 Driving systems
Cruise control lever i If you do not fully release the accelerator

pedal, the Distance Pilot Passive mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display. The
set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in
front will then not be maintained. You will be
driving at the speed you determine by the
position of the accelerator pedal.
You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
when stationary. The lowest speed that can be
Driving and parking
set is 20 mph (30 km/h).

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =, up : or down ?.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
: Activates or increases speed
; Activates or reduces speed Activating at the current speed/last
= Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC stored speed
? Activates at the current speed/last stored G WARNING
speed If you call up the stored speed and it differs
A Sets a specified minimum distance from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
Activation conditions
dent.
To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the fol-
lowing conditions must be fulfilled: Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to
two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot do not know the stored speed, store the
DISTRONIC is ready for use. desired speed again.
Rthe electric parking brake must be released.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
you =.
Rthe transmission must be in position D. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be activated, it stores the current speed or reg-
fastened. ulates the speed of the vehicle to the stored
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must speed.
be closed.
Rthe Offroad Plus drive program must be deac- Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
tivated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engineer-
ing package). Pulling away and driving
RDSR must be deactivated. X If you want to pull away with Distance
Rthe vehicle must not skid. Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
Activating X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?.
you =, up : or down ?. or
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
X Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to
stored speed. the set speed.
Driving systems 179
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing Stopping

an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-
ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then G WARNING
brakes automatically. If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot braked by Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, it could
DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise roll away if:
control.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slower-
moving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In the voltage supply.
Driving and parking

this way, the distance you have selected is main- RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is switched off
tained. using the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a faster- cle occupant or from outside the vehicle
moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated
up to the speed you have stored. partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-
pered with.
Selecting the drive program Rthe battery is disconnected
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle
driving style if you have selected the Sport or
Sport Plus drive program (Y page 151). Accel- occupant.
eration behind the vehicle in front or to the set There is a risk of an accident.
speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate
have selected the Comfort drive program, the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and secure the
vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is
vehicle against rolling away.
recommended in stop-and-start traffic.
Changing lanes If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the
vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle
If you change to the overtaking lane, Distance to a stop.
Pilot DISTRONIC supports you if:
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-
Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) tionary and you do not need to depress the
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal brake.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently After a time, the electric parking brake secures
detect a danger of collision the vehicle and relieves the service brake.
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is Depending on the specified minimum distance,
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-
changing lanes takes too long or if the distance cient distance behind the vehicle in front. The
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front specified minimum distance is set using the
becomes too small. control on the cruise control lever.
i When you change lanes, Distance Pilot The transmission is shifted automatically to
DISTRONIC monitors the right lane (in left- position P if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
side traffic) or the left lane (in right-side traf- activated and the vehicle stationary:
fic). Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat
belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if, with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
activated and the vehicle stationary:
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
Z
180 Driving systems
On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there is X To increase: turn control ; in direction =.

a malfunction, the transmission may also be Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
automatically shifted into position P. greater distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.
Setting a speed X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment shorter distance between your vehicle and
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the vehicle in front.
the speed set.
Driving and parking
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a i Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently
higher speed or down A for a lower speed safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust
the distance to the vehicle in front if neces-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press sary.
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point. Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
up : or down ; the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ;
beyond the pressure point.
up : or down ;, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
i If you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored after you have finished over- There are several ways to deactivate Distance
taking. Pilot DISTRONIC:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
Setting a specified minimum distance wards :.
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC,
the Distance Pilot Off message appears in
the multifunction display for approximately five
seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated
if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you
accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time last speed stored after you have finished over-
span between one and two seconds. With this taking.
function you can set the minimum distance that
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehi-
cle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You
can see this distance in the multifunction dis-
play (Y page 181).
Driving systems 181
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac- Display in the assistance graphic when
tivated if: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the
vehicle is automatically secured with the elec-
tric parking brake
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you
Driving and parking

in order to pull away and the front-passenger
door or one of the rear doors is open
Ryou activate Parking Pilot
Rthe vehicle is skidding
A warning tone sounds. The Distance Pilot
Off message will appear in the multifunction : Vehicle in front, if detected
display for approximately five seconds. ; Distance indicator, current distance to the
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac- vehicle in front
tivated if: = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
Ryou activate DSR in front; adjustable
Ryou activate the OFFROAD Program+ (vehi- ? Own vehicle
cles with the Off-Road Engineering package) X Select the Assistance Graphic function
The Ã DSR symbol appears in the multifunc- using the on-board computer (Y page 241).
tion display.
Display in the assistance graphic when
Displays in the instrument cluster Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated
Displays in the speedometer
: Vehicle in front, if detected

; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
Example: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in the in front; adjustable
speedometer = Own vehicle
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, ? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated
one or two segments ; in the stored speed X Select the Assistance Graphic function
range light up. using the on-board computer (Y page 241).
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
You will see the stored speed for approximately
front, segments ; between speed of the vehi-
five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot
cle in front = and stored speed : light up.
DISTRONIC.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed in
the speedometer may differ slightly from the
speed stored for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
Z
182 Driving systems
Tips for driving with Distance Pilot Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering
DISTRONIC Pilot
General notes General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect
Driving and parking
vehicles during cornering is limited. Your vehi-

cle may brake unexpectedly or late.
RDriving on a different line: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are
not driving in the middle of their lane. The dis-
tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
ROther vehicles changing lanes: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cut-
ting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
too short. aids you in keeping the vehicle in the center of
RNarrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC the driving lane by means of moderate steering
has not yet detected the vehicle in front on interventions in a speed range from 0 - 125 mph
the edge of the road because of its narrow (0 - 200 km/h).
width. The distance to the vehicle in front will It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by
be too short. means of camera system : at the top of the
RObstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance windshield.
Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),
or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the the extended automatic Re-start in traffic jams
detected vehicle turns a corner and an obsta- focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into
cle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, Dis- account lane markings, e.g. when following vehi-
tance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for cles in a traffic jam.
them. At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h),
RCrossing traffic: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Steering Pilot focuses on clear lane markings
may mistakenly detect vehicles that are (left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in
crossing your lane. Activating Distance Pilot front if clear lane markings are not present.
DISTRONIC at, for example, a traffic light with If these conditions are not present, Steering
crossing traffic, could cause your vehicle to Pilot cannot provide assistance.
pull away at the wrong time. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be active in
In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance order for the function to be available.
Pilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC and Steering Pilot can neither
reduce the risk of an accident nor override the
laws of physics. It cannot take into account
road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in your lane.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot
does not detect road and traffic conditions and
does not detect all road users. If you are follow-
ing a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of
the road, your vehicle could come into contact
Driving systems 183
with the curb or other road boundaries. Be par- Steering Pilot cannot provide assistance:
ticularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, Ron very sharp corners
that are directly next to your vehicle.
Rwhen towing a trailer
Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or
Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
projecting out into the lane are not detected.
has been detected and displayed
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after
intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be Observe the important safety notes on Distance
corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 176).
opposite direction. The steering interventions are carried out with a
Driving and parking

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot limited steering moment. The system requires
cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In the driver to keep his hands on the steering
some cases, the steering intervention is not suf- wheel and to steer himself.
ficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
to ensure that it does not leave the lane. period of time, the system will first alert you with
The support provided by the system can be a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol
impaired if: appears in the multifunction display. If you have
still not started to steer and have not taken hold
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient of the steering wheel after five seconds at the
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you
fog or heavy spray to take control of the vehicle. Steering Pilot is
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the then switched to passive. Distance Pilot
sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface DISTRONIC remains active.
is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
Activating Steering Pilot
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- X Activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
ity of the camera Steering Pilot using the on-board computer
Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings (Y page 241).
for one lane, e.g. roadworks The Steering Pilot On message appears
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
on the multifunction display. Steering Pilot is
activated.
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short Information in the multifunction display
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
ted
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
The system is switched to passive and no longer
assists you by performing steering interventions
if: If Steering Pilot is activated but not ready for a
Ryou actively change lane steering intervention, steering wheel symbol :
appears in gray. If the system provides you with
Ryou switch on the turn signal
support by means of steering interventions,
Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do symbol : is shown in green.
not steer for a prolonged period of time
Deactivating Steering Pilot
i After you have finished changing lanes,
Steering Pilot is automatically active once X Deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with
more. Steering Pilot using the on-board computer
(Y page 241).
The Steering Pilot Off message appears
on the multifunction display. Steering pilot is
deactivated.
Z
184 Driving systems
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated Always select as low a vehicle level as possi-
or not available, Steering Pilot is deactivated ble and adjust your driving style.
automatically.
G WARNING
Level control (vehicles with the Off- When you drive with the chassis lowered or
Road Engineering package) raised, the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics can be significantly impaired. You
Important safety notes could also exceed the permissible vehicle
Driving and parking
Level control adapts the vehicle level automati- height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of
cally to the current operating and driving situa- an accident.
tion. This results in reduced fuel consumption Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.
and improved handling.
Make changes to the vehicle level while the G WARNING
vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to
adjust to the new level as quickly as possible. Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle
The vehicle level may change visibly if you park may start to skid and roll over in the event of
the vehicle and the outside temperature an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when
changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
level is lower; with an increase in temperature, conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
the vehicle level rises. Always adapt your speed and driving style to
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
vehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-
prevailing road and weather conditions.
ancies while still parked. However, for signifi-
cant level changes, such as after the vehicle has
been stationary for a long period, the engine ! When driving on extremely rough terrain,
must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is select a high vehicle level in good time. Make
only lowered when the doors are closed. Low- sure there is always sufficient ground clear-
ering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it ance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.
continues once the door has been closed. RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-
Further information about "Driving off-road" over rate than other types of vehicles.
(Y page 170). Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
G WARNING and severe or fatal injury.
When the vehicle is being lowered, people RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
could become trapped if their limbs are nificantly more likely to die than a person
between the vehicle body and the wheels or wearing a seat belt.
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of You and all vehicle occupants should always
injury. wear your seat belts.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches Basic settings
when the vehicle is being lowered. The extent to which the vehicle is raised or low-
ered depends on the basic setting selected.
G WARNING Select:
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the Rthe Comfort or Sport drive program for driv-
driving characteristics could be impaired by ing on normal roads
the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehi- Rthe Offroad drive program for driving on eas-
cle could rollover more easily, for example on ily negotiable off-road terrain
a bend. There is a risk of an accident. Rthe Offroad Plus drive program for off-road
driving
Driving systems 185
Roffroad level 1 for driving on easily negotiable If you press the % or a button on the
off-road terrain multifunction steering wheel, the message will
Roffroad level 2 for driving on normal off-road disappear. Once normal level has been reached,
terrain all indicator lamps = go out.
Roffroad level 3 for freeing the vehicle in par- The vehicle automatically selects normal level if
ticularly rough terrain at low speeds only you:
The individual vehicle levels differ from the nor- Rdrive at speeds above 70 mph (112 km/h) or
mal level as follows: Rdrive at speeds between 65 mph (105 km/h)
Driving and parking

R–0.6 in (–15 mm) in the Sport drive program and 70 mph (112 km/h) for approximately
R+/–0 in (+/–0 mm) in the Comfort drive pro-
20 seconds
gram The vehicle is lowered to low level if you are
R+ 1.2 in (+ 30 mm) in the Offroad drive pro-
traveling at higher speeds.
gram
R+ 2.4 in (+ 60 mm) in the Offroad Plus drive
Normal level
program
R+ 1.2 in (+ 30 mm) in offroad level 1
Setting the vehicle level

! Make sure that there is enough ground
clearance when the vehicle is being lowered.
It could otherwise hit the ground, damaging
the underbody.
Setting the vehicle to normal level:

X Start the engine.
X Press selector wheel :.
Selector wheel : extends.
X To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
counter-clockwise ?.
The vehicle is lowered.
If one or more indicator lamps = are on:
X Turn selector wheel : counter-clockwise ?
until all indicator lamps = that are lit start to
Set the vehicle level using the selector wheel. flash.
The vehicle is lowered to normal level. As
X Start the engine. soon as the next lowest level is reached, the
X Press selector wheel :. indicator lamp stops flashing and goes out.
Selector wheel : extends.
X To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
clockwise ;.
Offroad levels
The vehicle is raised.
General notes
X To lower the vehicle: turn selector wheel :
counter-clockwise ?. Only select an offroad level when this is appro-
The vehicle is lowered. priate for road conditions. Otherwise, fuel con-
sumption increases and handling may be affec-
During the adjustment, the Lowering or Vehi‐ ted.
cle Rising message appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
Z
186 Driving systems
You can select from the following: If you press the % or a button on the
ROffroad level 1 at speeds up to 60 mph multifunction steering wheel, the message will
(96 km/h) disappear.
ROffroad level 2 at speeds up to 40 mph i Up to offroad level 2, you can hide the mes-
(64 km/h) sages using the % or a button on the
ROffroad level 3 at speeds up to 12 mph multifunction steering wheel.
(20 km/h) While the adjustment from offroad level 2 to off-
If you select an offroad level when driving at too road level 3 is taking place, you will see a mes-
Driving and parking
high a speed, the Drive More Slowly message sage such as the following in the multifunction
appears in the multifunction display. display: Vehicle rising Max. speed
Offroad level 3 is only suitable for driving on 12 mph (20 km/h).
extremely difficult off-road terrain under partic- The Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h) message
ularly rough conditions. draws your attention to the maximum speed
RAdjust your driving style to the altered han- permitted for offroad level 3.
dling characteristics. If you drive above 12 mph (20 km/h) at offroad
RDo not drive at speeds above 12 mph level 3, you will see the following message
(20 km/h). shown in red in the multifunction display: Low‐
ering Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h).
i You cannot clear these messages.
You also hear a warning. The vehicle is lowered
and offroad level 3 is canceled.
If you continue to increase your speed, the red
message continues to be shown in the multi-
function display. The newly set level is not dis-
played until the vehicle has been set to a level
suitable for the current speed.
Lowering the vehicle
If you drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) while
Indicator lamps = for the desired offroad level the vehicle level is being lowered, you will see
flash: the following message shown in white in the
Rthe lower indicator lamp flashes, offroad multifunction display: Lowering Max. speed
level 1 is selected 20 km/h.
Rthe lower and center indicator lamps flash, The vehicle is lowered to offroad level 2.
offroad level 2 is selected You will see a message in the multifunction dis-
Rall three indicator lamps flash, offroad level 3 play, for example: Lowering.
is selected Offroad level 2 is canceled and the vehicle is
The vehicle adjusts to the offroad level selected. lowered to offroad level 1 if you:
As soon as an offroad level is reached, the cor- Rdrive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) or
responding indicator lamp stops flashing and Rdrive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h)
lights up constantly. and 50 mph (80 km/h) for longer than
Raising the vehicle 20 seconds
Offroad level 1 is canceled. Depending on the
Set the vehicle level using the selector wheel.
vehicle's speed and the selected drive program,
X To raise the vehicle: turn selector wheel : the vehicle is automatically lowered to normal
clockwise ;. level or low level if you:
The vehicle is raised to offroad level 1 by 1.2 in Rdrive at speeds above 70 mph (112 km/h) or
(30 mm) compared to the normal level.
Rdrive at speeds between 65 mph (105 km/h)
During the adjustment, the Vehicle rising and 70 mph (112 km/h) for longer than
message, for example, appears in the multifunc- 20 seconds
tion display.
Driving systems 187
HOLD function Activation conditions

General notes You can activate the HOLD function if:
Rthe vehicle is stationary
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
following situations:
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes function
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is
Rwhen waiting in traffic fastened
Driving and parking

The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver Rthe electric parking brake is released
having to depress the brake pedal. Rthe transmission is in position h, k or i
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away. Activating the HOLD function
i Do not use the HOLD function when driving
off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients
or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD
function cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-
faces.

G WARNING X Make sure that the activation conditions are
If the vehicle is only braked using the HOLD met.
function, the vehicle may roll away in the fol- X Depress the brake pedal.
lowing situations when you leave the vehicle: X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
Rif
until : appears in the multifunction display.
there is a malfunction in the system or in
The HOLD function is activated. You can
the voltage supply release the brake pedal.
Rif the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake i If depressing the brake pedal the first time
does not activate the HOLD function, wait
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant
briefly and then try again.
Rif the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam- Deactivating the HOLD function
pered with or the battery is disconnected
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically
There is a risk of an accident. if:
Always deactivate the HOLD function and Ryou depress the accelerator and the trans-
secure the vehicle against rolling away before mission is in position h or k
you leave it. Ryou shift the transmission to position j
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the tain amount of pressure until : disappears
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
from the multifunction display
brakes automatically in certain situations.
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park-
ing brake
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations: Ryou activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Rwhen towing the vehicle i After a time, the electric parking brake
Rin the car wash secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.
Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 187).
Z
188 Driving systems
When the HOLD function is activated, the trans- Important safety notes
mission is automatically shifted to position j
if: G WARNING
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat When the vehicle is being lowered, people
belt is unfastened could become trapped if their limbs are
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- between the vehicle body and the wheels or
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
function injury.
Driving and parking
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle

automatically if the HOLD function is activated Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
when the vehicle is stationary and: in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
Ra system malfunction occurs
Rthe power supply is insufficient If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the
On steep uphill or downhill gradients or if there vehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-
is a malfunction, the transmission may also be ancies while still parked. However, for signifi-
automatically shifted to position j. cant level changes, such as after the vehicle has
been stationary for a long period, the engine
must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is
AIRMATIC package only lowered when the doors are closed. Low-
ering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it
General notes continues once the door has been closed.
AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with var- ADS and ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping
iable damping for improved driving comfort.
Level control ensures the best possible suspen- System)
sion and constant ground clearance, even with a
laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is General notes
lowered automatically to improve driving safety The Adaptive Damping System automatically
and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also controls the calibration of the dampers. The
the option to manually adjust the vehicle level. damping characteristics adapt to the current
AIRMATIC consists of: operating and driving situation.
Rlevel settings
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
Rlevel control and
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
RADS or ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping Sys-
tem) Rthe road surface conditions
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- Rthe drive program selected
cles): your vehicle may also be equipped with Rthe vehicle level setting
the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM (Y page 189).
Selecting Comfort mode
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: your vehicle is equip-
ped with the ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM
(Y page 189).
Observe the notes on driving with a trailer
(Y page 225).
The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC
SELECT controller (Y page 147) or the level but-
ton (Y page 190). The setting always corre-
sponds to the last selected function.
Driving systems 189
In the Comfort drive program, the driving char- Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle
acteristics of your vehicle are more comforta- remains at the normal level.
ble. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a
more comfortable driving style. Also select the Selecting Sport Plus tuning (Mercedes-
Comfort drive program when driving fast on AMG vehicles)
straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of high-
way.
X Select the Comfort drive program using
DYNAMIC SELECT controller :.
Driving and parking

The vehicle is adjusted to normal level
cles): in the Comfort drive program, the vehicle
is:
Rlowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) if you drive at
speeds above 78 mph (125 km/h)
Rraised again if you drive at speeds below
50 mph (80 km/h)
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: in the Comfort drive The very firm setting of the suspension setting in
the Sport Plus drive program ensures the best
program, the vehicle is:
possible contact with the road. Select this drive
Rlowered by 0.4 in (10 mm) if you drive at program when employing a sporty driving style,
speeds above 112 mph (180 km/h) e.g. on winding country roads or primarily when
Rraised again if you drive at speeds below driving on race circuits.
87 mph (140 km/h) DSR is not available in the Sport Plus drive pro-
gram. For further information on DSR, see
Selecting Sport mode (Y page 218).
X Select the Sport Plus drive program using
The vehicle is lowered by 0.4 in (10 mm) com-
pared to the normal level.
ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM

The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM uses active stabil-
izers to optimize both driving comfort and vehi-
cle dynamics. Depending on the drive program
selected (Y page 151), the ACTIVE CURVE SYS-
TEM also changes the setting.
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in If you have selected the Comfort drive program:
the Sport drive program ensures even better
Rrolling movement is reduced in the event of
contact with the road. Select this drive program
changing surface undulations
when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on
winding country roads. Rthe roll angle when cornering is reduced
DSR is not available in the Sport drive program. Rthe driving is dynamic
For further information on DSR, see If you have selected the Sport drive program:
(Y page 218). Rthe roll angle is reduced significantly
X Select the Sport drive program using Rthe driving is even more dynamic
cles): the vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm)
compared to the normal level.
Z
190 Driving systems
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you have selected Always adapt your speed and driving style to
the Sport Plus drive program: the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
Rthe roll angle is reduced even more signifi- prevailing road and weather conditions.
cantly
Rthe driving is designed for maximum dyna- ! When driving on extremely rough terrain,
mism select a high vehicle level in good time. Make
sure there is always sufficient ground clear-
Vehicle level ance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.
Driving and parking
RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-

Important safety notes over rate than other types of vehicles.
G WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
When the vehicle is being lowered, people and severe or fatal injury.
could become trapped if their limbs are RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
between the vehicle body and the wheels or nificantly more likely to die than a person
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of wearing a seat belt.
injury. You and all vehicle occupants should always
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or wear your seat belts.
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches General notes
when the vehicle is being lowered.
Only select raised level if this is appropriate for
the road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consump-
G WARNING tion may increase and handling may be affected.
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the Make changes to the vehicle level while the
driving characteristics could be impaired by vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to
the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehi- adjust to the new level as quickly as possible.
cle could rollover more easily, for example on The vehicle level may change visibly if you park
a bend. There is a risk of an accident. the vehicle and the outside temperature
changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle
Always select as low a vehicle level as possi- level is lower; with an increase in temperature,
ble and adjust your driving style. the vehicle level rises.
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the
G WARNING vehicle begins to compensate for load discrep-
When you drive with the chassis lowered or ancies while still parked. However, for signifi-
cant level changes, such as after the vehicle has
raised, the vehicle's braking and driving char- been stationary for a long period, the engine
acteristics can be significantly impaired. You must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is
could also exceed the permissible vehicle only lowered when the doors are closed. Low-
height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of ering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it
an accident. continues once the door has been closed.
Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away. Vehicles with no trailer coupled: below a
speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) you can choose
between the normal and raised vehicle level.
G WARNING Select the normal vehicle level for normal road
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle surfaces and the raised vehicle level for driving
may start to skid and roll over in the event of with snow chains or on particularly poor road
an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if
the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
If you try to select raised level at a speed above
conditions. There is a risk of an accident. 37 mph (60 km/h), the Drive More Slowly
message appears in the multifunction display.
Driving systems 191
Vehicles with a trailer coupled: below a speed Setting the normal vehicle level
of 19 mph (30 km/h), you can choose between ! Make sure that there is enough ground
the normal and raised vehicle level. clearance when the vehicle is being lowered.
Setting the raised vehicle level It could otherwise hit the ground, damaging
the underbody.
X Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
Driving and parking

X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes while the vehicle is
being lowered, and goes out as soon as the
desired vehicle level is reached.
Vehicles with no trailer coupled: the vehi-
cle is adjusted to the height of the selected
drive program (Y page 147).
Vehicles with a trailer coupled: the vehicle
is adjusted to normal level regardless of the
X Start the engine. drive program selected (Y page 147). The
If indicator lamp ; is not lit: vehicle remains at the normal level, even if the
drive program is changed.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes while the vehicle is During the adjustment, the Lowering mes-
being raised, and lights up continuously as sage appears in the multifunction display.
soon as the vehicle reaches the desired level. If you press the % or a button on the
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- multifunction steering wheel, the message will
cles): the vehicle is raised by 2.4 in (60 mm) disappear.
compared to the normal level.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the vehicle is
raised by 2 in (50 mm) compared to the nor- AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-
mal level. tem
The Vehicle Rising message appears in the
multifunction display. General notes
The message remains until the raised level is The electronically controlled damping system
reached. works continuously. This improves driving
If you press the % or a button on the safety and ride comfort.
multifunction steering wheel, the message will The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
disappear. and depends on:
The raised vehicle level setting is canceled in the Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
following cases: Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport+ or
cles): you are driving faster than 37 mph Comfort
(60 km/h). The suspension setting can be adjusted using
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: you are driving button : in the center console or the DYNAMIC
faster than 43 mph (70 km/h). SELECT controller (Y page 147).
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: You drive for Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
approximately 20 seconds between 40 mph Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is
(64 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h). activated. For further information about starting
RYou drive with a trailer at speeds greater than the engine, see (Y page 141).
19 mph (30 km/h).
The raised vehicle level remains saved when you
are not driving within these speed ranges.
Z
192 Driving systems
Sport mode Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensors in the
front bumper and six sensors in the rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
Driving and parking
and audibly indicates the distance between your

vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and
Sport mode ensures even better contact with exiting a parking space. When maneuvering,
the road. Select this mode when employing a parking or pulling out of a parking space, make
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country sure that there are no persons, animals or
roads. objects in the area in which you are maneuver-
ing.
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
lamp = lights up. ! When parking, pay particular attention to
You have selected Sport mode. objects above or below the sensors, such as
The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes- flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC
sage appears in the multifunction display. does not detect such objects when they are in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You
could damage the vehicle or the objects.
Sport + mode The sensors may not detect snow and other
The very firm setting of the suspension setting in objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
with the road. Select this mode only when driv- wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck
ing on race circuits. or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamps ; and = are off: to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator uneven terrain.
lamp ; lights up.
You have selected Sport + mode. ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
The AMG Suspension System SPORT + mes- hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures
sage appears in the multifunction display. the minimum detection range to an obstacle
from the bumper, not the ball coupling.
In "Sport +" mode, the vehicle is lowered by
10 mm compared to the normal level. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for
the rear area when you establish an electrical
Comfort mode connection between your vehicle and a trailer.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-
In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of matically when you:
your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this Rswitch on the ignition
mode if you favor a more comfortable driving
style, but also when driving fast on straight Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
roads, e.g. highways. Rrelease the electric parking brake
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
lamps ; and = go out. speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactiva-
You have selected Comfort mode. ted at lower speeds.
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Driving systems 193
Range of the sensors Range
General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
account obstacles located:
Rbelow the detection range, such as persons,
animals or objects
Rabove the detection range, such as overhang-
Driving and parking

ing loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side

(example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.
They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean : Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners)
the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch ; Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners)
or damage them (Y page 334).
= Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center)
? Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-

evant warning displays light up and a warning
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-
imum, the distance may no longer be shown.
Z
194 Driving systems
Warning displays One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-
cle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-
mittent warning tone for approximately two
seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
Driving and parking
warning tone for approximately two seconds.

This indicates that you have now reached the
minimum distance.
Deactivating or activating Parking

: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi- Assist PARKTRONIC
cle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located on
the dashboard above the center air vents. The
warning display for the rear area is located on
the headliner in the rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yel- : Indicator lamp
low segments showing operational readiness = ; Deactivates or activates Parking Assist
light up. PARKTRONIC
The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter- If indicator lamp : lights up, Parking Assist
mine which warning display is active when the PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Pilot is
engine is running. then also deactivated.
Transmission posi- Warning display i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-

tion cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
D Front area activated
R, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areas
rolling backwards activated
P No areas activated
Driving systems 195
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deacti-
the Parking Assist vated.
PARKTRONIC warning X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a
displays are lit. You also qualified specialist workshop.
hear a warning tone for
Driving and parking

approximately two sec-
onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately five seconds,
and the indicator lamp in
the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments in The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-
the Parking Assist ference.
PARKTRONIC warning X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 334).
displays are lit. Parking
X Switch the ignition back on.
Assist PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
approximately five sec- sound waves.
onds.
X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different
location.
Parking Pilot G WARNING

While parking or pulling out of a parking
General notes
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides result in a collision with another road user.
of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suit- There is a risk of an accident.
able parking space. Active steering intervention
and brake application can assist you during Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
parking. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is also vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot
available (Y page 192). parking procedure.
Important safety notes ! If they cannot be avoided, drive over obsta-

cles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a replace- angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
ment for your attention to your immediate sur- wheels or tires.
roundings. You are always responsible for safe
maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking Parking Pilot may show parking spaces which
space. Make sure that no persons, animals or are not suitable for parking, e.g.:
objects are in the path of your vehicle. Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva- Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
ted, Parking Pilot is also unavailable. Ron unsuitable surfaces
Z
196 Driving systems
Parking tips: Further information about the detection range

ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking (Y page 193).
space as possible. Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown spaces at a right angle to the direction of travel
might be identified or measured incorrectly. if:
RParking spaces that are partially occupied by Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next
trailer drawbars might not be identified as to one another
such or be measured incorrectly. Rthe parking space is directly next to a low
Driving and parking
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking obstacle such as a low curb
space being measured inaccurately. Ryou park forwards
RPay attention to the warning messages of Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC during the park- spaces parallel with or at a right angle to the
ing procedure (Y page 192). direction of travel if:
RYou can intervene to correct the steering pro- Rthe parking space is on a curb
cedure at any time. Parking Pilot will then be Rthe system reads the parking space as being
canceled. blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-
RWhen transporting a load that protrudes from ing blocks
your vehicle, you must not use Parking Pilot. Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-
RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are ver into
mounted. Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
RMake sure that the tire pressures are always e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
correct. This has a direct influence on the
parking characteristics of the vehicle.
Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
Ron straight roads, not bends
Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
pavement : Detected parking space on the left
; Parking symbol
Detecting parking spaces = Detected parking space on the right
Objects located above the detection range of Parking Pilot is activated automatically when
Parking Pilot will not be detected when the park- driving forward. The system is operational up to
ing space is measured. These are not taken into a speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
account when the parking/exiting procedure is While in operation, the system independently
calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections locates and measures parking spaces on both
or loading ramps of trucks. Parking Pilot may sides of the vehicle.
therefore guide you into the parking space too Parking Pilot will only detect parking spaces
early. which are:
G WARNING Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
If there are objects above the detection range: travel
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
RParking Pilot may steer in too early at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
objects at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-
You may cause a collision as a result. There is cle
a risk of an accident. Rthat are at right angles to the direction of
travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than
If objects are located above the detection your vehicle
range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot.
Driving systems 197
i Note that Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC cannot X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-
measure the depth of parking spaces if they bol shows the desired parking space in the
are at right angles to the direction of travel. instrument cluster.
You will need to judge whether your vehicle X Shift the transmission to position R.
will fit into the parking space. The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
When driving at speeds below 19 mph % message appears in the multifunction
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a display.
status indicator in the instrument cluster. When X To cancel the procedure: press the %
a parking space has been detected, an arrow button on the multifunction steering wheel or
Driving and parking

towards the right or the left also appears. Park- pull away.
ing Pilot only displays parking spaces on the or
front-passenger side as standard. Parking X To park using Parking Pilot: press the a
spaces on the driver's side are displayed as button on the multifunction steering wheel.
soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is
The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
activated. When parking on the driver's side,
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
this must remain activated until you confirm the
use of Parking Pilot by pressing the a button
on the multifunction steering wheel. The system X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
automatically determines whether the parking X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all
space is parallel or at right angles to the direc- times. When backing up, drive at a speed
tion of travel. below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-
A parking space is displayed while you are driv- erwise, Parking Pilot is canceled immediately.
ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
(15 m) away from it. when the vehicle approaches the rear border
of the parking space.
Parking Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces.
G WARNING The Parking Pilot Active Select D
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll
X Shift the transmission to position D while the
away if:
vehicle is stationary.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
the voltage supply. direction.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
partment, the battery or the fuses have and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, pulling away.
e.g. by a vehicle occupant. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
There is a risk of an accident. times.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill.
against rolling away. The Parking Pilot Active Select R
Observe Surroundings message appears in
i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects the multifunction display.
obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically As soon as the parking procedure is complete,
whilst the vehicle is being parked. You are the Parking Pilot Finished message
responsible for braking in good time. appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle
is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary
without the driver having to depress the brake
Z
198 Driving systems
pedal. The braking effect is canceled when you X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
depress the accelerator pedal. The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steer- % message appears in the multifunction
ing interventions and brake applications. When display.
Parking Pilot is finished, you must steer and X To cancel the procedure: press the %
brake again yourself. Parking Assist button on the multifunction steering wheel or
PARKTRONIC is still available. pull away.
Parking tips: or
X To exit a parking space using Parking
Driving and parking
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-

ing space after parking is dependent on vari- Pilot: press the a button on the multi-
ous factors. These include the position and function steering wheel.
shape of the vehicles parked in front and The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
behind it and the conditions of the location. It and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
may be the case that Parking Pilot guides you sage appears in the multifunction display.
too far into a parking space, or not far enough X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
into it. In some cases, it may also lead you X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
across or onto the curb. Cancel the parking not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
procedure with Parking Pilot if necessary. imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-
RYou can also select preselect transmission ing space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is can-
position D. The vehicle redirects and does not celed immediately.
drive as far into the parking space. Should the X Shift the transmission to position D or R as
transmission change take place too early, the required or according to the message while
parking procedure will be canceled. A sensi- the vehicle is stationary.
ble parking position can no longer be ach- Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
ieved from this position. direction. The Parking Pilot Active
Accelerate and Brake Observe Sur‐
Exiting a parking space roundings message appears in the multi-
function display.
In order for Parking Pilot to assist you:
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
Rthe border of the parking space must be high for the steering procedure to complete before
enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too pulling away.
small, for example.
If you back up after activation, the steering
Rthe border of the parking space must not be wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
too wide. Your vehicle can be maneuvered tion.
into a position at a maximum of 45° to the
starting position in the parking space. X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft

the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
plays, several times if necessary.
(1.0 m) must be available.
Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a park- Once you have exited the parking space com-
ing space only if you have parked the vehicle pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
parallel to the direction of travel using the Park- straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
ing Pilot. Parking Pilot Finished message appears in
the multifunction display. You will then have to
i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects steer and merge into traffic on your own. Park-
obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically ing Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can
whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space. take over the steering before the vehicle has
You are responsible for braking in good time. exited the parking space completely. This is
X Start the engine. useful, for example when you recognize that it is
already possible to pull out of the parking space.
X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
will drive out of the parking space.
Driving systems 199
Canceling Parking Pilot vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-
tem.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
steering wheel or steer yourself. mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
Parking Pilot is canceled immediately. The
Parking Pilot Canceled message appears i The text shown in the multimedia system
in the multifunction display. display depends on the language setting. The
or following are examples of rear view camera
X Press the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC button displays in the multimedia system.
Driving and parking

(Y page 194).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off Important safety notes
and Parking Pilot is immediately canceled.
The Parking Pilot Canceled message The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
appears in the multifunction display. replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
Parking Pilot is canceled automatically when: for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged that there are no persons, animals or objects in
Rtransmission position P is selected the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in parking spaces.
Rparking using Parking Pilot is no longer pos-
sible Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function in
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
a limited manner:
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The
Rif the trunk lid is open
÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument
Rif there is heavy rain, snow or fog
cluster
Rat night or in very dark places
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-
appears and the multifunction display shows the Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Parking Pilot Canceled message. Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steer lighting (the display may flicker)
and brake again yourself. Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the ter
accelerator again. Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 334)
Rear view camera Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
event, have the camera position and setting
General notes checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate holder, bicycle rack).
For technical reasons, leaving the standard
height can result in inaccuracies in the guide
lines on vehicles with a height-adjustable chas-
sis.
i The rear view camera is protected from rain-
drops and dust by means of a flap. When the
rear view camera is activated, this flap opens.
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and

maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your
Z
200 Driving systems
The flap closes again when: Rthe rear section of an HGV

Ryou have finished the maneuvering process Ra slanted post
Ryou switch off the engine Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Ryou open the cargo compartment Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 334).
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the rear view camera has
been deactivated.
Driving and parking
Activating/deactivating the rear view

camera
X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is
in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear
function is selected in the multimedia system
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
X Engage reverse gear. imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
The rear view camera flap opens. The multi- vehicle
media system shows the area behind the vehi- ; White guide line without turning the steering
cle with guide lines. wheel, vehicle width including the exterior
The image from the rear view camera is avail- mirrors (static)
able throughout the maneuvering process. = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
X To switch the function mode for vehicles including the exterior mirrors, for current
with trailer tow hitch: using the controller, steering wheel angle (dynamic)
select symbol : for the "Reverse parking" ? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a take at the current steering wheel angle
trailer". (dynamic)
The symbol of the selected function is high-
lighted.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
vates if you shift the transmission to j or after
driving forwards a short distance.
Displays in the multimedia system

The rear view camera may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
The rear view camera does not show objects in
the following positions:
Rvery close to the rear bumper A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
Runder the rear bumper imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Bumper
! Objects not at ground level may appear to D Red guide line at a distance of approximately
be further away than they actually are, e.g.: 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmis-
Rthe drawbar of a trailer sion is in position k.
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Driving systems 201
= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 200).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
Driving and parking

X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
: Front warning display X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
; Additional measurement operational readi- back up until you reach the end position.
ness indicator for Parking Assist Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
PARKTRONIC parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
= Rear warning display
Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: Reverse perpendicular parking with steer-
when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera- ing input
tional (Y page 193), additional measurement
operational readiness indicator ; appears in
the multimedia system. If the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or
light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the multi-
media system.
"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space
without steering input
: Parking space marking
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 200).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the parking
: White guide line without steering input – space until yellow guide line ; reaches park-
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors ing space marking :.
(static) X Maintain the steering input and reverse care-
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width fully.
Z
202 Driving systems
X Back up carefully until you have reached the

final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the
parking space.
"Coupling up a trailer" function

Driving and parking
: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
: Vehicle center point on the yellow guide line
at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from
the rear of the vehicle
; Trailer drawbar
This function is only available on vehicles with a
trailer tow hitch.
X Before coupling up a trailer, set the height of
trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher
than the ball coupling.
X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer
drawbar ;.
: White guide line for current steering input
; Parking space marking
X Turn the steering wheel to the center position
while the vehicle is stationary.
: Red guide line at a distance of approximately

0.30 m from the ball coupling
; Trailer drawbar marker assistant
= Trailer drawbar
: Red guide line at a distance of approximately ? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func-
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle tion
; White guide line without steering input A Ball coupling
= End of parking space
Driving systems 203
i For technical reasons, the ball coupling of 360° camera

the trailer tow hitch in the multimedia system
display is either only partially visible or not at General notes
all.
The 360° camera is a system consisting of four
X Select symbol ? using the controller.
cameras.
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-
ted. The distance specifications now only The system processes images from the follow-
apply to objects that are at the same level as ing cameras:
the ball coupling. RRear view camera
Driving and parking

X Back up carefully, making sure that trailer RFront camera
drawbar locating aid ; points approximately RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors
in the direction of trailer drawbar =. The cameras cover the immediate surroundings
X Back up carefully until trailer drawbar = rea- of the vehicle. The 360° camera assists you, for
ches the red guide line. instance when parking or at exits with reduced
The distance between the trailer drawbar and visibility.
the red guide line is now approximately You can show pictures from the 360° camera in
0.30 m. full-screen mode or in seven different split-
X Couple up the trailer (Y page 225). screen views on the multimedia system display.
A split-screen view also includes a top view of
180° view the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data
supplied by the installed cameras (virtual cam-
era).
The six split-screen views are:
RTop view and picture from the rear view cam-
era (130° viewing angle)
RTop view and image from the front camera
(130° viewing angle without displaying the
maximum steering wheel angle)
RTop view and enlarged rear view
RTop view and enlarged front view
RTop view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer
tow hitch)
: Symbol for the 180° view function RTop view and rear-view images from the exte-
; Your vehicle rior mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
= Warning displays for Parking Assist RTop view and forward-view images from the
PARKTRONIC exterior mirror cameras (front wheel view)
You can also use the rear view camera to select When the function is active and you shift the
a 180° view. transmission from h or k to i, the dynamic
guide lines are hidden.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
tional (Y page 193), a symbol for your own vehi- When you shift between transmission positions
cle appears in the multimedia system. If the h and k, you see the previously selected front
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays or rear view.
are active, warning displays = light up in the Distances measured by Parking Assist
multimedia system in yellow or red accordingly. PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed:
Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle icon in the top view, or
Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode
The line thickness and color of the brackets
show how far the vehicle is away from an object:
Z
204 Driving systems
Ryellow brackets with thin lines: Parking Assist Rthe camera lenses are dirty or covered
PARKTRONIC is active Rthe vehicle components in which the cameras
Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is are installed are damaged In this event, have
present in close range of the vehicle the camera position and setting checked at a
Rred line: an object is present in the immediate qualified specialist workshop
close range of the vehicle Do not use the 360° camera under such cir-
cumstances. You can otherwise injure others or
i The camera in the rear area is protected cause damage to objects or the vehicle.
from raindrops and dust by means of a flap.
Guide lines are always shown at road level. In
Driving and parking
When the camera is activated, this flap opens.

trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the
The flap closes again in the following situa- level of the trailer coupling.
tions:
The field of vision and other functions of the
Ryou have finished the maneuvering process camera system may be restricted due to addi-
Ryou switch the engine off tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
Ryou open the cargo compartment license plate holder, bicycle rack).
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 334). On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
For technical reasons, the flap may remain depending on technical conditions, leaving the
open briefly after the camera has been deac- standard height can result in:
tivated. Rinaccuracies in the guide lines
Rinaccuracies in the display of generated
Important safety notes images (top view)
The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a Activation conditions
distorted view of obstacles, show them incor-
rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a The 360° camera image can be displayed in the
substitute for attentive driving. following situations:
You are always responsible for safe maneuver- Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera
ing and parking. Make sure that there are no
Rthe SmartKey is in key position 2 in the igni-
persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering
area while maneuvering and parking in parking tion lock
spaces. Rthe multimedia system is switched on
You are always responsible for safety and must

continue to pay attention to your immediate Switching on the 360° camera
surroundings when parking and maneuvering.
This applies to the areas behind, in front of and X Press the Ø button in the center console
beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endan- for longer than two seconds.
ger yourself and others. Depending on whether transmission position
h or k is selected, the following appears:
The 360° camera will not function or will func-
Ra split screen with top view and the image
tion in a limited manner in the following situa-
tions: from the front camera or
Ra split screen with top view and the image
Rthe doors are open
from the rear view camera
Rthe exterior mirrors are folded in
or
Rthe tailgate is open
X Press the Ø button in the center console.
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog The vehicle menu is displayed.
Rat night or in very dark places X Select 360° Camera and press 7 to confirm.
Rthe cameras are exposed to very bright light Depending on whether transmission position
Rthe area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED h or k is selected, the following appears:
lighting (the display may flicker) Ra split screen with top view and the image
Rthere is a sudden change in temperature, from the front camera or
such as when driving into a heated garage in Ra split screen with top view and the image
winter from the rear view camera
Driving systems 205
Activating the 360° camera using ! Objects not at ground level may appear to
reverse gear be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
The 360° camera images can be automatically
displayed by engaging reverse gear. Rthe drawbar of a trailer
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
in the ignition lock. Rthe rear section of an HGV
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear Ra slanted post
function is selected on the multimedia system Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Driving and parking

(see the Digital Operator's Manual). Approach objects no further than the bottom-
X To show the 360° camera image: engage most guideline.
reverse gear.
The multimedia system shows the area Top view with picture from the rear view
behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You camera
see the top view of the vehicle and the image
from the rear view camera.
Selecting the split-screens or 180° view

Selecting split-screen view
X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
slide 5 the controller.
X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn 3
the controller.
X To switch to 180° View: turn 3 the con-
troller to select 180° View and press 7 to : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
confirm. imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
i The 180° View option is only available in the ; Symbol for the split screen setting with top
following views: view and rear view camera image
RTop view with picture from the rear view
= Guide lines for the maximum steering input
camera
? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
RTop view with picture from the front camera
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
Displays in the multimedia system A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
Important safety notes steering wheel angle (dynamic)
The camera system may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
Obstacles are not shown by the system in the
following locations:
Runder the front and rear bumpers
Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
Rin the transitional areas between the various
cameras in the virtual top view
Z
206 Driving systems
A Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle
B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
Top view and enlarged rear view
Driving and parking
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)

C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
D Bumper
E Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmis- : Symbol for the split screen setting with top
sion is in position k. view and rear view camera image enlarged
The distance specifications only apply to ; Red guide line at a distance of approximately
objects that are at ground level. 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the distance
Top view with picture from the front cam- to the vehicle behind you.
era
i This setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.
Top view with image from the camera in
the exterior mirrors
: Symbol for the split screen setting with top

view and front camera image
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
: Symbol for setting the top view with image
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width from the forward camera in the exterior mir-
including the exterior mirrors, for current rors
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will including the exterior mirrors (right side of
take at the current steering wheel angle vehicle)
(dynamic)
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (left side of
vehicle)
Driving systems 207
i You can also select the camera setting in the Exiting 360° camera display mode
exterior mirrors for the rear-facing view.
The 360° camera display is stopped:
Top view with trailer view Rwhen you select transmission position j, or
Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds
The previous display appears in the multimedia
system. You can also switch the display by
selecting the & symbol in the display and
pressing the controller to confirm.
Driving and parking

ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
: Symbol for the trailer view setting monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
; Trailer drawbar marker assistant active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
= Ball coupling
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately ing lapses in concentration on the part of the
0.30 m from the ball coupling driver, it suggests taking a break.
The lines are shown at the level of the trailer
coupling. Important safety notes
i For technical reasons, the ball coupling of ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It
the trailer tow hitch is only partially visible in might not always recognize fatigue or increasing
the multimedia system display. inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them
at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-
180° view rested and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all:
Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-
imately 30 minutes
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface
is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
eration
Rif you are predominantly driving slower than
: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph
view camera image (200 km/h)
; Your vehicle Rif you are driving with the Steering Pilot of
= Warning displays for Parking Assist Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated
PARKTRONIC Rif the time has been set incorrectly
i 180° view can also be selected as front Rin active driving situations, such as when you
view. change lanes or change your speed
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
for example.
Z
208 Driving systems
The attention level evaluation is deleted and is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned
restarts when the journey is continued, if: earlier.
Ryou switch off the engine When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv- À symbol and OFF appear in the multifunc-
er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to tion display in the assistance display when the
take a break engine is running.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated,
it is automatically reactivated after the engine
Displaying the attention level has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-
Driving and parking
responds to the last selection activated (stand-

ard/sensitive).
Warning in the multifunction display

If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
are detected, a warning appears in the multi-
function display: Attention Assist: Take a
Break!
In addition to the message shown in the multi-
function display, you will then hear a warning
tone.
You can have current status information dis- X If necessary, take a break.
played in the assistance menu (Y page 241) of X Confirm the message by pressing the a
the on-board computer. button on the steering wheel.
X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
ASSIST using the on-board computer time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not take
(Y page 241). a break, you will be warned again after
The following information is displayed: 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen
if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indi-
Rthe length of the journey since the last break. cators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concen-
Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION tration.
ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is issued
from high to low. in the multifunction display, a service station
RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate search is performed in COMAND. You can select
the attention level and cannot output a warn- a service station and navigation to this service
ing, the System suspended message station will then begin. This function can be acti-
appears. The bar display then changes the vated and deactivated in COMAND.
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below
37 mph (60 km/h) or above 125 mph
(200 km/h). Traffic Sign Assist
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST General notes
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed
board computer (Y page 242). permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.
The system determines the attention level of The data stored in the navigation system and
the driver depending on the setting selected: general traffic regulations are used to determine
Standard selected: the sensitivity with which the current speed limit.
the system determines the attention level is set As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system,
to normal. traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near road-
works) are not detected.
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher.
The attention level detected by Attention Assist
Driving systems 209
If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is Speed limit with unknown restriction
passed, the display of the speed limits is upda-
ted.
Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an
additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also
shown.
The traffic signs are only displayed with the
restrictions if:
Driving and parking

RThe regulation must be observed with the
restriction, or
RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
whether the restriction applies
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
maximum permitted speed from any of the avail- : Maximum permitted speed
able sources, no speed limit is displayed in the ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for
instrument cluster either. which the restriction in the additional sign is
relevant
= Additional sign for unknown restriction
A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph
(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph
(60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply.
Lane Tracking package

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-
tries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the General notes
assistance graphic display (Y page 241).
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 209) and Lane Keeping
Important safety notes Assist (Y page 211).
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always
able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic Blind Spot Assist
signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign
Assist display. General notes
The system may be either functionally impaired Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
or temporarily unavailable if the information in side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
the digital street map of the navigation system is driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-
incorrect or out of date. sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors
draws your attention to vehicles detected in the
Instrument cluster display monitored area. If you then switch on the cor-
responding turn signal to change lane, you will
Displaying the assistance graphic also receive an optical and audible warning.
X Call up the assistance graphics display func- Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of
tion using the on-board computer approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
(Y page 241).
X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.
Detected traffic signs are displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Z
210 Driving systems
Important safety notes Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or

bicycles
G WARNING Rthe road has very wide lanes
Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rthe road has narrow lanes
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
placing them in the blind spot area Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
differential and overtake your vehicle indicated.
Driving and parking
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give

warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to

detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
system only. Removing, tampering with, or
altering the device will void any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam- At a distance of around 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; from the
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved vehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
way. to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and behind : your
vehicle, as shown in the picture.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
equipment. lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
Radar sensors ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte- case if there are vehicles driving at the inner
grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the edge of their lanes.
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The Due to the nature of the system:
sensors must not be covered, for example by Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
severe impact or in the event of damage to the borders.
bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. extended period next to long vehicles, such as
Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly. trucks.
Monitoring area Warning lamp
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
impaired if: approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else the monitoring range are then not indicated.
covering the sensors
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain, snow or spray
Driving systems 211
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical connection.
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer
lighting. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is deac-
tivated. The warning lamp lights up yellow in the
exterior mirrors and the Blind Spot Assist
Not Available When Towing a Trailer
See Operator's Manual message appears in
Driving and parking

i You can deactivate the warning lamps in the
: Warning lamp exterior mirrors.
To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when:
If Blind Spot Assist is activated, warning lamp :
in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-
of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above tion lock
20 mph (30 km/h), the warning lamp goes out Rthe engine is not running
and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot Lane Keeping Assist
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond- General notes
ing side lights up red. This warning is always
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist
is not operational.
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
roundings.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of : Lane Keeping Assist camera
Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre- Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
sponding turn signal, a double warning tone your vehicle with camera :, which is mounted
sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn at the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist
signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica- detects lane markings on the road and can warn
ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :. you before you leave your lane unintentionally.
There are no further warning tones. This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
in the on-board computer (Y page 242). intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- up to 1.5 seconds.
tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light Important safety notes
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
G WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
detect lane markings.
Z
212 Driving systems
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can: Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
Rgive
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
an unnecessary warning
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Rnot give a warning Standard or Adaptive (Y page 242).
There is a risk of an accident. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
Always pay particular attention to the traffic the lines in the assistance graphic are shown
situation and keep within the lane, especially in green (Y page 241). Lane Keeping Assist is
if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. ready for use.
Driving and parking
G WARNING Standard
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
a risk of an accident.
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
You should always steer, brake or accelerate period of time
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ing Assist. ABS, BAS or ESP®
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep- Adaptive
ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci- When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
dent nor override the laws of physics. Lane tion occurs if:
Keeping Assist cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-
ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible the warnings are suppressed for a certain
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi- period of time
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay- Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
ing in your lane. BAS or ESP®
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi- Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown
cle in the lane. Ryou brake hard
The system may be impaired or may not function Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
if: obstacle or change lanes quickly
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, To ensure that you are warned only when nec-
fog or heavy spray essary and in good time if you cross the lane
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the markings, the system detects certain conditions
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if and warns you accordingly.
the road surface is wet) The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- bend
ity of the camera Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings
Rthe system detects solid lane markings
for one lane, e.g. roadworks
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
The warning vibration occurs later if:
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe road has narrow lanes
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short Ryou cut the corner on a bend
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
ted
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
Driving systems 213
Driving Assistance Plus package ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
General notes approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
The Driving Assistance Plus package consists of could void the user's authority to operate the
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 176), Active equipment.
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 213) and Active Lane
Keeping Assist (Y page 215). i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
Driving and parking

Active Blind Spot Assist subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
General notes and
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on 2. This device must accept any interference
either side of the vehicle that are not directly received, including interference that may
visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing cause undesired operation of the device.
radar sensors. A warning lamp lights up in the Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
exterior mirrors and draws your attention to will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
then switch on the corresponding turn signal to approved way.
change lanes, you will also receive a visual and Any unauthorized modification to this device
audible collision warning. If a risk of lateral col- could void the user's authority to operate the
lision is detected, corrective braking may help equipment.
you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting
brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist eval- Radar sensors
uates the space in the direction of travel and at The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind integrated into the front and rear bumpers and
Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sen- behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure
sors. that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The sensors
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). must not be covered, for example by cycle racks
or overhanging loads. Following an accident or
Important safety notes in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not function of the radar sensors checked at a quali-
a substitute for attentive driving. fied specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot
Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Monitoring area
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, G WARNING
placing them in the blind spot area Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed traffic situations and road users. There is a
differential and overtake your vehicle risk of an accident.
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei- Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit- tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
i USA only: This device has been approved by

the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The
radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-
motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-
ing, or altering of the device will void any war-
Z
214 Driving systems
Warning lamp
Driving and parking
: Warning lamp
Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at
speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; indicated.
from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist mon- If Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, warning
itors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow
behind : your vehicle, as shown in the picture. at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be above 20 mph (30 km/h), the warning lamp
impaired if: goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is opera-
tional.
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range at speeds above approximately 20 mph
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not ing side lights up red. This warning lamp always
reliably indicated. lights up when a vehicle enters the blind spot
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow monitoring range from behind or from the side.
vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
may only detect them too late. occurs if the difference in speed is less than
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the 7 mph (12 km/h).
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- Assist is not operational.
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
your lane. roundings.
On very wide lanes, vehicles in the adjacent lane
may not be shown if they are too far away. Visual and acoustic collision warning
Due to the nature of the system: If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes
and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane warning. You then hear a double warning tone
borders. and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn sig-
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving nal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated
alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are
trucks, for a prolonged time. no further warning tones.
Driving systems 215
Course-correcting brake application Rthe LOW RANGE offroad gear is activated

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat- (vehicles with the Offroad Engineering pack-
eral collision in the monitoring range, a course- age).
correcting brake application is carried out. This Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. detected.
G WARNING Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an (Y page 242) is activated in the on-board
Driving and parking

accident. computer.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
you or makes a course-correcting brake appli-
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the then turn yellow.
sides.
Towing a trailer
If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mir-
correctly established the electrical connection.
ror and a double warning tone sounds. In addi-
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer
tion, a display underlining the danger of a side
lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deacti-
collision appears in the multifunction display.
vated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the
In very rare cases, the system may make an exterior mirrors and the Active Blind Spot
inappropriate brake application. A course-cor- Asst. Not Available When Towing a
recting brake application may be interrupted at Trailer See Operator's Manual message
any time by countersteering slightly or acceler- appears in the multifunction display.
ating.
The course-correcting brake application is avail- Active Lane Keeping Assist
able in the speed range between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). General notes
Either no braking application, or a course-cor-
recting brake application adapted to the driving
situation occurs if:
Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
RESP® is switched off. Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
Rthe offroad program is activated (vehicles
camera : at the top of the windshield. Various
without the Offroad Engineering package). different areas to the front, rear and side of your
Rthe Offroad or Offroad Plus drive program is vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the
activated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engi- radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping
neering package). Assist detects lane markings on the road and
can warn you before you leave your lane unin-
tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a
Z
216 Driving systems
lane-correcting application of the brakes can Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings
bring the vehicle back into the original lane. for one lane, e.g. roadworks
This function is available in a speed range Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
200 km/h). Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
when driving, the radar sensor system must be ted
operational. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
Driving and parking

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
the roadway
accident nor override the laws of physics. Active
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account Rno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and
road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane there are broken lane markings
Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsi-
ble for the distance to the vehicle in front, for
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
staying in your lane. over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
keep your vehicle in its lane. up to 1.5 seconds.
In order that you are warned only when neces-
G WARNING sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always ing, the system detects certain conditions and
clearly detect lane markings. warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
make a course-correcting brake application Rthe system detects solid lane markings
to the vehicle The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rnot give a warning or intervene
Rthe road has narrow lanes
There is a risk of an accident. Ryou cut the corner on a bend
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially Lane-correcting brake application
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter- G WARNING
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv- A lane-correcting brake application cannot
ing situation. always bring the vehicle back into the original
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if: Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
Rthere
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-
fog or heavy spray cation.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if G WARNING
the road surface is wet) Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- cases, the system may make an inappropriate
ity of the camera
brake application, e.g. after intentionally driv-
Driving systems 217
ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
an accident. high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
eration
An inappropriate brake application may be RESP® is switched off
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
Rthe transmission is not in position h
the opposite direction. Always make sure that
Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the elec-
there is sufficient distance on the side for trical connection to the trailer has been cor-
other traffic or obstacles. rectly established
Driving and parking

Rthe Off-road program is activated (vehicles
without the Off-Road Engineering package)
Rthe Off-road or Off-road Plus drive program is
activated (vehicles with the Off-Road Engi-
neering package)
Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated
(vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-
age)
Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in
which you are driving
Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
has been detected and displayed
If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan- There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keep-
ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. ing Assist could misjudge the given traffic sit-
This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle uation. An inappropriate brake application may
back to the original lane. be interrupted at any time if you:
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction
display : appears in the multifunction display. Rswitch on the turn signal
A lane-correcting brake application can be made Rclearly brake or accelerate
after driving over a solid or broken lane marking.
Before this, a warning must be given by means of A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In ted automatically if:
addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,
must have been detected. PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist
In the case of a broken lane marking being Rlane markings are no longer detected
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can only be made if a vehicle has been detected Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
have an influence on brake application: oncom- the on-board computer; to do so, select
ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi- Standard or Adaptive (Y page 242).
cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
i A further lane-correcting brake application (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
can only occur after your vehicle has returned the lines in the assistance graphic are shown
to the original lane. in green (Y page 241). Active Lane Keeping
Assist is ready for use.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel- occurs if:
erate. Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend the warnings are suppressed for a certain
Ryou have switched on the turn signal period of time
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist ABS, BAS or ESP®
Z
218 Driving systems
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra- workshop. You could otherwise damage the
tion occurs if: drive train or the brake system.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
the warnings are suppressed for a certain effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
period of time use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. if necessary.
ABS, BAS or ESP®
Further information about "Driving off-road"
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown
(Y page 170).
Driving and parking
Ryou brake hard

Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
obstacle or change lanes quickly
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend General notes
DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down-
Towing a trailer hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have selected on the on-board computer. The steeper
correctly established the electrical connection. the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR brak-
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer ing effect on the vehicle. When driving on flat
lighting. Lane-correcting brake application does stretches of road or on an uphill gradient, the
not take place when towing a trailer. Active Lane DSR braking effect is minimal or nonexistent.
Keeping Assist is not activated and the lines in DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it is acti-
the assistance graphic are gray. vated and the transmission is in position D, R or
N. You can drive at a higher or a lower speed
than that set on the on-board computer at any
Off-road driving systems time by accelerating or braking.
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) Important safety notes
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma- G WARNING
nently driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, it If the speed driven and the set speed deviate
improves the traction of your vehicle whenever and you activate DSR on a slippery road sur-
a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. face, the wheels may lose traction. There is an
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can increased danger of skidding and accidents.
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take Before switching DSR on, please take into
account of road, weather and traffic conditions. consideration the road surface and the differ-
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for ence between driving speed and the set
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed.
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
your lane. If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
This may damage the transfer case. Damage the laws of physics. DSR cannot take account of
of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes- road, weather and traffic conditions. DSR is only
Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must an aid. You are responsible for the distance to
remain either on the ground or be fully raised. the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brak-
Observe the instructions for towing the vehi- ing in good time and for staying in your lane.
cle with all wheels in full contact with the You are always responsible for keeping control
ground. of the vehicle and for assessing whether the
downhill gradient can be managed. DSR may not
! A function or performance test should only always be able to keep to the set speed, depend-
be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer. ing on road surface and tire conditions. Select a
Before you operate the vehicle on such a set speed suitable for the prevailing conditions
dynamometer, please consult a qualified and when necessary, apply the brakes manually.
Driving systems 219
Activating DSR Changing the set speed
Driving and parking

X Press button :. X To increase or reduce the set speed in
Indicator lamp ; lights up. 1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h
The Ã DSR symbol appears in the multi- increments): briefly press the cruise control
function display. lever up : for a higher set speed or down ;
for a lower set speed.
You can only activate DSR when driving at The set speed appears in the multifunction
speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h). display with the Ã DSR symbol.
If the current vehicle speed is too high, the Ã
DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display When DSR is activated, you can change the set
with the Max. speed 25 mph message (Can- speed to a value between 1 mph and 11 mph
ada: 40 km/h). (Canada: between 2 km/h and 18 km/h).
If you have activated DSR and you change the i The DSR set speed is always changed in
drive program, DSR is deactivated. If you switch 1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h incre-
between the offroad and offroad plus drive pro- ments). This is regardless of whether you
grams, DSR remains activated. press the cruise control lever to or beyond the
pressure point.
Deactivating DSR
X Press button :. Off-road program (vehicles without the
Indicator lamp ; goes out. Off-Road Engineering package)
The Ã DSR symbol appears in the multi-
function display with the Off message. General notes
On vehicles with the Offroad Engineering pack- Select the Offroad program for easily negotia-
age, if you select a different drive program, DSR ble off-road terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel or
is also deactivated. If you switch between the sandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restric-
Offroad programs, DSR remains activated. ted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can
DSR switches off automatically if you drive spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting
faster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). The effect for better traction. ABS, ESP® and 4ETS
Ã DSR symbol appears in the multifunction programs especially adapted to off-road driving
display with the Off message. The status indi- are activated. A gentle accelerator pedal curve
cator in the multifunction display goes out. You is also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal must
also hear a warning. On vehicles with the Off- be depressed much further in order to acceler-
road Engineering package, if you select a differ- ate.
ent onroad/offroad program, DSR is also deac- You can select the Offroad drive program at
tivated. speeds below 60 mph (96 km/h). The Drive
program "Offroad" Max. Speed 60 mph
message appears in the multifunction display. If
you drive at speeds of more than 60 mph
(96 km/h) and select the Offroad drive pro-
gram, the Drive More Slowly message
Z
220 Driving systems
appears in the multifunction display. The last Off-road programs (vehicles with Off-
active drive program is selected again. Road Engineering package)
Do not use the Offroad program on roads that
are snow-covered or icy or if you have installed General notes
your vehicle with snow chains. The Offroad and Offroad Plus drive programs
Selecting the Offroad program assist you when driving off-road. The engine's
performance characteristics and the gearshift-
ing characteristics of the automatic transmis-
sion are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP®
Driving and parking
and 4ETS programs especially adapted to off-

road driving are activated. An accelerator pedal
curve suitable for the terrain is selected, i.e. the
accelerator pedal must be depressed further to
accelerate.
Do not use the Offroad or Offroad Plus drive
programs on roads that are snow-covered or icy,
or if you have installed your vehicle with snow
chains.
Selecting the Offroad program Offroad drive program

X To select drive program: turn DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : until indicator lamp ;
lights up.
The Drive Program "Offroad1" Max.
Speed 60 mph message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
The vehicle is raised by +2.4 in (60 mm).
The vehicle is lowered to normal level again if
you:
Rdrive at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) (all
vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Rdrive at speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h) : DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ; Offroad program indicator lamp
Rdrive at speeds between 40 mph (64 km/h) Select the Offroad program for easily negotia-
and 43 mph (70 km/h) for approximately ble off-road terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel or
20 seconds (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) sandy surfaces. The engine's torque is restric-
The vehicle changes from the Offroad drive pro- ted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can
gram to the Comfort drive program if you drive spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting
faster than 70 mph (112 km/h). effect for better traction. ABS, ESP® and 4ETS
The Drive More Slowly message appears in programs especially adapted to off-road driving
the multifunction display. are activated. A gentle accelerator pedal curve
Further information about "Driving off-road" is also selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal must
(Y page 170). be depressed much further in order to acceler-
ate.
You can select the Offroad drive program at
speeds below 60 mph (96 km/h). The Drive
Program "Offroad" Max. Speed 60 mph
message appears in the multifunction display. If
you drive at speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h)
and select the Offroad drive program, the
Drive More Slowly message appears in the
Driving systems 221
multifunction display. The last active drive pro- RThe Offroad Plus program is selected and
gram is selected again. the vehicle is raised by +1.2 in (30 mm)
compared with the Offroad drive program.
Selecting the Offroad program RDSR is switched on.
X To select a drive program: turn DYNAMIC RThe differential lock is closed.
lights up. You can select the Offroad Plus drive program at
The Drive program "Offroad" Max. speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
speed 60 mph message appears in the mul- The Offroad Plus drive program automatically
Driving and parking

tifunction display. switches to the Offroad drive program if you
The vehicle is raised by +1.2 in (30 mm). drive faster than 30 mph (45 km/h). The Drive
more slowly message appears in the multi-
The vehicle changes from the Offroad drive pro- function display.
gram to the Comfort drive program if you drive
Further information about "Driving off-road"
faster than 70 mph (112 km/h).
(Y page 170).
The Drive more slowly message appears in
LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles
Offroad Plus drive program with the Off-Road Engineering package)
G WARNING
If you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear on
a slippery road surface, the wheels could lose
traction:
Rif you remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal when driving
Rif off road ABS intervenes when braking
If the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can no
: DYNAMIC SELECT controller longer be steered. There is an increased dan-
; Offroad Plus drive program indicator lamp ger of skidding and accidents.
Select the Offroad Plus drive program for rough Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gear
terrain, e.g. for steep and/or uneven terrain or when driving on slippery road surfaces.
for driving on rocky terrain.
Your vehicle has an automatically activated dif- G WARNING
ferential lock for the transfer case. It controls
the balance between the front and rear axles. If you do not wait for the transfer case gear
The differential lock improves the vehicle's trac- change process to complete, the transfer
tion. 4ETS (Y page 70) controls the balance case could remain in the neutral position. The
between both wheels on an axle. power transmission to the driven wheels is
then interrupted. There is a danger of the
Selecting the Offroad Plus drive program vehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is a
X To select drive program: turn DYNAMIC risk of an accident.
lights up. Wait until the transfer case shift process is
The Drive program "Offroad Plus" completed.
Max. speed 25 mph message appears in the
multifunction display. Do not turn off the engine while changing gear
and do not shift the automatic transmission to
another position.
Z
222 Driving systems
General notes From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE

! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH
RANGE if:
Rthe engine is running.
Rthe transmission is in position N
Ryou are driving at a speed below 40 km/h
X Press LOW RANGE button :.
Driving and parking
Indicator lamp ; flashes.

When the gear change is complete, indicator
lamp ; lights up. LOW RANGE indicator
appears in the multifunction display and in the
status indicator.
: LOW RANGE offroad gear button While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
; LOW RANGE offroad gear indicator lamp cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.
HIGH RANGE Position for all normal on-
road driving conditions i You cannot activate LOW RANGE if the
SPORT drive program is activated. The LOW
LOW RANGE Offroad position for driving
RANGE Not in Drive Program "Sport"
off-road and fording
message then appears in the multifunction
The transmission ratio display.
between the engine and
wheels is only approx- From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE
imately one third of that in
the HIGH RANGE road posi-
! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH
RANGE if:
tion. Drive torque is thus
proportionately higher. Rthe engine is running.
Do not use LOW RANGE: Rthe transmission is in position N
Ron slippery road surfaces, Ryou are driving at a speed below 70 km/h
e.g. in the case of slush
Ron snow or ice-covered
roads
Rif you have mounted snow
chains to your vehicle
The LOW RANGE offroad gear assists you in

driving off-road and when fording. When LOW
RANGE is engaged, the engine’s performance
characteristics and the gearshifting character-
istics of the automatic transmission are adapted
for this purpose.
Further information about "Driving off-road" X Press LOW RANGE button :.
(Y page 170). You will find information about Indicator lamp ; flashes.
driving safety systems in conjunction with When the gear change is complete, indicator
LOW RANGE in the "Safety" section (Y page 66). lamp ; goes out. In the multifunction dis-
play, the LOW RANGE Off message appears
and the status indicator goes out.
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.
Driving systems 223
Messages in the multifunction display

If a gear change process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed in the
multifunction display:
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
LOW RANGE Max. You have been driving faster than 24 mph (40 km/h). Additionally, the
Speed 24 mph indicator lamp on the button in the center console is flashing.
X Slow down to change gear.
Driving and parking

LOW RANGE Shift to The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below
Position N Briefly 40 km/h.
X Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change process.
LOW RANGE Shifting The gear change process was not carried out.
Canceled Please X Ensure that all gear change conditions are fulfilled and carry out the
Reactivate gear change process again.
LOW RANGE Stop A warning tone also sounds. The gear change process has not been
Apply Parking Brake completed. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no con-
nection between the engine and the drive wheels.
! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage the vehi-
cle's drive train.
X Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic conditions
when doing this.
X Depress the electric parking brake (Y page 162).
X Carry out the gear change process again.
If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGE
Stop Apply Parking Brake message disappears.
Driving dynamics display in the

COMAND display (vehicles with the Off-
Road Engineering package)
General notes
The driving dynamics display allows you to see
the selected drive program and additional infor-
mation about the vehicle's operating status in
the COMAND display.
: Drive program selected

; Status of the differential lock for the transfer
case
= Accelerator pedal position shown in %
? Brake pedal position shown in %
A Condition of the LOW RANGE offroad gear
B Angle of inclination
C Steering angle
D Uphill or downhill gradient in percentage
Z
224 Towing a trailer
E Level control corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may

F Compass with angle scale come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Activating the driving dynamics display Always install and secure the ball coupling as
described. Before every journey, ensure that
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and
the corresponding spring cotter.
G WARNING
Driving and parking
When the vehicle/trailer combination begins

to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-
cle/trailer combination could even rollover.
On no account should you attempt to
straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination
X Switch on COMAND (see the Digital Opera- by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle
tor's Manual). speed and do not countersteer. Apply the
X Press button :. brake as necessary.
The driving dynamics display appears in the
COMAND display. Please observe the manufacturer's operating
instructions for the trailer coupling if a detach-
able trailer coupling is used.
Towing a trailer Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you
do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle
Important safety notes correctly, the trailer could become detached.
Make sure that the following values are not
G WARNING exceeded:
Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch Rthe permissible trailer load
and the rear axle. This applies especially if the Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing
ball coupling in question is longer or angled vehicle
differently. This could seriously impair the Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle
driving characteristics and the trailer can weight of both the towing vehicle and the
come loose. There is a risk of an accident. trailer
You should only ever install a ball coupling The applicable permissible values, which must
not be exceeded, can be found:
that has the permissible dimensions and that
is designed to meet your trailer-towing Rin the vehicle documents
requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling Ron the identification plates for the trailer tow
or the trailer tow hitch. hitch and the trailer
Ron the vehicle identification plate
You will find the values approved by the manu- If the values differ, the lowest value applies.
facturer on the vehicle identification plates and When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
those for the towing vehicle under "Technical characteristics will be different in comparison
data" (Y page 395). with when driving without a trailer.
G WARNING The vehicle/trailer combination:
If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or Ris heavier
not secured with the bolt provided and the Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient-
climbing capability
Rhas an increased braking distance
Towing a trailer 225
Ris affected more by strong crosswinds On vehicles without level control, the height of
Rdemands more sensitive steering the ball coupling will alter according to the load
Rhas a larger turning circle placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer
with a height-adjustable drawbar.
This could impair the handling characteristics.
You will find installing dimensions and loads
When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed under "Technical data" (Y page 395).
to the current road and weather conditions. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible speed for
your vehicle/trailer combination. Driving tips
Driving and parking

Also observe the notes on pulling away with a
trailer (Y page 143).
Notes on towing a trailer The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
trailer combinations depends on the type of
General notes trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, trailer's documents to see what the maximum
changes to the cooling system and drive train permissible speed is for your trailer. Observe the
may be necessary, depending on the vehicle legally permissible maximum speed in the rele-
type. vant country.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maxi-
observe the anchorage points on the chassis mum permissible rear axle load is increased
frame. when towing a trailer. See "Technical data" to
find out whether this applies to your vehicle
RDo not exceed the legally prescribed maxi- (Y page 395). If you utilize any of the added
mum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer,
in the relevant country. the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed
This lowers the risk of an accident. a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for
ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on reasons concerning the operating permit. This
your vehicle. also applies in countries in which the maximum
permissible speed for car/trailer combinations
More information on availability and installa-
is greater than 60 mph (100 km/h).
tion can be obtained at any qualified special-
ist workshop. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suitable
characteristics will be different in comparison
with when driving without a trailer.
for installing detachable trailer couplings.
RDo not install hired trailer couplings or other
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
to shift into a lower gear in good time on long
detachable trailer couplings on the bumpers
and steep downhill gradients.
of your vehicle.
RIf you no longer need the ball coupling,
This also applies if you have activated cruise
control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
remove it from the ball coupling recess. This
will reduce the risk of damage to the ball cou- This will use the braking effect of the engine, so
pling. that less braking will be required to maintain the
speed. This relieves the load on the brake sys-
When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure on
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
the rear axle of the towing vehicle for the max-
and wearing too quickly. If you need additional
imum load. You will find the values in the tire
braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly
pressure table in the fuel filler flap of the vehicle
rather than continuously.
(Y page 372).
Please note that when towing a trailer, the fol-
lowing driving systems have limited availability Driving tips
or are not available at all: If the trailer swings from side to side:
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC (Y page 192) X Do not accelerate.
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 209) X Do not counter-steer.
RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 215) X Brake if necessary.
Z
RMaintain a greater distance from the vehicle

in front than when driving without a trailer.
RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gen-
tly at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then,
increase the braking force rapidly.
RThe values given for gradient-climbing capa-
bilities from a standstill refer to sea level.
When driving in mountainous areas, note that
the power output of the engine and, conse-
Driving and parking
quently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-

bility, decreases with increasing altitude.
X Pull protective cap : in the direction of the

Installing the ball coupling arrow, out of the ball coupling recess.
X Stow protective cap : so that it cannot be
G WARNING thrown around.
If the ball coupling is not correctly installed Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300)
and secured, it can come loose during the and the safety notes regarding stowage
journey and endanger other road users. There spaces (Y page 300).
is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as
G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or
not secured with the bolt provided and the
corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may
come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as
G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed and secured
correctly the trailer may come loose. There is
a risk of an accident.
Install and secure the ball coupling as descri-
bed in the ball coupling installation instruc- X Insert the ball coupling horizontally into ball
tions. Make sure that the ball coupling is coupling recess ; in the direction of the
installed and secured correctly before every arrow until the holes in ball coupling = are in
line with the holes in ball coupling recess ?.
journey.
Coupling up a trailer
! Do not connect the trailer's brake system (if
featured) to the hydraulic brake system of the
towing vehicle, as the latter is equipped with
an anti-lock brake system. Doing so will result
in a loss of function of the brake systems of
both the vehicle and the trailer.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
Driving and parking

X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.
X Start the engine.
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC package: select
X Slide bolt A into the hole in the ball coupling
recess and the ball coupling to the stop. normal level and the Comfort drive program.
X Close the doors and tailgate.
X Couple up the trailer.
X Establish the electrical connection between
the vehicle and the trailer.
X Check that the trailer lighting system is work-
ing.
X Push the combination switch upwards/down-
wards and check whether the corresponding
turn signal on the trailer flashes.
A trailer that is connected is recognized only
when the electrical connection is established
X Secure the bolt using spring cotter B. correctly and when the lighting system is work-
ing properly. The function of other systems also
depends on this, for example:
RESP®
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC
RParking Pilot
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: if you

couple up a trailer, the vehicle always remains
at normal level. When coupling up a trailer,
please observe the following:
X Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring cotter RIf the normal level has not been set man-
for correct installation. ually, the vehicle is automatically lowered
If the ball coupling cannot be correctly mounted, to normal level. This is the case if a speed of
remove the ball coupling. Under these circum- 5 mph (8 km/h) is reached.
stances, the ball coupling must not be used for RThe Sport drive program is not available.
trailer towing. These restrictions apply to all accessories
Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a powered through a connection to the trailer
qualified specialist workshop. power socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicycle
carrier.
Observe the maximum permissible trailer
dimensions (width and length).
Z
Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces using the brake controller and check whether
require by law: the brakes function correctly.
RSafety chains between the towing vehicle and RSecure any objects on the trailer to prevent
the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound the cargo from slipping when the vehicle is in
under the trailer drawbar. They must be fas- motion.
tened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to RWhen you couple up a trailer, check at regular
the bumper or the axle. intervals that the load is firmly secured. If the
Leave enough play in the chains to make tight trailer is equipped with trailer lights and
cornering possible. brakes, check the trailer to ensure that these
Driving and parking
RA separate brake system for certain types of are working.

trailer. RBear in mind that the handling will be less
RSafety switch for braked trailers. Check the stable when towing a trailer than when driving
specific legal requirements applicable to your without one. Avoid sudden steering move-
state. ments.
RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,
If the trailer becomes detached from the tow-
ing vehicle, the safety feature triggers the accelerates more slowly, has a decreased
trailer brakes. gradient climbing capability and a longer
braking distance.
It is more susceptible to side winds and
requires more careful steering.
Towing a trailer
RIf possible, do not brake suddenly, but instead
There are numerous legal requirements con- depress the brake pedal moderately at first so
cerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed restric- that the trailer can activate its brakes. Then
tions. Make sure that your car/trailer combina- increase the pressure on the brake pedal.
tion complies with the local regulations: RIf the automatic transmission repeatedly
Rin your place of residence shifts between gears on uphill or downhill gra-
Rin the location to which you are driving dients, shift to a lower gear using the left-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter.
The police and local authorities can provide reli-
able information. A lower gear and lower speed reduce the risk
of engine failure.
Observe the following when towing a trailer:
RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gear to
RTo gain driving experience and to become utilize the engine's braking effect.
accustomed to the new handling characteris- Avoid continuous brake application as this
tics, you should practice the following in a may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if instal-
traffic-free location: led, the trailer brakes.
- cornering
RIf the coolant temperature increases dramat-
- stopping ically while the air-conditioning system is
- backing up switched on, switch off the air-conditioning
RBefore driving, check: system.
- trailer tow hitch Coolant heat can also be dissipated by open-
- safety switch for braked trailers
ing the windows and switching the ventilation
blower and the interior temperature to the
- safety chains
highest level.
- electrical connections RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention to
- lights the extended length of your vehicle/trailer
- wheels combination.
RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer com-
unobstructed view of the rear section of the bination, you require additional road space in
trailer. relation to the vehicle you are overtaking
RIf the trailer has electronically controlled before you can change back to the original
brakes, pull away carefully. Brake manually lane.
Decoupling a trailer Permissible noseweight

You will find installing dimensions and loads
G WARNING under "Technical data" (Y page 395).
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun
brake engaged, you could trap your hand Loading a trailer
between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. RWhen loading the trailer, make sure that nei-
There is a risk of injury. ther the permissible gross weight of the trailer
Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake nor the gross vehicle weight are exceeded.
Driving and parking

is engaged. The permissible gross vehicle weight is indi-
cated on the identification plate located on
G WARNING the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
You can find the maximum permissible values
Vehicles with level control: on the type plates of your vehicle and the
The vehicle is lowered as soon as you discon- trailer. When calculating how much weight
nect the trailer cable. This could result in your the vehicle and trailer may carry, pay atten-
limbs or those of other people that are tion to the respective lowest values.
between the vehicle body and tires or under- RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling
neath the vehicle being trapped. There is a must be added to the rear axle load to avoid
exceeding the permissible gross axle weight.
risk of injury. The permissible gross vehicle weight is indi-
Make sure that nobody is in the immediate cated on the identification plate located on
vicinity of the wheel housings or under the the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
vehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable. i Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer load
where the trailer drawbar noseweight
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged accounts for 8 % to 15 % of the trailer's per-
overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could missible gross weight.
be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun
brake. i The weight of additional accessories, pas-
sengers, and cargo reduces the permissible
X Shift the transmission to position P.
trailer load and drawbar load for your vehicle.
X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.
X Start the engine. Checking the vehicle and trailer weight
X Close the doors and tailgate.
RTo check that the weights of the towing vehi-
X Apply the trailer's parking brake.
cle and the trailer comply with the maximum
X Detach the trailer cable and decouple the permissible values, have the vehicle/trailer
trailer. combination (including the driver, passen-
X Switch off the engine. gers, and cargo with a fully laden trailer)
weighed on a calibrated weighbridge.
RCheck the gross axle weight rating of the front
and rear axles, the gross weight of the trailer
Permissible trailer loads and drawbar and the trailer drawbar noseweight.
loads
Weight specifications
Removing the ball coupling
Maximum allowable gross mass X Remove the spring cotter.
The gross vehicle weight of the trailer is calcu- X Remove the bolt from the ball coupling
lated by adding the weight of the trailer to the recess.
weight of the load and equipment on the trailer. X Remove the ball coupling from the ball cou-
You will find installing dimensions and loads pling recess.
under "Technical data" (Y page 395).
Z
230 Bicycle rack
X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty. Depending on the bicycle rack's design, you can
X Stow the ball coupling so that it cannot be transport up to four bicycles on it:
thrown around. RWhen attached by clamping onto ball cou-
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300) pling :, the maximum payload is 75 kg. You
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces can transport up to three bicycles.
(Y page 300). RWhen attached to ball coupling : and also
Information on cleaning and care of the trailer guide pin ;, the maximum payload is 100 kg.
tow hitch (Y page 335). You can transport up to three bicycles.
Driving and parking
The payload is calculated from the weight of the

bicycle rack and the load of the bicycle rack.
Trailer power supply To transport bicycles with a gross weight
between 75 kg and 100 kg, use only bicycle
! Accessories with a maximum power con- racks with additional anchorage on guide pin ;.
sumption of 180 W can be connected to the
permanent power supply.
You must not charge a trailer battery using the Important safety notes
power supply.
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at G WARNING
the factory with a permanent power supply. The bicycle rack can detach from the vehicle if
The permanent power supply is supplied via you
trailer socket pin 4.
Rexceed the permissible payload of the
The trailer's permanent power supply is
switched off in the event of low vehicle supply trailer tow hitch
voltage and after six hours at the latest. Ruse the bicycle rack incorrectly
A qualified specialist workshop can provide Rattach the bicycle rack to the ball coupling
more information about installing the trailer beneath the ball head
electrics.
For your safety and that of other road users,
Bicycle rack observe the following:
RAlways observe the permissible payload of
General notes
the trailer tow hitch.
RUse the bicycle rack only to transport bicy-
cles.
RAlways attach the bicycle rack correctly by
clamping onto the ball head and, if possible,
to the guide pin on the ball coupling as well.
RTo transport four bicycles, always use bicy-
cle racks with additional support on the ball
coupling's guide pin.
RUse only bicycle racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Trailer tow hitch (example with additional RAlways comply with the bicycle rack's oper-
guide pin)
ating manual.
! Using unsuitable bicycle racks or using

them incorrectly can cause damage to and
fractures in the trailer tow hitch.
Bicycle rack 231
Use only bicycle racks approved by This could impair the handling characteristics.
Mercedes-Benz. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Maintain a
Bicycle racks cause your vehicle's driving char- safe distance and drive carefully.
acteristics to change. The vehicle: When using bicycle racks, set the tire pressure
on the rear axle of the vehicle for the maximum
Ris heavier
load. Further information on tire pressure can be
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient- found on the tire pressure table (Y page 357).
climbing capability
Rhas an increased braking distance
Driving and parking

Loading instructions
The greater the distance between the load's center of gravity and the ball head, the higher the load
exerted on the trailer tow hitch.
Therefore, observe the following notes:
RAttach heavy bicycles as close as possible to the vehicle.
RAlways distribute the load on the bicycle rack as symmetrically as possible to the vehicle longi-
tudinal axis.
Before loading the bicycle rack, Mercedes-Benz advises you to remove all add-on parts from the
bicycles, e.g. bicycle baskets, child seats or batteries. This will allow you to improve the aerody-
namic resistance and the bicycle rack's center of gravity.
Always secure bicycles against slipping and check that they are firmly seated at regular intervals.
Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. This could impair the driving characteristics and rear visibility.
The aerodynamic resistance would also rise, and so would the load exerted on the trailer tow hitch
as a result.
Load distribution on the bicycle rack

: Distance in height between the center of gravity and the ball coupling
; Distance to the rear between the center of gravity and the ball coupling
= The center of gravity is located on the central axis of the vehicle
Z
232 Bicycle rack
When loading the bicycle rack, comply with the following notes:
Number of bicycles Gross weight of bicy- Max. distance : Max. distance ;
cle rack and load
3 up to 75 kg 420 mm 300 mm
42 up to 100 kg2 420 mm 400 mm
Driving and parking
2 When transporting four bicycles or a gross weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, use only bicycle racks with
additional support on the guide pin of the trailer tow hitch.
Displays and operation 233
Important safety notes X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or

counter-clockwise.
If you turn the light switch to Ã, T or
G WARNING L, the brightness is dependent upon the
brightness of the ambient light.
On-board computer and displays

If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
cle when driving, you may be distracted from automatically controls the brightness of the
the traffic situation. You could also lose con- multifunction display.
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- In daylight, the displays in the instrument
dent. cluster are not illuminated.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention Speedometer with segments
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- The segments in the speedometer indicate
ment when the vehicle is stationary. which speed range is available.
RCruise control activated (Y page 174):
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when The segments light up from the stored speed
operating the on-board computer. to the maximum speed.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated
G WARNING (Y page 176):
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- One or two segments in the set speed range
functioned, you may not recognize function light up.
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
operating safety of your vehicle may be front moving more slowly than the stored
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. speed:
The segments between the speed of the vehi-
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked cle in front and the stored speed light up.
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
Tachometer
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
Contact a qualified specialist workshop. could damage the engine.
The on-board computer only shows messages or The red band in the tachometer indicates the
warnings from certain systems in the multifunc- engine's overrevving range.
tion display. You should therefore make sure
your vehicle is operating safely at all times. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-
tration (Y page 37).
Outside temperature display
Displays and operation You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
Instrument cluster lighting point.
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis- Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-
plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can play indicates the temperature measured and
be adjusted using the brightness control knob. does not record the road temperature.
The brightness control knob is located on the The outside temperature display is in the multi-
bottom left of the instrument cluster function display (Y page 235).
(Y page 37).
Z
234 Displays and operation
There is a short delay before a change in outside Operating the on-board computer
temperature appears in the multifunction dis-
play. Overview
Coolant temperature gauge

G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
! If the coolant temperature is too high, a dis-

play message is shown.
If the coolant temperature display is in the : Multifunction display
area marked in red, do not continue driving. ; Right control panel
Otherwise, the engine will be damaged. = Left control panel
The coolant temperature gauge is in the instru- X To activate the on-board computer: turn
ment cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 37). the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
Under normal operating conditions and with the lock.
specified coolant level, the coolant temperature You can control the multifunction display and
gauge may rise to the red marking. the settings in the on-board computer using the
buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia system:
you can find further information on the Voice
Control System in the separate operating
instructions.
Vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia system:
you can find further information on voice-oper-
ated control for navigation in the manufactur-
er's operating instructions.
Displays and operation 235
Left control panel Right control panel
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar ~ RRejectsor ends a call

; RExits
the telephone book/redial

memory
9 Press briefly:
: RScrolls in lists 6 RMakes or accepts a call
RSwitches to the redial memory
RSelects a submenu or function
RIn the Audio menu: selects the W RAdjusts the volume
previous or next station, when the X
preset list or station list is active,
or the previous or next audio track 8 RMute
or video scene ? RSwitches on voice-operated con-
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: trol for navigation or the Voice
switches to the phone book and Control System
selects a name or telephone num-
ber
9 Press and hold: Multifunction display
: RIn the Audio menu: selects a pre-
set list or a station list in the
desired frequency range or an
audio track or video scene using
rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open
a RConfirms the selection or display
message
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
starts dialing the selected number
% Press briefly:
RBack
RSwitches off voice-operated con-
trol for navigation or the Voice : Permanent display: outside temperature or
Control System speed (Y page 243)
RHides display messages or calls up ; Time
the last Trip menu function used = Text field
RExits the telephone book/redial ? Menu bar
memory A Drive program (Y page 149)
% Press and hold: B Transmission position (Y page 149)
RCalls up the standard display in the X To display menu bar ?: press the =
Trip menu or ; button on the steering wheel.
If you do not press any other button, menu
bar ? fades out after a few seconds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or sub-
menu as well as display messages.
Z
236 Menus and submenus
i Set the time using the multimedia system; Trip menu

see the Digital Operator's Manual.
Possible displays in the multifunction dis- Standard display
play:
RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shifting

manually (Y page 152)
Rj Parking Pilot (Y page 195)
RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 174)
R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 118)
Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 144) X Press and hold the % button on the steer-
Rë HOLD function (Y page 187) ing wheel until the Trip menu with trip odom-
Ra Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Steering Pilot eter : and odometer ; appears.
(Y page 241)
RDSR Downhill Speed Regulation Trip computer "From Start" or "From
(Y page 218) Reset"
Menus and submenus

Menu overview
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu.
Operating the on-board computer (Y page 234).
: Distance
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus: ; Driving time
= Average speed
RTrip menu (Y page 236)
? Average fuel consumption
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 237) X Press the = or ; button on the steering
RAudio menu (Y page 239) wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 240)
From start or From reset.
RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 241) The values in the From Start submenu are cal-
RServ. menu (Y page 242)
culated from the start of a journey, while the
values in the From Reset submenu are calcu-
RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 243)
lated from the last time the submenu was reset
RON&OFFROAD menu (Y page 245) (Y page 237).
RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) The From Start trip computer is automatically
(Y page 245) reset if:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
The From reset trip computer is automatically
reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or
99,999 miles.
Menus and submenus 237
ECO display X Press a to confirm your selection.

X Press : to select Yes and press a to
The ECO display is not available for Mercedes- confirm.
AMG vehicles.
You can reset the values of the following func-

X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu. tions:
X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO RTrip odometer
DISPLAY. R"From Start" trip computer
If the ignition remains switched off for longer R"From Reset" trip computer
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- RECO display
matically reset. If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
For more information on the ECO display, see values in the "From Start" trip computer are also
(Y page 165). reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"
trip computer, the values in the ECO display are
Displaying the range and current fuel also reset.
consumption
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
You can find further information on navigation in
the Digital Operator's Manual in the multimedia
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu displays system.
only the approximate range :. X Switch on the multimedia system (see the
X Press the = or ; button on the steering Digital Operator's Manual)
wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Navi menu.
Digital speedometer
Route guidance not active
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
A gear shift recommendation Z can also
appear.
Observe the information on gearshift recom-
mendation Z when shifting manually
(Y page 152). : Direction of travel
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recom- ; Current road
mendation is shown in the status bar of the
multifunction display and not in the digital
speedometer display.
Resetting values
wheel to select the Trip menu.
function that you wish to reset.
Z
Route guidance active = Lanes not recommended

? Recommended lane and new lane during a
No change of direction announced change of direction
A Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, lane recommendations can

be displayed for the next change of direction if
the digital map supports this data. During the
change of direction, new lanes may be added.
Lane not recommended =: you will not be able
to complete the next change of direction if you
: Distance to destination stay in this lane.
; Distance to the next change of direction Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction ?: in this lane you will be
= Current road
able to complete the next two changes of direc-
? "Follow the road's course" symbol tion without changing lane.
Change of direction announced without a
lane recommendation Other status indicators of the naviga-
tion system
: Road into which the change of direction

leads The navigation system displays additional infor-
; Distance to change of direction and visual mation and the vehicle status.
distance display Possible displays:
= Change-of-direction symbol
RNew Route... or Calculating Route...
When a change of direction is to be made, you A new route is calculated.
will see symbol = for the change of direction
RRoad Not Mapped
and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator
shortens towards the top of the display as you The vehicle position is inside the area of the
approach the point of the announced change of digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.
direction. The change of direction starts once newly built streets, car parks or private land.
the distance display reaches zero. RNo Route
No route could be calculated to the selected
Change of direction announced with a destination.
lane recommendation RO
You have reached the destination or an inter-
mediate destination.
: Road into which the change of direction

leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
Audio menu Audio data from various audio devices or media

can be played, depending on the equipment
Selecting a radio station installed in the vehicle.
X Switch on the multimedia system and select

CD or MP3 mode (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous track: briefly
press the 9 or : button.
X To select a track from the track list (rapid
: Active station list scrolling): press and hold the 9 or :
; Station frequency with memory position button until desired track : has been
The multifunction display shows station ; with reached.
station frequency or station name. The preset If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid
position is only displayed along with station ; if scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio
this has been stored. You can store TV chan- drives or data carriers support this function.
nels ; in the multimedia system.
If track information is stored on the audio device
X Switch on the multimedia system and select or medium, the multifunction display will show
radio (see the Digital Operator's Manual). the number and title of the track. The current
X Press the = or ; button on the steering track does not appear in audio AUX mode
wheel to select the Audio menu. (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source
connected).
X To select a preset list or station list: press
and briefly hold the 9 or : button until
the preset list or station list in the desired Video DVD operation
frequency range is shown in the multifunction
display.
X To select a station: briefly press 9
or :.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
For more information on radio operation, see
"Satellite radio" in the Digital Operator's Man- X Switch on the multimedia system and select
ual. video DVD (see the Digital Operator's Man-
ual).
Operating an audio player or audio X Press the = or ; button on the steering
media wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene : has
been reached.
Z
Telephone menu Rejecting or ending a call

Introduction You can end or reject a call even if you are not in
the Tel menu.
G WARNING X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
If you operate information systems and com- to reject or end a call.

munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from Selecting an entry from the phone book
the traffic situation. You could also lose con- X Press the = or ; button on the steering
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- wheel to select the Tel menu.
dent. X Press the 9, : or a button to
Only operate this equipment when the traffic switch to the phone book.
situation permits. If you are not sure that this X Authorize access to the phone book on the
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention phone.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- X Press the 9 or : button to select the
ment when the vehicle is stationary. desired name.
or
When telephoning, you must observe the legal X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold the
requirements for the country in which you are 9 or : button for longer than one sec-
currently driving. ond.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu- Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
facturer’s operating instructions). button or reach the end of the list.
X Switch on the multimedia system (see the X If only one telephone number is stored for
Digital Operator's Manual) a name: press the 6 or a button to
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the mul- start dialing.
timedia system (see the Digital Operator's or
Manual). X If there is more than one number for a
X Press the = or ; button on the steering particular name: press the 6 or a
wheel to select the Tel menu. button to display the numbers.
You will see one of the following display mes-
sages in the multifunction display: number you want to dial.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
RPhone READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a net- or
work and is ready to receive. X To exit the telephone book: press the ~
RPhone No Service: there is no network or % button.
available or the mobile phone is searching for
a network. Redialing
Accepts a call The on-board computer saves the last names or

numbers dialed in the redial memory.
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel X Press the = or ; button on the steering
menu, a display message appears in the multi- wheel to select the Tel menu.
function display. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
You can accept a call at any time regardless of memory.
the menu selected. X Press the 9 or : button to select the
X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel desired name or number.
to accept an incoming call.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. RTraffic

Sign Assist (Y page 208)
or RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 176)
X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ RActive Brake Assist (Y page 67)
or % button. RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-

tion (Y page 73)
RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 207)
Assistance menu RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 211) or Active
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 215)
Introduction RDSR (Y page 218)
Depending on the equipment installed in the ROff-road program (vehicles with Off-Road
vehicle, you have the following options in the Engineering package) (Y page 220)
DriveAssist menu: RRear window wiper (Y page 123)
RDisplaying the assistance graphic X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 241) assessment.
RActivating/deactivating the Traffic Sign
Assist display (Y page 241) Traffic Sign Assist
RActivating or deactivating Steering Pilot
(Y page 241) You can switch the Traffic Sign Assist message
RActivating or deactivating Active Brake Assist function on or off in the Traffic Sign Assist
(Y page 242) menu. When the function is activated, detected
traffic signs and information appear in the mul-
RActivating or deactivating Active Brake Assist
tifunction display for five seconds.
with cross-traffic function (Y page 242)
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 242) wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or
Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 242) Traffic Sign Assist.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 242) wheel.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate the message func-
Displaying the assistance graphic tion: press the a button again.
For further information about Traffic Sign Assist,
see (Y page 208).
Activating or deactivating Steering Pilot

wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Steering
X Press the = or ; button on the steering Pilot.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
X Press 9 or : to select Assistance wheel.
Graphic. The current selection appears.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
wheel. ton again.
The multifunction display shows the Distance When the Steering Pilot is activated, the mul-
Pilot DISTRONIC distance display in the assis- tifunction display displays a Steering Pilot
tance graphic display. On message.
The assistance graphic displays the status of
and information from the following driving Further information about Distance Pilot
systems or driving safety systems: DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot (Y page 182).
Z
Activating/deactivating Active Brake X Confirm by pressing a on the steering

Assist wheel.
You can use these functions to activate/deac- X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
tivate Active Brake Assist or, on vehicles with
ton again.
the Driving Assistance package, to activate or
deactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic For further information about Blind Spot Assist,
function. see (Y page 209).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering For further information about Active Blind Spot
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Assist, see (Y page 213).
Brake Assist. Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
X Press a to confirm. Assist
The current selection appears. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
ton again. X Press the 9 or : button to select
When Active Brake Assist or Active Brake Lane Keeping Assist.
Assist with cross-traffic function is deactiva-
X Press a to confirm.
ted, the æ symbol appears in the multi-
function display in the assistance graphic dis- The current selection appears.
play. X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
Further information on Active Brake Assist
(Y page 67) and Active Brake Assist with cross- Standard or Adaptive.
traffic function (Y page 72). When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane
Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction
display shows the lane markings as bright
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION lines in the assistance graphic.
ASSIST X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering For further information about Lane Keeping
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Assist, see (Y page 211).
X Press the 9 or : button to select For further information about Active Lane Keep-
Attention Assist. ing Assist, see (Y page 215).
X Press the a button.
X Press a to confirm. Service menu
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
Depending on the equipment installed in the
Standard or Sensitive. vehicle, you have the following options in the
X Press the a button to save the setting. Serv. menu:
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Rcalling up display messages in message mem-
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis- ory (Y page 248)
play in the assistance graphics display.
Rrestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-
For further information about ATTENTION tem (Y page 361) or checking the tire pres-
ASSIST, see (Y page 207). sure electronically (Y page 363)
Rcalling up the service due date (Y page 329).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
Blind Spot Assist.
Settings menu The speed display is inverse to the speedome-

ter.
Introduction X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.

Depending on the equipment installed in the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
vehicle, In the Sett. menu you have the follow- Instrument Cluster submenu.
ing options: X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
RChanging the instrument cluster settings wheel.
(Y page 243) X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RChanging the light settings (Y page 243) Permanent Display: function.
RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 244) The current setting, Outside Temperature,
RChanging the convenience settings Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer
(Y page 244) [mph] appears.
RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 245) X To change the setting: press a again.
Instrument cluster submenu Light submenu

Selecting the distance unit Setting the daytime running lamps
The Display Unit Speedometer / Odome‐ This function is not available in Canada.
ter: function allows you to choose whether X Press the = or ; button on the steering
certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light submenu.
X Press : or 9 to select the Daytime
Instrument Cluster submenu.
Running Lights function.
If the Daytime Running Lights function has
X Press the : or 9 button to select the been switched on, the cone of light and the
Display Unit Speedometer / Odometer W symbol in the multifunction display are
function. shown in orange.
You will see the selected setting: km or miles. X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime running lamps
The selected unit of measurement for distance (Y page 115).
applies to:
RDigital
Switching the Intelligent Light System
speedometer in the Trip menu
on/off
ROdometer and the trip odometer
RTrip computer
RCurrent consumption and the range
RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu
Light submenu.
RCruise control X Press a to confirm.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RASSYST PLUS service interval display Intell. Light System function.
If the Intell. Light System function has
Selecting permanent display been switched on, the cone of light and the
The Permanent Display: function allows you L symbol in the multifunction display are
to choose whether the multifunction display shown in orange.
always shows the outside temperature or the X Press the a button to save the setting.
speed.
When you activate Intell. Light System,
you activate the following functions:
Z
RHighway mode Convenience submenu

RActive light function
RCornering light function Activating/deactivating the EASY-
RExtended range fog lamps ENTRY/EXIT feature
ROff-road lights G WARNING

Further information on the Intelligent Light Sys- When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
tem (Y page 117). the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
Vehicle submenu become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Activating/deactivating the automatic While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
door locking mechanism ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
If you activate the Automatic Door Lock func-
tion, the vehicle is centrally locked above a wheel.
speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). If somebody becomes trapped:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering Rpress one of the memory function position
wheel to select the Sett. menu. buttons, or
Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-
Vehicle submenu.
ment in the opposite direction to that in
which the steering wheel is moving.
Automatic Door Lock function. The adjustment process is stopped.
When the Automatic Door Lock function is
activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in X Press the = or ; button on the steering
orange in the multifunction display. wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
For further information on the automatic locking
feature, see (Y page 84).
X Using : or 9, select the Easy Entry/
Activating/deactivating the acoustic Exit function.
locking verification signal If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated,
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in
acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi- orange in the multifunction display.
cle. X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT

wheel to select the Settings menu. feature (Y page 109).
Switching the seat belt adjustment on/off
Vehicle submenu.
wheel to select the Settings menu.
Acoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, Convenience submenu.
the & symbol in the multifunction display X Press a to confirm.
lights up orange. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting. Belt Adjustment function.
If the Belt Adjustment function is activated,
the vehicle seat belt is shown in orange in the
multifunction display.
For further information on belt adjustment, see X Press the : or 9 button to select No or
(Y page 48). Yes.
X Press a to confirm the selection.
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock- If you select Yes, the multifunction display
ing feature on/off

shows a confirmation message.
This function is only available when the vehicle is If you want to reset the Daytime Running
equipped with the electrical fold-in function. Lights function in the Light submenu, you
When you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding must turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when ignition lock.
the vehicle is locked. The exterior mirrors fold
out automatically again as soon as you unlock
the vehicle.
ON&OFFROAD menu
wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
X Press the : or 9 button to select the wheel to select the ON&OFFROAD menu.
Convenience submenu. You can view the current off-road program set-
X Press a to confirm. tings in the ON&OFFROAD menu:
X Press the : or 9 button to select the RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering pack-
Auto. Mirror Folding function. age (Y page 220)
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is RVehicles without the Offroad Engineering
switched on, the multifunction display shows package (Y page 219)
the exterior mirror in orange.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Warm-up
: Digital speedometer
If you have switched the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ ; Gear indicator
ing on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using = Upshift indicator
button :, they will not fold out automatically ? Engine oil temperature
(Y page 111). A Coolant temperature
You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors B Transmission oil temperature
using button :. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
Restoring the factory settings Upshift indicator: upshift indicator Up =
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving range when in the manual drive
program.
Engine/transmission oil temperature:
Factory Setting submenu.
when the engine and transmission are at nor-
X Press a to confirm. mal operating temperature, oil tempera-
The Reset All Settings? message ture ? and B are displayed in white in the
appears. multifunction display.
Z
If the multifunction display shows oil temper- You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is
ature ? or B in blue, the engine or the running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
transmission are not yet at normal operating ignition lock.
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out- X Press the = or ; button on the steering
put during this time.

X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
SETUP RACETIMER is shown.
X To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
: Engine mode (Comfort/Sport/Sport +)

; Suspension setting Comfort/Sport/
Sport +
= Transmission position D/M
? ESP® mode (ON/OFF) X Press the = or ; button to select
Interm. Time.
SETUP displays the following information/func-
tions:
The intermediate time is displayed for five
Rthe digital speedometer seconds.
Rthe gear indicator
Rthe engine mode Starting a new lap
Rthe suspension mode
Rthe transmission position
Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP
is displayed.
: RACETIMER
RACE TIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
Displaying and starting RACETIMER X Press a to confirm New Lap.
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen
public roads. laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with
Finish Lap.
Stopping the RACETIMER
: Lap
; RACETIMER
X Press the % button on the steering wheel. = Average speed

X Confirm Yes with a. ? Distance covered
The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the A Maximum speed
vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in This function is shown if you have stored at least

the ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey to one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
position 3 and then press a to confirm
Start timing is continued.
Resetting the current lap X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
X Stop the RACETIMER. overall evaluation is shown.
X Press the = or ; button to select
Reset Lap. Lap statistics
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
: Lap
; Lap time
= Average lap speed
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is ? Lap length
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are A Top speed during lap
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you This function is only available if you have stored
have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-
have to be reset. TIMER.
X Reset the current lap. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
X Press a to confirm Reset.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi- X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap
function display. evaluation is shown.
X Press the : button to select Yes and press
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The
the a button to confirm. fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.
All laps are deleted. X Press the 9 or : button to select a dif-
ferent lap evaluation.
Overall statistics
: RACETIMER overall evaluation

; Total time driven
Z
248 Display messages
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.

Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 187)
RParking (Y page 161)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are also deleted.
Display messages 249
Safety systems
!÷

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) are temporarily not available.
Currently Unavaila‐ Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
ble See Operator's tion.
Manual
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
Possible causes are:
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!÷ ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
Inoperative See tion.
Operator's Manual
The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
G WARNING
hard, for example.
Z
÷ ESP® is temporarily unavailable.

Currently Unavaila‐ tion.

ble See Operator's
Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
hard, for example.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
÷ ESP® is malfunctioning.
Operator's Manual
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
G WARNING
hard, for example.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc-
tioning.
÷

Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
hard, for example.
F (USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only) ! (Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition
only) was switched off.
Turn On the Igni‐ X SmartKey : insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn to
tion to Release the position 1.
Parking Brake X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.
F (USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the
only) ! (Canada electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 162).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release Park‐ X Release the electric parking brake manually.
ing Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 162).
F (USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only) ! (Canada To apply:
only) X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
Operator's Manual
X Shift the transmission to position j .
Z

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.

To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 162).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
To release:
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-
tinues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 375).
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds

after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 162).
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply
the electric parking brake manually.
F (USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
only) ! (Canada after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
only) goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
Parking Brake Inop‐
voltage or undervoltage.
erative
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:
Z

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.

$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition,
the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in
J (Canada only) the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

USA only: the $ red brake system warning lamp is lit while the
Check Brake Pad Wear engine is running.
G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.

Inoperative
Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is temporarily inopera-
Functions Currently tive.
Limited See Opera‐ Possible causes are:
tor's Manual
RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is
functional again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Restart the engine.

Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Adaptive
Functions Currently Brake Assist may also have failed.

Limited See Opera‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
tor's Manual
PRE-SAFE Inopera‐ Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
tive See Operator's safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is temporarily inoperative.
Functions Currently Possible causes are:
Limited See Opera‐
tor's Manual RFunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
disappears.
Active Brake Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is operative again.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP® on again (Y page 71).
Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is
Functions Limited not available due to a malfunction.
See Operator's Man‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
ual
Z

Radar Sensors Dirty The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:
ual
Rdirt on sensors
Rheavy rain or snow
Rwhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
RPRE-SAFE® PLUS
RActive Brake Assist
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC
If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will
not perform a course-correcting brake application.
A warning tone also sounds.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
drive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis-
appears.
X Clean all sensors (Y page 334).
The display message disappears.
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
SRS Malfunction Ser‐
vice Required G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 44).
6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right.
Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Service G WARNING
Required or Front The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Left Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning.


Rear Left Malfunc‐
Required or Rear The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Left Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 The rear center restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning

lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Center Malfunc‐
Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
6 The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.

Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction G WARNING
Service Required or The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-
Right Side Curtain tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Airbag Malfunction There is an increased risk of injury.
Service Required
Z

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey,
bag Disabled See even though:
Operator's Manual Ran adult

or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat get out of the vehi-
cle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds.
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has deactivated the front-
passenger front air bag (Y page 52)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown on the mul-
tifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-
pant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 52).

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag is enabled during the journey, even
bag Enabled See though:

Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on
the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag may deploy unintentionally.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-
pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds.
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 52)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown on the mul-
tifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-
pant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
Z

For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 52).
Lights
i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:
The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp
have failed.
b The bulb in question is malfunctioning.

Check Left Low Beam
(Example) or
X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
b The active light function is faulty.

Active Headlamps
Inoperative
b The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available with-
out the Intelligent Light System.
Intell. Light Sys‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tem Inoperative
b The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

Malfunction See
Operator's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X Check the fuses (Y page 352).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes.

b The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
b The light sensor is defective.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone
also sounds.

Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
b You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.

X Turn the light switch to the L or Ã position.
Switch On Headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Assist Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual
RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the Adap‐
tive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine
+ The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant Level ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
See Operator's Man‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
ual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 328).
If you have to add coolant frequently:
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling
system checked.
? The fan motor is malfunctioning.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
Z
? The coolant is too hot.

Coolant Too Hot

Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and
the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.
If the temperature increases again:

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
# The battery is not being charged.

ual
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

# The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is

too low.

Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds.
Operator's Manual
X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual
display message.
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil At
Next Refueling ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
erwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 327).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 327).
If the engine oil needs topping up more often:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
4 Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.
Check Engine Oil ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
Level (Add 1 quart) erwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 327).
If the engine oil needs topping up more often:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
4 Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

There is a risk of engine damage.
Engine Oil Level
Low Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine Off ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 327).
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
Z
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8 The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
Gas Cap Loose
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
8 Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below the
reserve range.
Ultra Low-sulfur X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Diesel Fuel Only
X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be
replaced.
Replace Air Filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water
must be drained off.
Check Fuel Filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Ø The DEF tank is almost empty.

X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist work-
Check Additive See shop (Y page 158).
Operator's Manual
The DEF system is malfunctioning.
Ø The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine a
further 16 times.
Remaining Starts: 16 X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop (Y page 158).
i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not added, it
will then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEF tank
with approximately 2 gal (7.5 l) of DEF (Y page 158).
If the 'ten starts' message appears in the display and a warning tone
sounds, the DEF system is malfunctioning.
Driving systems

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or
a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also
Attention Assist: sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
Inoperative
Á You cannot change the vehicle level.

Drive More Slowly
RYou are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level
RYou are driving too fast with a trailer or the trailer-coupling socket is
being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack
X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again.
RVehicles with the Off-Road Engineering package (Y page 184)
RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package (Y page 190)
X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 225).
Á You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needs
to cool down because of frequent level changes.
Compressor Is Cool‐ X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.
ing
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Allow the compressor to cool down.
When the compressor has cooled down, the display message dis-
appears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected level.
Á AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.
X Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not exceed
Malfunction 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
Z
Á You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-road
level.
Max. Speed 12 mph In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display mes-
sage, and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle could tip and rollover.
X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
X Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steering move-
ments.
X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached off-
road level 2.
Á The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3.

In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display mes-
Raising Max. Speed sage.
12 mph The display message refers to the maximum speed permissible
(depending on the model type) for off-road level 3.
X Do not drive at speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h).
g The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road level 2.

In addition, the vehicle level display appears above the display mes-
Lowering Max. sage.
Speed 12 mph The display message refers to the maximum speed permissible
(depending on the model type) for off-road level 3.
X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached off-
road level 2.
ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM is faulty. The vehicle's handling charac-
Malfunction teristics may be affected.
ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM The ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM is faulty. The vehicle's handling charac-
Malfunction see teristics are severely impaired. A warning tone also sounds.
Operator's Manual
G WARNING
X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
X Avoid sudden acceleration around tight corners and fast steering
movements.
8 The differential lock is faulty.


Different. Lock
Sys. Malfunction
8 The differential lock is too hot and has been disengaged.

Different. Locking
X Allow the differential lock to cool down.
Sys. Cooling Down
Please Wait The differential lock re-engages as soon as it has cooled down.
LOW RANGE Stop A gearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in the neutral
Apply Parking Brake position. There is no connection between the engine and the drive
wheels.
X Apply the electric parking brake. Do not continue driving under any
circumstances.
X Repeat the gearshift process.
LOW RANGE Malfunc‐ LOW RANGE is malfunctioning.

tion To Park, Apply X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
Brake
X When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
LOW RANGE Max. You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.
Speed 25 mph X Drive more slowly.
The gear change is made.
LOW RANGE Max. You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.
Speed 40 mph X Drive more slowly.
The gear change is made.
LOW RANGE Shift to You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic transmission
Position N Briefly is not in position i.
X Briefly shift the automatic transmission to i.
LOW RANGE Shifting The gearshift process has been canceled.

Canceled Please X Repeat the gearshift process.
Reactivate
Ã DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunction.

X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Inoperative
Z

Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:
ble See Operator's

Manual
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display
message disappears.
Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.
Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 187).
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and
Currently Unavaila‐ temporarily inoperative.
ble See Operator's Possible causes are:
Manual or Active
Lane Keeping Assist
Currently Unavaila‐ RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
ble See Operator's RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period.
Manual RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow.
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
Inoperative or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping
Assist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:

ble See Operator's
RThe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
Manual or Active
Blind Spot Assist range.
Currently Unavaila‐ RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
ble See Operator's electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
Manual other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while tow-
Not Available When ing a trailer.
Towing a Trailer You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and
See Operator's Man‐ your vehicle.
ual or Active Blind
X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.
Spot Assist Not
Available When Tow‐
ing a Trailer See
Operator's Manual
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
Inoperative or The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
Active Blind Spot
Assist Inoperative
Parking Pilot Can‐ The driver's door is open.

celed X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while

steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-
tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Parking Pilot again later (Y page 195).
Z

Parking Pilot Inop‐ Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.
erative X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 195).

Parking Pilot is unavailable or malfunctioning.

X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.
If the Parking Pilot continues to be unavailable (the j symbol does

not appear in the multifunction display):
Parking Pilot Fin‐ The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
ished The display message disappears automatically.
Distance Pilot Off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
If a warning tone also sounds, Distance Pilot has deactivated auto-
matically (Y page 176).
Distance Pilot Now Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been tem-
Available porarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 176).
Distance Pilot Cur‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.
rently Unavailable Steering Pilot is also temporarily inoperative.
ual
disappears.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again.

Distance Pilot Inop‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
erative The following may have also failed:

RActive Brake Assist
RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
Distance Pilot Pas‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
sive is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
Distance Pilot A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met.
- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
(Y page 176).
Steering Pilot Cur‐ Steering Pilot is temporarily inoperative.

rently Unavailable Possible causes are:
See Operator's Man‐
ual
RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period.
RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow.
disappears.
Steering Pilot is operational again.
Steering Pilot Inop‐ Steering Pilot is malfunctioning.

erative However, the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC functions are still available.
Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning.

erative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

Cruise Control RA condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
--- mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for exam-
ple.
RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store
the speed.
or
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 174).
or
X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 71).
Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated.

If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-
matically (Y page 174).
Tires

Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
Soon in pressure.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed
new wheels and tires.
Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly
G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 339).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (Y page 361).
Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
Then Restart Run and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 361).
Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Please Correct Tire The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 361).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 364).
Z

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The
wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.

G WARNING
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
tire (Y page 339).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 361).
Warning Tire Mal‐ The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
function position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
tire (Y page 339).
Tire Press. Monitor Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no
Currently Unavaila‐ signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure
ble monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.
Tire Press. Sen‐ There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
sor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the mul-
tifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-
ist workshop.

Tire Pressure Moni‐ The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The
tor Inoperative No tire pressure monitor is deactivated.

Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for
a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

Vehicle
Shift to 'P' or 'N' You attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position k
to Start Engine or h.
X Shift the transmission to position j or i.
Apply Brake to You attempted to shift the transmission to position h, k or i

Shift from 'P' without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or N, You attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or i into

Depress Brake and another transmission position with the engine switched off.
Start Engine X Depress the brake pedal.
X Start the engine.
Apply Brake to You have attempted to shift from position h to position k without
Select R applying the brakes.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Shift the transmission to position k .
Transmission Not in The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
P Risk of Vehicle position k, i or h.
Rolling Away A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
X Close the driver's door completely.
Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving.

when Vehicle is Sta‐ X Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
tionary and traffic conditions.
Z

Service Required Do You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer
If transmission position h is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position h .
If position k, i or j is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Possi‐ You can no longer shift to transmission position k due to a malfunc-
ble Service Required tion.
Transmission positions j, i or h continue to be available.
Transmission Mal‐ A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-

function Stop nents.
A warning tone also sounds. The transmission shifts automatically to
position i.
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being
Malfunction charged.
X Until then, always set the automatic transmission to position j
before switching off the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
A The tailgate is open

G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte-
rior if the tailgate is open.
X Close the tailgate.
? The hood is open.

G WARNING

The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open.

X Close all the doors.
_ The second row of seats is not engaged on the left-hand or right-hand

side.
2nd Seat Row, Left X Fold back the second row of seats until it engages.
Not Locked or 2nd
Seat Row, Right Not
Locked
_ The third row of seats is not engaged on the left-hand or right-hand

side.
3rd Seat Row, Left X Fold back the third row of seats until it engages.
Not Locked or 3rd
Seat Row, Left Not
Locked
Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐ G WARNING
tor's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:

If you are unable to steer safely:
X Do not drive on.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver

range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in the multifunction display.
Z
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 329).
Wiper Malfunction‐ The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.

ing X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty.

Flashers Malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tioning
SmartKey
Â You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle
Â The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

Take Your Key from
X Remove the SmartKey.
Ignition
Â The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key
Â The SmartKey battery is discharged.

X Change the battery (Y page 80).
Replace Key Battery
Â The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's
door with the engine switched off.
Don't Forget Your A warning tone also sounds.
Key This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is
simply a reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Â The SmartKey is currently undetected.

X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
Key Not Detected
(white display message) If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 279
Â The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.


Key Not Detected If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
(red display message) trally or start the engine.
X Locate the SmartKey.
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the

SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey
mode.
Â RThe SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is

faulty.
Remove 'Start' But‐ RThe SmartKey is continually undetected.
ton and Insert Key A warning tone also sounds.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator
and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator
and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or
whilst driving.
Z
280 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Safety
Seat belts
Warning/ N Signal type

indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
The warning tone ceases.
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Safety systems

lamp
J$ N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running.
G WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
J$ N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running.
G WARNING
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol.
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
Z

lamp
! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument
cluster.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

lamp

ABS is temporarily unavailable.
cluster.
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient
G WARNING
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
Z

lamp
EBD is not available due to a malfunction.
cluster.
G WARNING
ple.
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow
÷å ESP®, ESP® OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
! ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
G WARNING
ple.

lamp

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at
least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 71), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 70).
å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
G WARNING
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active
Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applica-
tions.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 71), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 70).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.
Z

lamp
÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function,
ESP® trailer stabilization, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, the HOLD function, hill
start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
Active Blind Spot Assist are not available due to a malfunction.
G WARNING
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function,
ESP® trailer stabilization, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, the HOLD function, hill
start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
Active Blind Spot Assist are not available due to a malfunction.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete
G WARNING
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:

lamp

F! N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake is lit.
6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 44).
Z
Engine
lamp
; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency
mode.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 158).
X Start the engine three to four times after refueling.
If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is
canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.
In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon
as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-
ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

lamp

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 328).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡
(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine
radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 328).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
Z

lamp
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified
specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
lamp
· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of
travel at too high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 176).
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist
(Y page 67).
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function (Y page 72).
Tires

lamp
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.
G WARNING
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-
tion.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 339).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 361).
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)

flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
Z
292 Function restrictions
General notes Navigation announcements are intended to

direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
tor's Manual describes the basic principles for Please always use this feature instead of con-
operation. More information can be found in the sulting the map display for directions. Looking
Digital Operator's Manual. at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
Important safety notes This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
G WARNING Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
If you operate information systems and com- This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- that is deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-
Multimedia system
cle when driving, you may be distracted from

ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance
the traffic situation. You could also lose con- of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- radiation source and a person's body (not
dent. including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
Only operate this equipment when the traffic legs).
situation permits. If you are not sure that this G WARNING
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention Modifications to electronic components, their
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- software as well as wiring can impair their
ment when the vehicle is stationary. function and/or the function of other net-
You must observe the legal requirements for the worked components. In particular, systems
country in which you are currently driving when relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
operating the multimedia system. result, these may no longer function as inten-
The multimedia system calculates the route to ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the destination without taking the following into the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
account, for example: accident and injury.
Rtraffic lights Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
Rstop and yield signs tronic components or their software. You
Rparking or stopping restrictions should have all work to electrical and elec-
Rroad narrowing tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations specialist workshop.
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-
igation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the Function restrictions
digital map's data.
For example: For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
Ra diverted route ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way You will notice this, for example, because either
street has been changed you will not be able to select certain menu items
For this reason, you must always observe road or a message will appear to this effect.
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Operating system 293
Operating system the media source or set the volume, the sound
is automatically switched on.
Overview i Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
General notes
! Do not use the space in front of the display Functions
for storage. Objects placed here could dam- The multimedia system has the following func-
age the display or impair its function. Avoid tions:
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in RRadio mode
impairments to the display, which could be RMedia mode with media search
irreversible. RSound systems
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your RNavigation system
ability to read the display. COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Multimedia system
The display has an automatic temperature-con- Audio 20: navigation via SD card
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is RCommunication functions
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
completely. RVehicle functions with system settings
RFavorites functions
Cleaning instructions
Controller
! Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a The controller in the center console lets you:
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the Rselect menu items on the display
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
Renter characters
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
Rselect a destination on the map
The display must be switched off and have
Rsave entries
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when The controller can be:
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam- Rturned 3
age to the display.
Rslid left or right 1
Rslid forwards or back 4
Switching the multimedia system
Rslid diagonally 2
on/off
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7
X Press the q control knob.
Back button
Adjusting the volume
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
X Turn the q control knob. call up the main menu of the current operating
The volume is adjusted: mode.
X To exit the menu: briefly press the %
Rfor the currently selected media source
button.
Rduring traffic or navigation announcements
The multimedia system changes to the next
Rin hands-free mode during an active call higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
Switching the sound on or off X To call up the main menu: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
X Press the 8 button on the control panel. The multimedia system changes to the main
If the audio output is switched off, the status menu of the current operating mode.
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
Z
294 Operating system
Favorites button Navigation mode

You can assign predefined functions using the Important safety notes
g favorites button and call them up by press-
ing the button (Y page 294). G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
Favorites munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
Calling up and exiting favorites the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
X To call up: press the g button on the con-
troller. dent.
X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic
The favorites are displayed. situation permits. If you are not sure that this
Multimedia system
X To exit: press the g button again. is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
Adding favorites
You must observe the legal requirements for the
Adding predefined favorites country in which you are currently driving when
X Press the g button. operating the navigation system.
X COMAND: slide 6 the controller.
X Audio 20: slide 5 or 6 the controller. General notes
The menu bar is displayed.
Among other things, correct functioning of the
X Select Reassign.
navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
The categories are displayed. certain situations, GPS reception may be
X Select a category. impaired, there may be interference or there
The favorites are displayed. may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
X Select a favorite. parking garages.
X COMAND: to add the favorite to the desired Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT
position, turn and press the controller. (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
If a favorite has already been added at this The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions
position, it will be overwritten. are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD
X Audio 20: to add the favorite to the desired card box contains a quick guide.
position, turn, slide 5 or 6 and press the The following descriptions apply to navigation
controller. with COMAND. Further information can be
If a favorite has already been added at this found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
position, it will be overwritten.
Selecting a route type and route options
Adding your own favorites
You can add climate control as a favorite, for Multimedia system:
example. X Select NaviQNavigation.
X Select VehicleQVehicle Settings. The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X Press and hold the g button until the X Slide 6 the controller.
favorites are displayed. X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.
X Add a favorite to the desired position. Notes for route types:
If a favorite has already been added at this
REco Route
position, it will be overwritten.
RDynamic Traffic Route
Traffic reports on the route for the route guid- X Select the location.
ance are taken into account (not available in If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
all countries). different ZIP codes available for the location,
RDynamic TRF. Route After Request the corresponding digits are displayed with an
You can decide whether or not current traffic X.
reports should be included in the route cal- X Enter the street and house number.
culation (not available in all countries). The address is in the menu.
RCalculate Alternative Routes Further options for destination entry:
Different routes are being calculated. In order Rsearch for a keyword
to do so, instead of Start, select the menu The keyword search finds destinations using
item Continue. fragments of words.
X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
Rselect the last destination
Options.
Rselect a contact
X Select a route option.
Rselect a POI
Multimedia system
Notes for route options:
You can search for a POI by location, name or
RUse Toll Roads telephone number.
The route calculation includes roads which Rselect destination on the map
require you to pay a usage fee (toll). Renter intermediate destination
RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:
You can map the route to the destination
(only available in the USA) yourself with up to four intermediate destina-
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access tions.
conditions for carpool lanes. Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool Apps
lanes option is activated. Rselect geo-coordinates
Entering an address Calculating the route

Multimedia system: Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
X Select NaviQNavigation. is in the menu.
The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Select Start or Continue.
X Slide 6 the controller. The route is calculated with the selected route
X Select DestinationQAddress Entry. type and the selected route options.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows: If route guidance has already been activated,
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number
to end the current route guidance.
Rstate/province, city or ZIP code X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or
Rcity or ZIP code, center Set as Intermediate Destination.
Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels
X Select City. the current route guidance and starts route
The city in which the vehicle is currently loca- calculation to the new destination.
ted (current vehicle position) is at the top. Set as Intermediate Destination adds
Below this, you will see locations for which the new destination in addition to the existing
route guidance has already been carried out. destination and opens the intermediate des-
X Enter the city. tinations list.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X To switch to the list: slide 5 the control-
ler.
Z
Connecting a mobile phone procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
(COMAND) available. The mobile phone is always connec-
ted automatically after authorization. Further
Requirements information on using a mobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you Manual).
require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile mobile phone, this may be due to particular
1.0 or above. security settings on your mobile phone (see the
Multimedia system: manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐ multimedia system at any one time.
tingsQActivate Bluetooth.
Searching for a mobile phone
X Activate Bluetooth® O.
Multimedia system:
Mobile phone:
Multimedia system
X Select Tel/®QConn.
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue- DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart
tooth® visibility for other devices (see the Search.
manufacturer's operating instructions). The available mobile phones are displayed.
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man- Symbols in the device list
ufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile Sym- Explanation
phone, change the device name (see the man- bol
ufacturer's operating instructions). Ï New mobile phone found, not yet
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone authorized.
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow- Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is
ing information will be transmitted after you not connected.
connect:
RPhone book Connecting a mobile phone
RCall lists Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
RText messages and e-mail X Select mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
i Further information on suitable mobile and on the mobile phone.
phones can be found at: http://
X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
system.
i In the USA, you can get in touch with the X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). connection to the multimedia system and for
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-
Searching for and authorizing (connect- er's operating instructions).
ing) a mobile phone X If the codes are different: select No on the
multimedia system.
Before using your mobile phone with the multi- The process is canceled.
media system for the first time, you will need to Repeat authorization.
search for the phone and then authorize (con-
nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-
ization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the
Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode): If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
X Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
phone. Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-
The input menu for the passkey is displayed. ing information is transmitted after you connect
X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-
the main telephone:
nation as a passkey. RPhone book
X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. RCall lists
X Press ¬ to confirm. RText messages and e-mail
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
i Further information on suitable mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, phones can be found at: http://
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys- www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up i In the USA, you can get in touch with the
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Multimedia system
ufacturer's operating instructions). on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Connecting a mobile phone (Audio 20)
Searching for and authorizing (connect-
Requirements ing) a mobile phone
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
require at least one Bluetooth®-capable mobile media system for the first time, you will need to
phone depending on use of one-telephone search for the phone and then authorize (con-
mode or two-telephone mode. The mobile nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-
phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or ization either takes place by means of Secure
above. Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
In two-telephone mode you can use all the multimedia system automatically makes the
functions of the multimedia system with the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
main telephone. With the additional tele- available. The mobile phone is always connec-
phone, you can receive incoming calls. ted automatically after authorization. Further
information on using a mobile phone with the
Multimedia system: multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐ Manual).
tingsQActivate Bluetooth. If the multimedia system does not detect your
X Activate Bluetooth® O. mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see the
Mobile phone: manufacturer's operating instructions).
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue- Searching for a mobile phone
tooth® visibility for other devices (see the Multimedia system:
manufacturer's operating instructions). X Select Tel/®QConn. DeviceQCon‐
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man- nect New Device.
ufacturer's products might be identical. To X Select Connect via Vehicle.
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile X Select mobile phone.
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions). Connecting a mobile phone
X One-telephone mode: select Connect as
New Main Phone.
X Two-telephone mode: select Connect as
Additional Phone when a mobile phone is
already connected.
Z
X Authorization using Secure Simple Pair- The following external media sources can be
ing: used:
A code is displayed in the multimedia system RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)
and on the mobile phone. RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend- (Y page 299)
ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the RCD
connection to the multimedia system and for
RDVD (COMAND)
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two RSD cards
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur- Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth®
er's operating instructions).
X If the codes are different: select No on the
i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD
multimedia system. changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization. Selecting using the device list
Multimedia system
or Multimedia system:
X Authorization by entering a passkey
X Select MediaQDevices.
(passcode): enter any one- to sixteen-digit The available media sources will be shown.
number sequence which you have chosen The # dot indicates the current setting.
yourself into the passkey input menu.
X Select the media source.
X Press ¬ to confirm.
Playable files are played.
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys- Inserting/removing an SD card
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up Important safety notes
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man- G WARNING
ufacturer's operating instructions).
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
Symbols in the device manager increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
The symbols are shown in color depending on Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
their use. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
Symbol Explanation tion immediately.
Mobile phone connected to the ! If you are no longer using the SD card, you
multimedia system should remove it and store it outside the vehi-
cle. High temperatures can damage the card.
Main telephone with full range of
functions Inserting an SD card
Additional telephone for incoming The SD card slot is located on the control panel.
calls in two telephone mode X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
the SD card engages. The side with the con-
tacts must face down.
Media mode Removing an SD card
General notes X Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
If you wish to play external media sources, the X Remove the SD card.
appropriate media mode must already be turned
on. Further information on media mode (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
Connecting USB devices
X Connect the USB device to the USB port.
Multimedia system
There are two USB ports in the stowage space
under the armrest.
X Select the media source (Y page 298).
CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks (Rear Seat

Entertainment System)
: Disc slot
; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal
(red)
= AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal
(white)
? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)
A Disc eject button
The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.
Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand
side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX dis-
play).
Z
300 Stowage areas
Stowage areas are on the vehicle identification plate on the B-

pillar of the driver's door (Y page 364).
Loading guidelines Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(Y page 364).
G WARNING The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or are dependent on the distribution of the load
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip within the vehicle. For this reason, you should
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle observe the following notes when transporting a
load:
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- RNever exceed the maximum permissible
den change in direction. gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight
rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
Always store objects so that they cannot be RThe cargo compartment is the preferred place
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or to carry objects.
loads against slipping or tipping before the RPosition heavy loads as far forward as possi-
journey. ble and as low down in the cargo compart-
Stowage and features
ment as possible.
G WARNING RThe load must not protrude above the upper
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust edge of the seat backrests.
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate RAlways place the load against the rear or front
is open when the engine is running, particu- seat backrests. Make sure that the seat
backrests are securely locked into place.
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
Turn off the engine before opening the tail- nets to transport loads and luggage.
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-
rials appropriate for the weight and size of the
G WARNING load.
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
become very hot. If you come into contact wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for
protection.
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the Stowage spaces
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch- Important safety notes
ing them.
G WARNING
The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicle If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
weight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, spare and these are not adequately secured, they
wheel, installed accessories, vehicle occupants could slip or be flung around and thereby
and luggage/cargo.
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
Do not exceed the load limit or permitted gross holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle.
The gross load limit and the GVWR are specified phone brackets may not always be able to
on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar hold the objects placed in them in the event of
of the driver's door (Y page 364). an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
The load must also be distributed so that the larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
weight on each axle never exceeds the gross changes of direction.
axle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles. The specifications for GVWR and GAWR
Stowage areas 301
RAlways stow objects in such a way that they

cannot be tossed about in these or similar
situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
the cargo compartment. Partition : for stowing flat objects is located in
the upper section of the glove box. It can be
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300). removed to increase the stowage space in the
glove box.

Glove box X To remove: pull out partition :.
X To install: insert partition : and push it back
until it engages.
Stowage compartment under the arm-

rest
X To open: pull handle : and open glove box

flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; up until it
engages.
i The glove box can be cooled and ventilated
(Y page 136). Vehicles without touchpad
X To open: pull handle : up.
The armrest folds out.
1 Glove box unlocked

2 Glove box locked
The glove box can be locked and unlocked using
the mechanical key.
Z
302 Stowage areas
Vehicles with touchpad and COMAND Stowage compartment in the rear cen-
X To open: press button : at the front. ter console
Armrest ; folds out.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there is a
multimedia connector unit with two USB ports,
e.g. for iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player in the
stowage compartment .
i There is a removable stowage tray in the
storage compartment, in which objects such
as an iPod® can be stored.
Eyeglasses compartment
X To open: briefly press the stowage compart-

ment marking.
The stowage compartment opens.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
there may be open stowage spaces above and
below the stowage compartment.
Stowage net
G WARNING
X To open: press marking :.
The eyeglasses compartment opens down. Vehicles with the Occupant Classification
X To close: press marking : again and the System (OCS):
eyeglasses compartment moves up and If the gross weight of the objects in the stow-
engages. age net on the back of the front-passenger
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is seat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg), OCS cannot
always closed while the vehicle is in motion. correctly assess the occupant's weight cate-
gory. The front-passenger front air bag could
Stowage compartment in the front cen- deploy without cause, or may fail to deploy in
ter console the event of an accident. This poses an
Always observe the permissible gross weight
of 4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavy
objects in the cargo compartment.
X To open: slide cover : forwards.

Stowage compartment ; appears.
X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go.
Stowage areas 303
could slip or be thrown around and thereby hit

vehicle occupants.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 300).
: stowage net in front-passenger footwell

The through-loading facility is opened from the
cargo compartment.
X If necessary, fold the third row of seats
forward (Y page 101).
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.
X Pull the center head restraint on the rear
bench seat into the uppermost position
: Stowage net on the back of the front seats (Y page 99).
X Slide release catch : to the left and swing
flap ; to the left until it is lying on the rear
side of the rear bench seat.
: Stowage net in cargo compartment

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 300). X Push cover = forward until it is lying on the
rear seat armrest.
Through-loading facility in the rear

There is a through-loading facility above the Cargo compartment enlargement
armrest in the rear for transporting longer
objects. You can continue to use both of the Important safety notes
outer rear seats.
G WARNING
If objects or loads are not secured when being
transported in the through-loading facility, they If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
Z
304 Stowage areas
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the Folding the rear bench seat forward
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
If the driver's or front-passenger seat is set for a
Before every trip, make sure that the seat larger person, it may not be possible to fold the
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
rear bench seat forward. In this case, move the

are engaged. front seats as far forward as possible.
X Move the head restraints to the lowest posi-
Make sure that the seat backrest and the seat tion (Y page 100).
cushion are correctly engaged in position. To do
X Pull release loop : of seat cushion ;.
so, pull firmly on the seat backrest.
X Fold seat cushion ; up.
! Release and fold the seat cushion upwards
before folding the rear bench seat forward.
Otherwise, the backrests may be damaged.
When the backrest is folded forwards, the
front seats cannot be moved to their rearmost
position. Otherwise, the front seats and the
rear bench seat could be damaged.
! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take care
when folding it down. Make sure that the head
restraints are pushed all the way in so that the
backrests and seat cushions are not dam-
aged.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300). X Pull release handle = in the direction of the
The left-hand and right-hand backrests in the arrow.
second row of seats can be folded forward sep- The backrest is released.
arately to increase the cargo compartment X Fold the backrest forward until it reaches the
capacity. cargo compartment position.
On vehicles with a third row of seats, you must
fold down the third row of seats beforehand
(Y page 101) to obtain maximum cargo com-
partment enlargement.
Stowage areas 305
X Guide seat belts ; under respective clips :. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or
corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
Folding the rear bench seat back
There are four cargo tie-down rings : in the

X Fold seat backrest ; back until it engages. cargo compartment.
Make sure not to trap the seat belt while doing
so.
X Swing seat cushion : back.
Bag hook
X Pull up and adjust the head restraints if nec- G WARNING
essary (Y page 100).
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-
gage could be flung around and thereby hit
Securing loads
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
Cargo tie-down rings changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
G WARNING Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a objects on the bag hooks.
load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether
anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of
be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure
in direction or in the event of an accident. The a load.
load could slip, tip over or be flung around and
thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk
of injury.
Only use the cargo tie down rings when secur-
ing a load.
Observe the following notes on securing loads:

RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a There is a bag hook in the cargo compartment
load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip on the right-hand side.
protection for light loads. X Press bag hook marking :.
X Turn bag hook : until it engages.
Z
306 Stowage areas
Cargo compartment cover Installing/removing the cargo compart-

ment cover
G WARNING
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event of
an accident. There is an increased risk of
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
X To remove: make sure that cargo compart-
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
ment cover : is rolled up.

using tie downs, even if you are using the X Push end cap = of cargo compartment
cargo compartment cover. cover : in the direction of the arrow on the
right or left-hand side.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that X Push cargo compartment cover : into oppo-
you do not stack the load in the cargo com- site anchorage ;.
partment higher than the lower edge of the
X Remove cargo compartment cover :.
side windows. Do not place heavy objects on
top of the cargo compartment cover. X To install: if installed, remove the protective
caps from the side panels of the seat row in
The cargo compartment cover may be installed which the cargo compartment cover is to be
behind the 2nd or 3rd row of seats. installed. Use a suitable object here, e.g. a
coin.
Extending/retracting the cargo com- X Install the protective caps to the side panels
partment cover of the other seat row.
X Place cargo compartment cover : into
anchorage ; on the right or left-hand side.
X Push in opposite end cap = of cargo com-
partment cover : in the direction of the
arrow and insert cargo compartment
cover : into opposite anchorage ;.
Coat hooks on the tailgate
X To extend: pull the cargo compartment cover

back by grab handle : and clip it into retain-
ers ; on the left and right.
X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment
cover from left-hand and right-hand retain-
ers ;.
X Guide cargo compartment cover forwards by
grab handle : until it is completely rolled up.
: Coat hook
Stowage areas 307
Stowage well under the cargo com- X Fold out hook = on the underside of the
partment floor cargo compartment floor in the direction of
the arrow.
G WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.
The tire-change tool kit is located in the stowage Attach hook = to the cargo compartment's

X
compartment. upper seal ?.
X To close: detach hook = from the cargo
Opening/closing the cargo compart- compartment's upper seal ?.
ment floor X Fasten hook = to the retainer on the under-
side of the cargo compartment floor.
X Fold the cargo compartment floor down.
X Press the cargo compartment floor down ;
until it engages.
Locking/unlocking the cargo compart-

ment floor
X To open: holding the ribbing, press handle :

down ;.
Handle : folds up.
X Swing the cargo compartment floor up using
handle : until it rests against the cargo com-
partment cover.
1 Cargo compartment floor unlocked

2 Cargo compartment floor locked
The cargo compartment floor can be locked and
unlocked using the mechanical key.
Z
308 Features
Roof carrier X Secure the roof carrier to roof rails :. In

doing so, observe the manufacturer's instal-
Important safety notes lation instructions.
G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity Features
of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof Cup holder
load, the driving characteristics, as well as Important safety notes
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING
Never exceed the maximum roof load and If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
adjust your driving style. and these are not adequately secured, they
could slip or be flung around and thereby
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
use roof carriers that have been tested and holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
Position the load on the roof carrier in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
even when it is in motion. larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure changes of direction.
that when the roof carrier is installed you can: RAlways stow objects in such a way that they
Rraise the sliding sunroof fully cannot be tossed about in these or similar
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/ situations.
sliding panel fully RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
Ropen the tailgate fully trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
You will find information on the maximum roof nets or stowage nets.
load in the "Technical data" section REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
(Y page 392). shut before beginning your journey.
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
may become detached from the vehicle. You
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. the cargo compartment.
Attaching the roof carrier Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300).
! Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The drinks
could otherwise spill.
! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup
holder in the center console to continuous,
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
compartment in the area of the center con-
sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-
centrated and reflected sunlight.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem-
perature-controlled cup holder (Y page 309).
Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be rec-
ognized.
Features 309
The stowage compartments in the doors provide X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
space for bottles with a capacity of up to tion lock.
34 fl. oz. (1.0 l). X To switch on the cooling function: press
The bottles are not secured or prevented from and hold button = until the blue indicator
tipping over. Therefore, do not place any open lamp on the button lights up.
drink containers in the stowage compartments. X To switch on the heating function: press
and hold button = until the red indicator
Cup holder in the front center console lamp on the button lights up.
X To switch off the function: press and hold
button = until the indicator lamp on the but-
ton goes out.
When the heating function is used, the metal
insert of the cup holder is heated. Once a certain
temperature is reached, residual heat indicator
lamp ; lights up. This means that the metal
insert of the cup holder is hot. For this reason,

you must not reach into the cup holder metal
insert.
Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean the
cup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.
: Cup holder
; Cover Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
X To open: slide cover ; to its foremost posi- ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on
tion. the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
X To close: pull cover ; back as far as it will go. as you could otherwise damage it.
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for
cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.
Temperature-controlled cup holder in

the front-compartment center console
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

Cup holder : is located in the rear seat arm-
rest.
: Cup holder
; Residual heat indicator lamp
= Switch
The temperature-controlled cup holder can be
used to keep cold drinks cool and warm drinks
warm.
Z
310 Features
Cup holder in the third row of seats Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is
clipped into retainer = and mirror cover B has
been folded up.
Glare from the side
: Cup holder
The cup holders are located in the side trim on
the left and right-hand sides.
Sun visors X Fold down sun visor :.

Overview X Pull sun visor : out of retainer =.
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
G WARNING
Vehicles with additional sun visor:
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
X Fold down additional sun visor ; to the wind-
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
shield.
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving. Roller sunblinds on the rear side win-
dows
! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do
not let it snap back suddenly as this would
damage the automatic roller mechanism.
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sun-
blind hooked in and the side windows opened
simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump
out of the retainers and spring back suddenly
when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving
on the freeway. This could damage the inertia
reel. Therefore, either close the side window
: Mirror light or retract the roller sunblind before driving at
high speeds.
; Additional sun visor
= Retainer
? Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
A Vanity mirror
B Mirror cover
Features 311
X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by X To open: slide cover : to its foremost posi-
tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the tion.
back of the window. X Fold cover = of the insert upwards.
X To remove the insert: push insert = to the

left ?.
Insert = slides out slightly to the right.
X Lift insert = up ; and out.
X To re-install the insert: place insert = into
the holder and press it down on the right until
it engages.
Rear-compartment ashtray
! Close the ashtray when it is not in use and
The roller sunblind can be hooked back into before you fold the rear seats forward. You
place should it pop out from the top of the guide can otherwise damage the ashtray.
rail.
X Tilt pull-out profile : as illustrated.
X Slip guide bush ; into open area of guide rail
=.
X Straighten up pull-out profile : again.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
! The holder under the ashtray is not heat
resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the Vehicles without a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-
ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is prop- tem have an ashtray in the center console in the
erly engaged. Otherwise, the holder could be rear compartment.
damaged.
X To open: briefly press cover ; at the top.
The ashtray opens.
X To remove the insert: push into recess =
from the right.
Ashtray insert : slides out slightly to the
right.
Z
312 Features
X Lift insert : up and out. 12 V sockets

X To re-install the insert: place insert : into
the holder and press down on the right until it General notes
engages.
With the exception of the socket in the front
Cigarette lighter center console, all sockets can be used for
G WARNING accessories with a maximum current draw of
240 W (20 A). The socket in the front center
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot console can be used for accessories with a max-
heating element or the socket of the cigarette imum current draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
lighter. include such items as chargers for mobile
phones.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
If you use the sockets for long periods when the
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls engine is switched off, the battery may dis-
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to charge.

objects, for example i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
There is a risk of fire and injury. board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
board voltage is too low, the power to the
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. sockets is automatically cut. This ensures
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is that there is sufficient power to start the
out of reach of children. Never leave children engine.
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Socket in the front center console
! The cigarette lighter in the center console in
the front compartment is not intended for ! The socket is not suitable for operating the
operating the tire inflation compressor. tire inflation compressor.
X To open: slide the cover to its foremost posi-
tion.
X Lift up the cover of the socket.
X To close: pull the cover back as far as it will
go.
Socket in the rear compartment center

console
Vehicles with the Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-
tem have two sockets in the center console in
the rear compartment.
Your attention must always be focused on the
X Lift up the cover of the socket.
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter
when road and traffic conditions permit.
X To open: slide cover : to its foremost posi-
tion.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when the heating element is red-hot.
Features 313
Socket in the cargo compartment ! Note that work and repairs on the 115 V
power socket should only be carried out by
qualified specialist personnel.
General notes
The 115 V power socket provides an alternating
voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices
can be connected. These devices, such as
games consoles, chargers and laptops, must not
consume more than a maximum of 150 watts
altogether.
Requirements for operation of these devices:
Rthe electronic device that you connect has a
X Lift up the cover of socket :. suitable connector and conforms to stand-
ards specific to the country you are in.

Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged
115 V socket correctly into 115 V power socket.
Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be
Important safety notes connected must not exceed 150 watts.
Rthe on-board power supply is within a permis-
G DANGER
sible voltage range.
When a suitable device is connected, the Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment and
115 V power socket will be carrying a high the cargo compartment are operational.
voltage. You could receive an electric shock if
the connector cable or the 115 V power Using the 115 V power socket
socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged
or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.
RUse only connector cables that are dry and
free of damage.
RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the
115 V power socket is dry.
RHave the 115 V power socket checked or
replaced immediately at a qualified speci-
alized workshop if it is damaged or has been
pulled out of the trim.
RNever plug the connector cable into a 115 V
power socket that is damaged or has been X To switch on: switch the ignition on.
pulled out of the trim. X Open flap =.
X Insert the plug of the electronic device into
G DANGER 115 V power socket :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If you reach into the power socket or plug
X To switch off: disconnect the plug from
inappropriate devices into the power socket,
115 V power socket :.
you could receive an electric shock. There is a
Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
risk of fatal injury.
Only connect appropriate devices to the
power socket.
Z
314 Features
Problems with the 115 V power socket

The warning lamp on the The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.
115 V power socket is X Start the engine.
not lit.
or
X Charge the battery (Y page 346).
If the indicator lamp still does not light up:

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.

X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.
X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.
If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the
converter:
You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominal

power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current.
This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 V
power socket will not supply it with power.
X Connect a suitable electronic device.
mbrace The system is available if:

Rit has been activated and is operational
General notes Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is
The mbrace system is only available in the USA. available for transmitting data to the Cus-
A license agreement must be in place in order to tomer Center
activate the mbrace service. Make sure that Ra service subscription is available
your system is activated and operational. To Determining the location of the vehicle on a map
register, press the ï Info call button. If any of is only possible if:
the steps mentioned are not carried out, the RGPS reception is available
system may not be activated.
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the
If you have questions about the activation, con- Customer Assistance Center
tact one of the following telephone hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or
The mbrace system
1-866-990-9007 To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
Shortly after successfully registering with the follows:
mbrace service, a user ID and password will be X Press the W or X button on the multi-
sent to you by mail. You can use this password function steering wheel.
to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. or
X Use the multimedia system volume control.
Features 315
The system offers various services, e.g.: Emergency call

RAutomatic and manual emergency call
RRoadside Assistance call
RInfo call G WARNING
You can find information and a description of all It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
available features under "Owners Online" at even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
http://www.mbusa.com. emergency if:
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
System self-test
cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
After you have switched on the ignition, the sys- Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
tem carries out a self-diagnosis.
road
A malfunction in the system has been detected
if one of the following occurs: Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not

seen by other road users, particularly when

come on during the system self-test. dark or in poor visibility conditions
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Assistance button does not light up during Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
self-diagnosis of the system. lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
RThe indicator lamp in the ï Info call button Move to a safe location along with other vehi-
does not light up during the system self-diag- cle occupants. In such situations, secure the
nosis.
vehicle in accordance with national regula-
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-
lowing buttons continues to light up red after tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.
the system self-diagnosis:
General notes
- SOS button
- F Roadside Assistance call button
Observe the notes on system activation
(Y page 314).
- ï Info call button
The emergency call is triggered automatically if
RThe Inoperative or the Service Not an air bag is deployed or an Emergency Ten-
Activated message appears in the multi- sioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an
function display after the system self-diagno- automatically triggered emergency call yourself.
sis.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, ually.
the system may not operate as expected. In the
As soon as the emergency call has been initi-
event of an emergency, help will have to be
ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
summoned by other means.
flashes. The Connecting Call message
Have the system checked at the nearest author- appears in the multifunction display.
ized Mercedes-Benz Center or call the following
The audio output is muted.
telephone assistance services:
Once the connection has been made, the Call
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
Connected message appears in the multifunc-
1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or
tion display.
1-866-990-9007.
All important information on the emergency is
transmitted, for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle (as determined
by the GPS system)
RVehicle identification number
RInformation on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been initi-
ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-
Z
316 Features
lished between the Customer Assistance Center Breakdown assistance button

and the vehicle occupants.
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-
pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to
the vehicle.
RIf the relevant mobile phone network is not
available, no emergency call can be initiated.
The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes
continuously.
No voice connection can be established to the X To call: press Roadside Assistance but-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. ton :.
The Call Failed message appears on the mul-
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-

tifunction display and must be confirmed. tomer Assistance Center.
In this case, summon assistance by other The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
means. button : flashes while the call is active. The
Connecting Call message appears in the
Making an emergency call multifunction display. The audio output is
muted.
If a connection can be established, the Call
tion display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle
The multimedia system display indicates that a
X To initiate an emergency call manually: call is active. During the call, you can change to
press cover : briefly to open. the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-
X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one
ton on the multimedia system, for example.
second ;. Voice output is not available in this case.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes A voice connection is established between the
until the emergency call is concluded. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes- and the vehicle occupants.
Benz Customer Assistance Center. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
X After the emergency call, close cover :. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
can ascertain the nature of the problem
If the mobile phone network is unavailable, (Y page 319).
mbrace will not be able to make the emergency
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after
ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz tech-
pressing SOS button ;, you do not know if
nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle
mbrace has successfully made the emergency
to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz
call. In this case, always summon assistance by
Service Center.
other means.
You may be charged for services such as repair
work and/or towing.
Features 317
You can find more information in the separate The multimedia system display indicates that a
mbrace manual. call is active. During the call, you can change to
The system has not been able to initiate a Road- the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-
side Assistance call, if: ton on COMAND, for example.
Rthe F indicator lamp for the Roadside Voice output is not available in this case.
Assistance call button is flashing continu- A voice connection is established between the
ously. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz and the vehicle occupants.
Customer Assistance Center was estab- You receive information about operating your
lished. vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser-
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net- vice Center and about other products and serv-
work is not available, for example. ices from Mercedes-Benz.
The Call Failed message appears in the mul- You can find further information on the mbrace
tifunction display. system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
The system was unable to initiate an Info call if:

multifunction steering wheel.
Rthe indicator lamp in the ï Info call button
or
is flashing continuously.
X Press the corresponding multimedia system
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
button for ending a phone call.
Customer Assistance Center has been estab-
lished.
Info call button This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-
work is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
X To call: press Info call button :. Assistance or Info calls, an emergency call can
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus- still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call
tomer Assistance Center. will take priority and override all other active
The indicator lamp in Info call button : calls.
flashes while the connection is being made. The indicator lamp of the respective button
The Connecting Call message appears in flashes until the call is ended.
the multifunction display. The audio output is An emergency call can only be terminated by the
muted. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
If a connection can be established, the Call All other calls can be ended by pressing:
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering
tion display.
wheel
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, system to end the voice call
for example: When a call is initiated, the audio system is
muted.
RCurrent location of the vehicle
Z
318 Features
The mobile phone is no longer connected to the Search and Send

multimedia system.
However, if you want to use your mobile phone, General notes
do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be
a safe location. equipped with mbrace and a navigation system.
Additionally, an mbrace service subscription
Downloading destinations in COMAND must be completed.
"Search & Send" is a service for entering desti-
Downloading destinations nations in the navigation system. A destination
Downloading destinations gives you access to a address which is found on Google Maps® can be
database with over 15 million points of interest transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's
(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi- navigation system.
gation system in your vehicle. If you know the
destination, the address can be downloaded. Specifying and sending the destination
Alternatively, you can obtain the location of address
Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations X Go to the website http://maps.google.com
in the vicinity. and enter a destination address into the entry

Furthermore, you can download routes with up field.
to four way points. X To send the destination address to the e-
You are prompted to confirm route guidance to mail address of your mbrace account:
the address entered. click on the corresponding button on the web-
site.
X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
the controller and confirm with 7. Example:
The system calculates the route and subse- If you select "Send to vehicle" and then
quently starts the route guidance with the "Mercedes-Benz", the destination address
address entered. will be sent to your vehicle.
If you select No the address can be stored in X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
the address book. Enter the e-mail address you specified when
setting up your mbrace account into the cor-
The destination download function is available
responding field.
if:
X Click "Send".
Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-
tem. Information on specific commands such as
Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-
"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the
website.
ble and data transfer is possible.
Route Assistance Calling up a transmitted destination
address
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package
and cannot be purchased separately. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
You can use the Route Assistance function even The transmitted destination address is loaded
if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation into the vehicle's navigation system.
system.
A display message appears, asking whether
Within the framework of this service, you receive navigation should be started.
a professional and reliable form of navigation
X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
support without having to leave your vehicle.
the controller and confirm with 7.
The customer service representative finds a
The system calculates the route and subse-
suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-
quently starts the route guidance with the
rent position and the desired destination. You
address entered.
will then be guided live through the current route
section. If you select No the address can be stored in
the address book.
Features 319
If you have sent more than one destination The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked
address, each individual destination must be within four days of the ignition being turned off.
confirmed separately. After this time, remote closing may be delayed
Destination addresses are loaded in the same by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle
order as the order in which they were sent. can no longer be locked remotely.
If you have multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles The vehicle remote closing feature is available if
with mbrace and active mbrace accounts: the relevant mobile phone network is available
and a data connection is possible.
If multiple vehicles are registered under the
same e-mail address, the destination will be X Contact the following service hotlines:
sent to all the vehicles. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372)
Vehicle remote opening or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
You can use the vehicle remote unlocking if you The next time you are inside the vehicle and you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked
replacement SmartKey is not available. Remotely message appears in the multifunction

The vehicle can then be unlocked by the display.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:
The vehicle can be immediately unlocked Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
remotely within four days of the ignition being
tion
turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be unlocked Android™)
remotely. To do this, you will need your identification num-
The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa- ber and password.
ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-
able and a data connection is possible. Stolen vehicle recovery service
X Contact the following service hotlines:
If your vehicle has been stolen:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) X Notify the police.
or 1-866-990-9007 The police will issue a numbered incident
You will be asked for your password. report.
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon X Forward this number to the Mercedes-Benz
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- Customer Assistance Center along with your
tance Center. PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Center then tries to locate the system. The
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
tion contacts you and the local law enforcement
Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®, agency if the vehicle is located.
Android™) However, only the law enforcement agency is
To do this, you will need your identification num- informed of the location of the vehicle.
ber and password. If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for
longer than 30 seconds, mbrace automatically
Vehicle remote closing notifies the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance Center.
The vehicle remote closing feature can be used
when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and Vehicle Health Check
you are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes- With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
Benz Customer Assistance Center. Assistance Center can provide improved sup-
port for problems with your vehicle. During an
Z
320 Features
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is
Customer Assistance Center. the transfer of service data to the Customer
The customer service representative can use Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display
the received data to decide what kind of assis- shows a message to this effect together with
tance is required. You are then, for example, information about any special offers at your
guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service workshop.
Center or a recovery vehicle is called. This information can also be called up under
If vehicle data need to be transferred during an "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is Information on the data stored in the vehicle
initiated by the Customer Assistance Center. (Y page 32).
The Roadside Assistance Connected mes- Information on Roadside Assistance
sage appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health (Y page 29).
Check can be started, the Request for Vehi‐
cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐ Downloading routes
cle diagnostics? message appears in the
display. Downloading routes allows you to transfer and
X Press the Yes button to confirm the message. save predefined routes in the navigation sys-
X If the Vehicle Diagnostics Please
tem.
Start Ignition message appears: turn the A route can be prepared and sent either by a
SmartKey to key position 2 in the ignition customer service representative or under "Own-
lock (Y page 140). ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
X If the Please follow the instructions Each route can include up to four way points.
received by phone and move your vehi‐ Once a route has been received by the naviga-
cle to a safe position. message tion system, you will see the Do you want to
appears: please follow the instructions start route guidance? Destination
received by phone and move your vehicle to a Received destination has been saved
safe position. in "Previous destinations". message on
The message in the display disappears. the multimedia system display.
The vehicle operating state check begins. The route is saved.
During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐ X To start route guidance: select Yes.
cle Diagnostics Active message. An overview of the route is shown in the dis-
If you select Cancel, the Vehicle Health play.
Check is canceled completely. If you select No, the saved route can be called
When the check is complete, the Sending up later in the navigation menu.
vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐ X Select Start.
nection may be interrupted during Route guidance starts.
data transfer) message appears. The vehicle
data can now be sent. Downloaded and saved routes can be called up
again.
X Press the OK button to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance Center is terminated. Speed alert
The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ You can define the upper speed limit, which
ring Data... message appears. must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer If the vehicle exceeds the set speed, a message
Assistance Center. is sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The
Depending on what the customer service rep- Customer Assistance Center then forwards this
resentative agreed with you, the voice connec- information to you.
tion is re-established after the transfer is com- You can select the way in which you receive this
plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a information beforehand. Possible options
later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or include text message, e-mail or an automated
phone. call.
Features 321
The data you receive contains the following control. Please also read the operating instruc-
information: tions for the garage door system.
Rthe location where the speed limit was excee- When programming a garage door opener, park
ded the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the
Rthe time at which the speed limit was excee- engine while programming.
ded Certain garage door drives are incompatible
Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
door opener, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service
Geo fencing Center.
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be phone assistance services:
informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
of the selected areas. You can select the way in Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES
which you receive this information beforehand. RCanada: Customer Service at
Possible options include text message, e-mail or

1-800-387-0100
an automated call.
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
The area can be determined as either a circle or
a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You charge)
can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif- More information on HomeLink® and/or com-
ferent settings are possible for each area. patible products is also available online at
These settings can be called up under "Owners http://www.homelink.com.
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity
Alternatively, you can also trigger an Info call (Y page 30).
and notify the customer service representative USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
that you wish to activate geo-fencing. Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Currently inactive areas can be activated by text
message. Important safety notes
Triggering the vehicle alarm G WARNING
With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's When you operate or program the garage door
panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds with the integrated garage door opener, per-
and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on sons in the range of movement of the garage
the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec- door can become trapped or struck by the
onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. garage door. There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
Garage door opener
within the range of movement of the garage
General notes door.
The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated G WARNING

in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up
to three different door and gate systems. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
Use the integrated garage door opener only on gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
garage doors that: these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
out sufficient ventilation.
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
Z
322 Features
Programming so, vary the distance between remote control

A and the rear-view mirror.
Programming the buttons The required distance between remote con-
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" trol A and the integrated garage door opener
(Y page 321). depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Synchronizing the rolling code

Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 321).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will
need to use the programming button on the door

drive control panel. The programming button
Garage door remote control A is not included may be located in different places depending on
with the integrated garage door opener. the manufacturer. It is usually located on the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- door drive unit on the garage ceiling.
tion lock (Y page 140). Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive
X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to con- operating instructions, e.g. under "Program-
trol the garage door drive. ming additional remote controls", before carry-
X To start programming mode: press and ing out the following steps.
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage
garage door opener. door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-
The garage door opener is now in program- ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are
ming mode. After a short time, indicator present within the sweep of the door or gate.
lamp : lights up yellow. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as tion lock (Y page 140).
button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time. X Get out of the vehicle.
If the selected button has already been pro- X Press the programming button on the door
gramed, indicator lamp : will only light up drive unit.
yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
You now have 30 seconds to initiate the next
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
step.
lamp : flashes yellow.
X Get into the vehicle.
X To program the remote control: point
X Press previously programed button ;, =
garage door remote control A towards but-
tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a dis- or ? on the integrated garage door opener
tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm). repeatedly until the door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then com-
X Press and hold button B on remote control
plete.
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro- Notes on programming the remote con-
gramming is finished.
trol
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is to Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break"
synchronize the rolling code (Y page 322). (or interruption) of the transmission signals
after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,
X Release button B on remote control A for
these signals may not last long enough for the
the garage door drive system. integrated garage door opener. The signal is not
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the recognized during programming. Comparable
programing procedure for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
Features 323
with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door open- operate in the frequency range of 280 to
ers also feature a "break". 433 MHz.
Proceed as follows: RReplace the batteries in garage door remote
Rif you live in Canada. control A. This increases the likelihood that
garage door remote control A will transmit a
Rif you have difficulties programming the
strong and precise signal to the integrated
garage door opener (regardless of where you garage door opener.
live) when following the programming steps.
RWhen programming, hold remote control A
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the at varying distances and angles from but-
integrated garage door opener. tons ; to ? which you are programming. Try
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up various angles at a distance between 2and
yellow. 8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but
X Release the button. at varying distances.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. RIf a further remote control A is available for
X Press button B of garage door remote con- the same garage door drive, repeat the same
trol A for two seconds, then release it for two programming steps with this remote control

seconds. A. Before performing these steps, make sure
X Press button B again for two seconds. that new batteries have been installed in
X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote garage door drive remote control A.
control A until indicator lamp : lights up RNote that some remote controls only transmit
green. for a limited amount of time (the indicator
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro- lamp on the remote control goes out). Press
gramming is finished. button B on remote control A again before
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- transmission ends.
gramming was successful. The next step is to RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
synchronize the rolling code. opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
X Release button B of remote control A of the tion/transmission.
garage door drive.
When indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat Opening/closing the garage door
the programming process for the correspond-
ing button on the rear-view mirror. When After it has been programmed, the integrated
doing so, vary the distance between remote garage door opener performs the function of the
control A and the rear-view mirror. garage door system remote control. Please also
read the operating instructions for the garage
The required distance between remote con- door system.
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Several attempts might be necessary. You tion lock (Y page 140).
should test every position for at least X Press button ;, = or ? which you pro-
25 seconds before trying another position. grammed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
Problems when programming cator lamp : lights up green.
If you are experiencing problems programming Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-
the integrated garage door opener on the rear- cator lamp : flashes green.
view mirror, take note of the following instruc- The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
tions: as the button is pressed. The transmission is
RCheck the transmitter frequency used by halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
garage door drive remote control A and indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
whether it is supported. The transmitter fre- X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.
quency can usually be found on the back of
remote control A for the garage door drive.
The integrated garage door opener is com-
patible with devices that have units which
Z
324 Features
Clearing the memory X To remove: pull the floormat from retain-

ers ;.
Make sure that you clear the memory of the X Remove the floormat.
integrated garage door opener before selling the
vehicle.
tion lock (Y page 140). Infrared reflective windshield
X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
Indicator lamp : initially lights up yellow and
then green.
X Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The infrared reflecting glass prevents the vehi-
cle interior from becoming too hot. It also blocks
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is radio waves up into the gigahertz range.
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. To enable operation of radio-controlled equip-
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are ment, e.g. toll recording systems, areas on the
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter windshield are permeable to radio waves :. In
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats these areas, you can install radio-controlled sys-
securely and as specified in order to ensure tems.
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use These areas can best be seen from outside the
vehicle by observing the light reflected off the
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
windshield.
top of one another.
X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slide

the respective seat back.
X Rear seats: slide the corresponding front
seat forwards.
X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
Engine compartment 325
Engine compartment Rremove jewelry and watches

Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Hood
ple, away from moving parts
G WARNING
G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when tem work under high voltage. If you touch
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. components which are under voltage, you
There is a risk of an accident. could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before injury.
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. Never touch components of the ignition sys-
tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
G WARNING is switched on.
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is Electrically live components include ignition
a risk of injury to persons within range of coils, spark plug connectors and the test socket.
Maintenance and care

movement of the hood.
Opening the hood
Open and close the hood only when no one is
within its range of movement. G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
G WARNING ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
Opening the hood when the engine is over- of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
heated or when there is a fire in the engine Working in the engine compartment poses a
compartment could expose you to hot gases risk of injury.
or other service products. There is a risk of Where possible, let the engine cool down and
injury. touch only the components described in the
Let an overheated engine cool down before following.
engine compartment, keep the hood closed G WARNING
and contact the fire department. When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
G WARNING the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
The engine compartment contains moving Always switch off the windshield wipers and
components. Certain components, such as the ignition before opening the hood.
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
is a risk of injury. not folded away from the windshield. You
If you need to do any work inside the engine could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
compartment: ers or the hood.
Rswitch off the ignition

Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Z
326 Engine compartment
Engine oil
G WARNING
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are touch only the components described in the
turned off. following.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released. G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases

or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
G WARNING
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ;
up and lift the hood. If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in ponents in the engine compartment, it may
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
automatically by the gas-filled strut. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
Closing the hood thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
ponents before starting the engine.
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly. General notes
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
properly engaged. Open it again and close it consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
with a little more force. 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may
be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Radiator Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
in a different location.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover
the radiator. such as with a thermal mat or
insect protection cover. Otherwise, the values of
the European on-board diagnostics may be
affected. Some of these readings are required
by law and must be accurate at all times.
Engine compartment 327
When checking the oil level: Adding engine oil

Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-
imately five minutes if the engine is at normal When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
operating temperature. oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem- the environment.
perature, e.g. if the engine was only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying ! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are
out the measurement. approved for vehicles with a service system. A
list of the engine oils and oil filters that have
Checking the oil level using the oil dip- been tested and approved in accordance with
stick Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products is available at any authorized
The following cause engine failure or damage
to the exhaust system:
RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the service

system
RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after
the replacement interval specified by the
service system has expired
RUse of engine oil additives
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much

Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine engine oil can result in damage to the engine
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
engine oil siphoned off.
Example: vehicles with a diesel engine

X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick tube.
Example: engine oil cap
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
to the stop, and take it out again. X Add engine oil.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
mark ;, the oil level is correct. the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or engine oil.
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and tighten
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(Y page 327).
Z
328 Engine compartment
Further information on engine oil (Y page 389). Checking coolant level
Additional service products

G WARNING
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
touch only the components described in the Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
following. is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down.
G WARNING

The cooling system is pressurized, particularly On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, Start/Stop button twice (Y page 142).
you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. X Check the coolant temperature gauge in the
There is a risk of injury. multifunction display.
Let the engine cool down before you open the The coolant temperature must be below
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly 158 ‡ (70 †).
X Turn the SmartKey to position in the ignition
open the cap to relieve pressure.
lock u (Y page 140).
The coolant level may only be checked and cool- X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
ant refilled when the engine and engine cooling Start/Stop button (Y page 142).
system have cooled down. X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 142).
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clock-
G WARNING
wise and allow excess pressure to escape.
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- remove it.
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
fire and injury. in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
Make sure that no windshield washer con- coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck
when warm, there is enough coolant in expan-
sion tank ;.
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as
it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 390).
ASSYST PLUS 329
Adding washer fluid to the windshield The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a
washer system number or another letter, shows the type of ser-
vice. A stands for a minor service and B for a
major service.
Further information can be obtained at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time during
which the battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-
ule:
X Note down the service due date displayed in
the multifunction display before disconnect-
ing the battery.
Example: washer fluid reservoir or
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the
X Add the premixed washer fluid. battery disconnection periods from the ser-
vice date shown on the display.

X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the recom- Hiding a service message
mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears
in the multifunction display prompting you to X Press the % or a button on the steering
add washer fluid (Y page 278). wheel.
Further information on windshield washer fluid
(Y page 391).
Displaying service messages
ASSYST PLUS X Switch on the ignition.
Service message wheel to select the Serv. menu.
i If the scheduled service intervals are excee- ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by press-
ded, this may result in damage to the vehicle.
ing the a button.
You can obtain up-to-date information concern- The service due date appears in the multi-
ing the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified function display.
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
Information about Service
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the engine Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil interval display
level (Y page 326).
The multifunction display shows a service mes-
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
has been inadvertently reset, this setting can
sage for several seconds, e.g.:
be corrected at a qualified specialist work-
RService A in .. Days shop.
RService A Due Have service work carried out as described in
RService A Exceeded by .. Days the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
Depending on the operating conditions of the lead to increased wear and damage to the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the major assemblies or the vehicle.
next service due date is displayed.
Z
330 Care
A qualified specialist workshop will reset the you may scratch or damage the surfaces and
ASSYST service interval display after the service films.
work has been carried out. You can also obtain
further information on maintenance work, for ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
example. time directly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
Special service requirements rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
The specified maintenance interval takes only drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
the normal operation of the vehicle into heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
account. Under increased load on the vehicle, pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
maintenance work must be carried out more long period of time.
frequently, for example: Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
RRegular city driving with frequent intermedi- retaining the quality in the long term.
ate stops Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
RIf the vehicle is primarily used to travel short mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
distances
RUse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
RIf the engine is often left idling for long periods paintwork
Under these or similar conditions, have, for Automatic car wash
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under G WARNING
arduous operating conditions, the tires must be
checked more often. Further information can be Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
Driving abroad carefully while paying attention to the traffic
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is conditions until full braking power is restored.
also available in other countries. You can obtain
further information from any authorized ! Before driving into an automatic car wash,
Mercedes-Benz Center. make sure that it is suitable for the dimen-
sions of the vehicle. In particular, make sure
that:
Care Rthere is enough ground clearance between
the vehicle underbody and the guide rails of
General notes the automatic car wash.
Rthe clearance width of the automatic car
H Environmental note wash is sufficient, particularly the width of
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning the guide rails.
cloths in an environmentally responsible man- Ryou enter the automatic car wash straight
ner. and in the center of the guide rails in order
to avoid damaging the tires or wheel rims.
! When cleaning your car, do not use: Fold in the exterior mirrors before the vehicle
is washed. The exterior mirrors could other-
Rdry, coarse or hard cloths wise be damaged.
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rsolvents
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
brakes automatically in certain situations.
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces and films with hard
objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. Otherwise,
Care 331
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate X Release the electric parking brake.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
function in the following or similar situations: in the ignition lock.
Rwhen towing the vehicle You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
Rin the car wash wash from the very start.
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
damage the paintwork or plastic parts. from the windshield and the wiper blades. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises
! Make sure that: caused by residue on the windshield.
Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed. Washing by hand
Rthat the blower of the ventilation/heating
system is switched off (OFF button has In some countries, washing by hand is only
been pressed). allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position
Observe the legal requirements in all countries
g. concerned.

X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
vehicle in direct sunlight.
! In car washes with a towing mechanism, X Use a soft sponge to clean.
make sure that the automatic transmission is X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
in transmission position i; otherwise, the shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
vehicle could be damaged.
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-
RVehicles with a SmartKey:
tle jet of water.
Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni- X Do not point the water jet directly towards the
tion lock. Do not open the driver's door or air inlets.
front-passenger door when the engine is
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission selects park position j auto- frequently.
matically and locks the wheels. You can X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
prevent this by shifting the automatic trans- thoroughly with a chamois.
mission to i beforehand. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: work.
Do not open the driver's door or front- When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
passenger door when the engine is traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic soon as possible.
transmission selects park position j auto-
matically and locks the wheels. Power washers
Observe the following to make sure that the
automatic transmission stays in position i: G WARNING
X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
ignition is switched off. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
X Turn the SmartKey to position in the ignition to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
lock 2 (Y page 140). nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop edly. There is a risk of an accident.
button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
i. tires or chassis components replaced imme-
X Release the brake pedal. diately.
Z
332 Care
! Always maintain a distance of at least X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a
power washer nozzle. Information about the cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter
correct distance is available from the equip- fluid.
ment manufacturer. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
Move the power washer nozzle around when X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
cleaning your vehicle.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
Do not aim directly at any of the following: surface, use the paint care products recommen-
Rtires ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. case approximately every three to five months,
Relectrical components
depending on the climate conditions and the
care product used.
Rbattery
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the
Rplug-type couplings paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-
Rlights mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz
Rseals should be used.
Rtrim Do not use these care products in the sun or on
Rventilation slots the hood while the hood is hot.
Damaged seals or electrical components can X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-
lead to leaks or failures. Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-
work quickly and provisionally.
! Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your
vehicle are covered with decorative foil. Main-
tain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm) Matte finish care
between the foil-wrapped parts of the vehicle ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufacturer. ! The following can give the paint a glossy
Move the power washer nozzle around when appearance and thus reduce the matt effect:
cleaning your vehicle. RRubbing hard with unsuitable agents
The water temperature of the high-pressure RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight
cleaner must not exceed 140 °F (60 °C).
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing
products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the
Cleaning the paintwork purpose of paintwork care. These products
! Do not affix: are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their
use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to
Rstickers considerable surface damage or, more spe-
Rfilms cifically, to shiny, spotted areas.
Rmagnetic plates or similar items Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise qualified specialist workshop.
damage the paintwork. ! Only use automatic car washes which cor-
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by respond to the latest technological stand-
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate ards. Never use wash programs which finish
care cannot always be completely repaired. In by treating the vehicle with hot wax.
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage
while avoiding rubbing too hard. to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover and These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with
rinse off the treated areas afterwards. a clear matt finish.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areas afterwards.
Care 333
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo ! Clean the water drainage channels of the
from the range of recommended and windshield and the rear window at regular
approved Mercedes-Benz care products. intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and
pollen may under certain circumstances pre-
vent water from draining away. This can lead
Cleaning the vehicle parts to corrosion damage and damage to elec-
tronic components.
Cleaning the wheels X Clean the inside and outside of the windows
with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that
G WARNING is recommended and approved by Mercedes-
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt Benz.
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- Cleaning wiper blades
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING
Do not use power washers with circular jet You could become trapped by the windshield
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
tires or chassis components replaced imme- windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of

diately. injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
to remove brake dust. This could damage wiper blades.
wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
time directly after cleaning, particularly after wiper blade could be damaged.
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor- not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, ite coating could be damaged. This could
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By cause wiper noise.
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
long period of time. back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
Cleaning the windows X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
windshield (Y page 123).
G WARNING X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp
You could become trapped by the windshield cloth.
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of before switching on the ignition.
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and Cleaning the exterior lighting
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
wiper blades. which are suitable for plastic light lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, could scratch or damage the plastic light len-
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- ses.
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. agent, e. g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
Z
334 Care
Cleaning the mirror turn signals Cleaning the rear view camera and 360°
camera
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could around the rear view camera or 360° camera
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the with a power washer.
mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the side running board

! Do not clean the aluminum inserts of the
side running board with alkaline or acidic
cleaners, such as wheel cleaner. Do not use
acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
X
The aluminum inserts could otherwise be the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
damaged. lock.
X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the
Cleaning the sensors multimedia system (see Digital Operator's
Manual).
! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a distance X To clean the camera: use clean water and a
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle soft cloth to clean the camera lens :.
and the power washer nozzle. Information 360° camera: if you drive at speeds above
about the correct distance is available from 20 mph (30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in posi-
the equipment manufacturer. tion u or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of
the 360° camera closes.
Cleaning the exhaust pipe

G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch-
ing them.
! Vehicles with black exhaust pipes: black

chromed screens should not be polished with
a chrome polish. They will otherwise lose their
X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with black shine. For optimal care, the screens
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. should be rubbed with a lightly oiled cloth
after every car wash. Commercially available
engine and care oils are suitable for this.
Care 335
For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paint- Interior care
work polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove
the excess polish residue after polishing. Cleaning the display
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit
and corrosive environmental factors may cause ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
flash rust to form on the surface. You can Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by Rabrasive cleaning agents
cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and Rcommercially-available household cleaning
after washing. agents
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care These may damage the display surface. Do
product tested and approved by Mercedes- not put pressure on the display surface when
Benz. cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-
age to the display.
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it
is switched off and has cooled down.
H Environmental note X Clean the display surface using a commer-
Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD
environmentally responsible manner. display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a power cloth.
washer. Do not use solvents.
! Please note the care instructions in the Cleaning the plastic trim
trailer coupling manufacturer's operating
instructions. G WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag deploy-
ment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.
! Never attach the following to plastic surfa-

ces:
Rstickers
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes Rfilms
dirty or corroded. Rperfume oil container or similar
X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling, You could otherwise damage the plastic.
e.g. with a wire brush.
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-
brush.
tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball cou- the surfaces.
pling :.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
working properly.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
i You can also have the maintenance work on ucts recommended and approved by
the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch car- Mercedes-Benz.
ried out by a qualified specialist workshop. The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Z
336 Care
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or Genuine leather seat covers
selector lever ! To retain the natural appearance of the
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather, observe the following cleaning
leather care agents that have been recom- instructions:
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. RClean genuine leather covers carefully with
a damp cloth and then wipe the covers
down with a dry cloth.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-
RMake sure that the leather does not
ments become soaked. It may otherwise become
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents rough and cracked.
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes ROnly use leather care agents that have
or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag- been tested and approved by Mercedes-
ing the surface. Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are Leather is a natural product.
mostly made of anodized aluminum and can It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use example:
a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning Rdifferences in the texture
the trim pieces. Rmarks caused by growth and injury

If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very Rslight nuances of color
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are
unsure as to whether the trim pieces are These are characteristics of leather and not
chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized material defects.
Mercedes-Benz Center. Seat covers of other materials
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a ! Observe the following when cleaning:
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
moistened with a solution containing 1%
products recommended and approved by
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
Mercedes-Benz.
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
Cleaning the seat covers detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
General notes tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
made out of real leather, artificial leather or depend on the type of dirt and how long it
DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage has been there.
the cover. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-
i Note that regular care is essential to ensure tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
that the appearance and comfort of the cov-
ers is retained over time.
Cleaning the seat belts
G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
Care 337
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †)
or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets

X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or
dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Z
338 Where will I find...?
Where will I find...? Information on reflective safety jackets

Reflective safety jacket
Removing/replacing the reflective
safety jacket
: Maximum number of washes

; Maximum wash temperature
= Do not bleach
? Do not iron
A Do not use a laundry dryer
The reflective safety jackets are located in front B Do not dry-clean
door stowage compartments :. Reflective
safety jackets can also be stored in the rear door
C This is a class 2 vest
Breakdown assistance
stowage compartments. RThe reflective safety jackets meet the require-

X To remove: pull out the safety jacket bag ments defined by the legal standard only:
containing the reflective safety jacket. - if the correct size is used and
X Open the safety jacket bag and pull out the - if the reflective safety jackets are correctly
reflective safety jacket. fastened
X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety
it up and stow it in the safety jacket bag. jackets are clean and intact. The special prop-
X Replace the safety jacket bag in stowage
erties may otherwise be compromised.
compartment :. RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored
in their original packaging in a dry place away
i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from from sources of heat and light.
its packaging material before sliding it into
RThe maximum number of washes specified is
the stowage compartment. The packaging
material may otherwise cause it to slip out or not the only factor influencing the life span of
make removing it difficult. the reflective safety jackets. Their life span
also depends on use, care, storage, etc.
Observe the legal requirements in each country.
RThe reflective safety jackets should be dis-
posed of and replaced with new ones:
- after 15 washes, and/or
- if the reflective strips have become
scratched, and/or
- if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled and cannot be
cleaned off, and/or
- if the fluorescence has faded e.g. due to the
effects of sunlight
RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner. To do so,
contact your local waste disposal company.
Flat tire 339
Vehicle tool kit Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency

spare wheel
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage
well under the cargo compartment floor.
Apart from certain country-specific variations,
the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change
tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are
specific to the vehicle. For more information on
which tools are required to perform a wheel
change on your vehicle, consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for
example:
Rjack
: Alignment bolt
Rwheel chock
; Velcro fastener
= Folding wheel chock
Rlug wrench
? Ratchet wrench
Rratchet wrench
A Lug wrench
Ralignment bolt
B Jack
C Wheel bolts
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit D Towing eye
X Open the tailgate.
X Lift the cargo compartment floor up
(Y page 307).
X Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel (Y page 381).
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
: Lug wrench
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-
; Towing eye
ties)
= Ratchet wrench
? Alignment bolt Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-
cles with MOExtended tires
A Tire sealant filler bottle
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 339)
B Tire inflation compressor
Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain
C Folding wheel chock
countries)
D Jack
Information on changing and mounting wheels
E Wheel bolts (Y page 374).
X Open the tailgate. X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
X Lift the cargo compartment floor up level ground, as far away as possible from
(Y page 307). traffic.
X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 341). X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 161).
340 Flat tire
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
straight-ahead position. next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 369).
make sure that the normal vehicle level is MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-
selected (Y page 190). tion with an active tire pressure loss warning
X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering system or with an active tire pressure monitor.
package: make sure that the normal level is If a pressure loss warning message appears
selected (Y page 184). in the multifunction display:
X Switch off the engine. Robserve the instructions in the display mes-
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the sages (Y page 273).
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Rcheck the tire for damage
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driv- Rif driving on, observe the following notes
er's door. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
The vehicle electronics are now in position approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-
u. This means no SmartKey is in the ignition cle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles
lock. (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock tance possible depends upon:
(Y page 140).
RVehicle speed
X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-
RRoad condition
gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is
near the danger area while a wheel is being ROutside temperature

changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
in the wheel change should, for example, may be reduced by extreme driving conditions
stand behind the barrier. or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic moderate style of driving.
conditions when doing so. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
X Close the driver's door. counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
X Unload heavy luggage. warning appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum permissible
i Only operate the tire inflation compressor speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
using a 12 V socket, even if the ignition is
turned off (Y page 312). i When replacing one or all tires, please
observe the following specifications for your
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on- vehicle's tires:
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
board voltage is too low, the power to the Rsize
sockets is automatically cut. This ensures Rtype and
that there is sufficient power to start the Rthe "MOExtended" mark
engine.
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may
be used as a temporary measure. Make sure
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat that you use the proper size and type (sum-
properties) mer or winter tire).
General notes i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires

are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the fac-
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- tory. It is therefore recommended that you
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-
or more tires. The affected tire must not show flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
any clearly visible damage. may be obtained from a qualified specialist
You can recognize a MOExtended tire by the workshop.
MOExtended marking which appears on the
Flat tire 341
Important safety notes G WARNING

G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
observe the following:
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden immediately with water.
vehicle. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
Stop driving in emergency mode if: your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
Ryou hear banging noises.
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
Rthevehicle starts to shake.
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
RESP® is intervening constantly. and seek medical attention immediately.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. RImmediately change out of clothing which
After driving in emergency mode, have the has come into contact with tire sealant.
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
workshop with regard to their further use. The attention immediately.
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
for longer than eight minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat.
TIREFIT kit
The tire inflation compressor can be operated
Important safety notes again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-
TIREFIT is a tire sealant. tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to pressor.
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-
tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
Using the TIREFIT kit
G WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
than those mentioned above.
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident. X Do not remove any foreign objects which have
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
specialist workshop. X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-
nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
Z
342 Flat tire
compressor from the stowage well under- XPress on and off switch = on the tire inflation
neath the cargo compartment floor compressor to I.
(Y page 339). The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the The tire is inflated.
instrument cluster within the driver's field of i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
vision. pressure can briefly rise to approximately
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
valve on the wheel with the defective tire. Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of five minutes. The tire should then
have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-
sure reached" (Y page 343).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure not reached" (Y page 342).
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
X Pull connector ? with the cable and hose A areas as quickly as possible. It is preferable to
out of the tire inflation compressor housing. use clean water.

X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have
bottle :. them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry
X Place tire sealant bottle : head down into cleaner as soon as possible.
recess ; of the tire inflation compressor.
Tire pressure not reached
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not
been attained after five minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-
imately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres-
tire. sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. 26 psi).
X Insert connector ? into a socket in your vehi- G WARNING
cle.
Cigarette lighter socket: (Y page 312) If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
12 V sockets: (Y page 312)
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter
(Y page 312). Observe the notes on sockets tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
(Y page 312). pressure that is too low can significantly
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
tion lock (Y page 140). acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Flat tire 343
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
specialist workshop. tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
Tire pressure reached acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
G WARNING specialist workshop.
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not i In cases such as the one mentioned above,
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
accident. ter. Or call 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
You should therefore adapt your driving style
X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
the specified maximum speed with a tire that Loading Information placard on the driver's
has been repaired using tire sealant. side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the
fuel filler flap for values.
The maximum permissible speed for a tire X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). tire inflation compressor.
The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be
affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's
field of vision.
! Residue from the tire sealant may come out
of the filler hose after use. This could cause
stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop. X To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure
release button E on the filler hose.
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
X The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge
been attained after five minutes:
F.
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
faulty tire.
X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-
sealed tire.
tion compressor.
X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-
X Pull away immediately.
tion compressor.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
minutes and check the tire pressure with the sealant bottle.
tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). shop and have the tire changed there.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon
G WARNING as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the required tire pressure is not reached X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
after driving for a short period, the tire is too four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
Z
344 Battery (vehicle)
Battery (vehicle) Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of
12 V battery - important safety notes electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-
ple:
Special tools and expert knowledge are required
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
when working on the battery, e.g. removal and
installation. You should therefore have all work fibers
involving the battery carried out at a qualified Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
specialist workshop. Rif you push or pull the battery across the car-
pet or other synthetic materials
G WARNING Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and G WARNING
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can During the charging process, a battery produ-
lead to function restrictions applying to ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys- sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. connected battery does not come into con-
You could lose control of the vehicle, for tact with vehicle parts.
example: RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
Rwhen braking tery.

Rin RIt is important that you observe the descri-
the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not bed order of the battery terminals when
adapted to the road conditions connecting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
connected.
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
RIt is particularly important to observe the
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
should have all work involving the battery car- described order when connecting and dis-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. connecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
For further information about ABS and ESP®, terminals while the engine is running.
see (Y page 66) and (Y page 69).
G WARNING G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
explosion. the battery. Keep children away from batter-
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
body to remove any existing electrostatic plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
build-up. tion.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when H Environmental note

charging the battery as well as when jump-start- Batteries contain dangerous
ing. substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
Battery (vehicle) 345
the household rubbish. They Rinse any acid spills immediately

must be collected separately with clear water. Contact a physician
if necessary.
and recycled to protect the
Wear eye protection.
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged Keep children away.
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat- Observe this Operator's Manual.
teries.
! Have the battery regularly checked at a

qualified specialist workshop. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
For more information, please contact a quali- mends that you only use batteries which have
fied specialist workshop. been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
! Always have work on batteries carried out at increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
a qualified specialist workshop. occupants from suffering acid burns should the
Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12- In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
volt battery yourself, please observe the fol- possible service life, it must always be suffi-
lowing: ciently charged.
RSecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
away. discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.
RSwitch off the ignition. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a
RDisconnect the negative terminal first and qualified specialist workshop. However, you can
then the positive terminal. also charge the battery with a charger recom-
mended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified
The transmission is locked in position j
specialist workshop for further information.
after disconnecting the battery.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
After the work has been done, install the bat-
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-
short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a
minal clamp firmly.
lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
Comply with safety precautions and take pro- workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
tective measures when handling batteries. parked for a long period of time.
Risk of explosion. Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
and do not require any electrical consumers.
The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus
conserving battery power.
Fire, open flames and smoking are If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if
prohibited when handling the bat- you reconnect the battery, you will have to:
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
Rset the clock; see the Digital Operator's Man-
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact ual
with skin, eyes or clothing. On vehicles with a multimedia system and
Wear suitable protective clothing, navigation system, the clock is set automati-
especially gloves, apron and face- cally.
guard. Rreset the function for folding the exterior mir-
rors in/out automatically, by folding the mir-
rors out once (Y page 111)
Z
346 Jump-starting
Charging the 12 V battery ! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
G WARNING The jump-starting connection point is in the
During charging and jump-starting, explosive engine compartment (Y page 346).
gases can escape from the battery. There is a X Open the hood.
risk of an explosion. X Connect the battery charger to the positive
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating terminal and ground point in the same order
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient as when connecting the donor battery in the
jump-starting procedure (Y page 346).
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery. Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not
lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it
is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a
G WARNING battery charger which has been tested and
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the
the battery. Keep children away from batter- charging of the battery in its installed position.
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- for further information and availability. Read the
tion. battery charger's operating instructions before
charging the battery.

G WARNING If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- light up, it is highly likely that the discharged
tures below freezing point. When jump-start- battery has frozen. In this case you may neither
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
an explosion. shorter. The starting characteristics can be
impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified
charging it or jump-starting. specialist workshop.
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum
charging voltage of 14.8 V.
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-
partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Jump-starting 347
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the
catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-
charged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the
battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be
impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a donor battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-
start the vehicle using a donor battery or a jump-starting device.
RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust
system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Z
348 Jump-starting
Make sure that:

RThe jumper cables are not damaged.
RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper
cables are connected to the battery.
RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be
off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and remove it
(Y page 140).
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
i Right-hand-drive vehicle: the jump-starting connection points may be located on the other
side of the vehicle.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the
jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, beginning with donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from pos-
itive terminal ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle
first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
Towing and tow-starting 349
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
Towing and tow-starting ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is
released. If the electric parking brake is faulty,
Important safety notes visit a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the

towing eyes, or the trailer tow hitch, if availa-
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or ble. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
no longer available if:
! Observe the following points when towing
Rthe engine is not running. with a tow rope:
Rthe brake system or the power steering is RSecure the tow rope on the same side on
malfunctioning. both vehicles.
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply RMake sure that the tow rope is not longer
or the vehicle's electrical system. than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in
the middle, e.g. with a white cloth
If your vehicle is being towed, much more (11.8 x 11.8 in). This will make other road
force may be necessary to steer or brake. users aware that a vehicle is being towed.
There is a risk of an accident. ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch.
make sure that the steering moves freely. RObserve the brake lamps of the towing
vehicle while driving. Always maintain a dis-
G WARNING tance a distance so that the tow rope does
not sag.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow
and its weight is greater than the permissible your vehicle. You could otherwise damage
gross weight of your vehicle, the: the vehicle.
Rthe towing eye could detach itself ! Do not use the trailer tow hitch for recovery
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- or towing. Do not use the towing eye for
over. recovery. this could damage the vehicle. If in
doubt, have the vehicle recovered using a
There is a risk of an accident. crane.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
! When towing, pull away slowly and
its weight should not be greater than the per- smoothly. Pull the towed vehicle as straight as
missible gross weight of your vehicle. possible and not at an acute angle. Excessive
tractive power could damage the vehicles.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden- When towing, it is preferable to use a rigid tow-
tification plate (Y page 385). ing bar as opposed to a tow rope. A rigid towing
bar helps to keep the tractive power low.
! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, ! When towing away vehicles with KEYLESS-
the vehicle brakes automatically in certain GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop
situations. button. The automatic transmission may oth-
erwise shift to position j when you open the
driver's or front-passenger door, which could
these systems in the following or similar sit-
damage the transmission.
uations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This
Rin the car wash
could damage the vehicle.
Z
350 Towing and tow-starting
! Vehicles with differential locks: make sure The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are
the differential locks are in automatic mode. located in the bumpers. They are at the front and
When towing, the differential locks must not rear behind covers :;.
be switched on. The transmission may other- X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool
wise be damaged. kit (Y page 339).
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of X To open the cover at the front: press the
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph mark on cover : inwards in the direction of
(50 km/h) must not be exceeded. the arrow.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than X To open the cover at the rear: insert a flat,
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be blunt object into the cutout and lever
raised and transported. cover ; out of the bumper.
It is better to have the vehicle transported than X Take cover : or ; off the opening.
to have it towed away. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, will go and tighten it.
have it transported on a transporter or trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in position Removing the towing eye
i when the vehicle is being towed.
X Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you: X Position cover : or ; in the bumper and
press the cover on until it engages.
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

the ignition lock
Rcannot release the electric parking brake
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
position i Towing a vehicle with both axles on
Disarm the automatic locking feature before the the ground
vehicle is towed (Y page 244). You could other- The automatic transmission shifts to position
wise be locked out when pushing or towing the j automatically when you open the driver's or
vehicle. front-passenger door or when you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
In order to ensure that the automatic transmis-
Installing/removing the towing eye sion stays in position i when towing away the
vehicle, you must observe the following points:
Installing the towing eye
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
tion lock.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
i.
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 117).
In order to signal a change of direction when
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination switch
as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps
for the direction of travel flash. After resetting
Towing and tow-starting 351
the combination switch, the hazard warning Securing the vehicle

lamp starts flashing again.
! After loading, the vehicle must be secured at
all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged.
Transporting the vehicle
A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) up and
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with auto- 4 in (10 cm) down must be maintained to the
matic transmission transport platform.
X Secure all four wheels after loading the vehi-
cle.
Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive

Damping System PLUS)
G WARNING
The weaker damping forces of the vehicle to
be transported can cause the vehicle/trailer
combination to swing.
! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the As a result, when transporting vehicles with
front and rear axles must be stationary and on Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/
the same transportation vehicle. Positioning trailer combination may start to skid. Conse-
over the connection point of the transport quently, you could lose control of the vehicle.
vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may
otherwise be damaged. There is a risk of accident and injury.
When transporting, make sure that:
All vehicles Rthe vehicle is has been loaded onto the
! You may only secure the vehicle by the transporter correctly
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as Rthe vehicle is secured at all four wheels with
axle or steering components. Otherwise, the suitable tensioning straps
vehicle could be damaged.
Ryou do not exceed the maximum permissi-
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle ble speed of 35 mph (60 km/h)
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-
poses.
Securing the vehicle
tion lock. ! After loading, the vehicle must be secured at
all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged.
i.
A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) up and
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: 4 in (10 cm) down must be maintained to the
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by transport platform.
applying the electric parking brake. X Secure all four wheels after loading the vehi-
X Shift the automatic transmission to position cle.
j.
X Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
tion lock and remove it. Information on 4MATIC vehicles
X Secure the vehicle.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
Z
352 Fuses
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
and transported. nents on the circuit and their functions stop
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is operating.
damaged, have the vehicle transported on a Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
truck or trailer. same rating, which you can recognize by the
In the event of damage to the electrical sys- color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the
tem: if the battery is defective, the automatic fuse allocation chart.
transmission will be locked in position P. To shift The fuse allocation chart is located in the fuse
the automatic transmission to position N, you box under the rear bench seat (Y page 353).
must provide power to the vehicle's electrical If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
system in the same way as when jump-starting cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-
(Y page 346). ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or Center.
trailer.
Before changing a fuse

Tow-starting (emergency engine Observe the important safety notes
starting) (Y page 352)
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must X Switch off the engine.
not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam- X Switch off all electrical consumers.
age the automatic transmission. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
You can find information on "Jump-starting" Or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function
under (Y page 346). or KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in key posi-
Fuses tion u. This is the same as the SmartKey
having been removed.
Important safety notes The driver’s door can be closed again.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
G WARNING
(Y page 161).
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- must be off.
age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
RFuse box on the front-passenger side of the
accident and injury.
dashboard
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
new fuses having the correct amperage. right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
the direction of travel
! For the fuse boxes in the engine compart- RFuse box under the rear bench seat
ment and under the rear bench seat, only use
fuses with the suffix "S". Otherwise, compo-
nents or systems could be damaged.
Dashboard fuse box
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open. ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw-
driver to open the cover in the dashboard. You
! When closing the cover, make sure that it is could damage the dashboard or the cover.
lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-
ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper- Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this
ation of the fuses. work performed at a qualified specialist work-
Fuses 353
shop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- X To close: check whether the seal is seated
ter. correctly in cover :.
X Insert cover : at the side of the fuse box into
the retainers.
X Fold down cover : and close clamps ;.
X Close the hood.
Fuse box under the rear bench seat
X Open the front-passenger door.

X To open: pull cover : outwards in the direc-
tion of the arrow and remove it.
X To close: clip in cover : on the front of the
dashboard.
X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.
X Fold the left-hand rear bench seat forward
Fuse box in the engine compartment (Y page 303).
X To open: reach into recesses ; on each side
G WARNING
of fuse box cover :.
When the hood is open and the windshield X Fold cover : up in the direction of the arrow
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by and remove it from the fuse box.
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. i The fuse allocation chart is located in a
Always switch off the windshield wipers and recess at the side of the fuse box.
the ignition before opening the hood. X To close: place cover : on the fuse box.
X Press cover : down until you feel the clamps
engage.
X Fold back the left-hand rear bench seat
(Y page 303).
X Open the hood (Y page 325).

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from
the fuse box.
X To open: open clamps ;.
X Fold up cover : in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.
Z
354 Operation
Important safety notes Further information regarding wheels and tires

can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 379).
G WARNING You can ask for information regarding permitted
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, wheel-tire combinations at an authorized
the wheel brakes or suspension components Mercedes-Benz Center.
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Tire pressure information can be found:
dent. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Always replace wheels and tires with those on the B-pillar on the driver's side
that fulfill the specifications of the original Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
part. Rin the "Tire pressure" section
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the

correct:
Operation
Rdesignation
Rmodel Information on driving
When replacing tires, make sure to use the Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
correct: heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
Rdesignation
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
Rmanufacturer ing to one side. This may indicate that the
Rmodel wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
G WARNING check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- tire damage could also be causing the unusual
Wheels and tires
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
There is a risk of accident. damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs,
speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the
consult a qualified specialist workshop. tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be dam-
Tires with run-flat characteristics: aged.
Rpay attention to the information and warn-
ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
Regular checking of wheels and tires
run-flat characteristics).
G WARNING
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor- Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
rectly can impair the operating safety. sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
Before purchasing and using non-approved your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
shop and inquire about: and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations Check wheels and tires for damage at least once
Rfactory recommendations
a month. Check wheels and tires after driving
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels
can cause a loss of tire pressure.
Operation 355
Pay particular attention to damage such as: For safety reasons, replace the tires before
RCuts in the tires the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
RPunctures in the tires tire tread depth is reached.
RTears in the tires
RBulges on tires
RDeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
all tires (Y page 355). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount
anything onto the valve other than the standard
valve cap or other valve caps approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure Marking : shows where the bar indicator
monitoring systems. (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire
tread.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-
ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres- Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.
sure as necessary (Y page 357). Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.
They are visible once a tread depth of approx-
Observe the notes on the emergency spare imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this
wheel (Y page 380). is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
The service life of tires depends, among other replaced.
things, on the following factors:
RDriving style
Wheels and tires

RTire pressure Selecting, mounting and replacing
RDistance covered tires
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type
and make.
Notes on tire tread Exception: it is permissible to mount a differ-
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
G WARNING Observe here the "MOExtended tires (tires
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. with run-flat characteristics)" section
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. (Y page 340).
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where wheels.
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con- RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the
ditions. There is a risk of accident. first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only
reach their full performance after this dis-
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires tance.
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- RDo not drive with tires which have too little
ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you tread depth. This significantly reduces the
should regularly check the tread depth and traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
the condition of the tread across the entire RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,
width of all tires. regardless of wear.
Minimum tire tread depth for: Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 380).
RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Z
356 Winter operation
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat M+S tires

properties)
G WARNING
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
or more tires. and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- a risk of an accident.
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
system or with an active tire pressure monitor (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-
Benz. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are
flat tire (Y page 340). identified by the M+S marking.
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the fac- symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
tory. It is therefore recommended that you the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
kit if you mount tires that do not feature run- such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in
flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit winter. These tires have been developed specif-
may be obtained from a qualified specialist ically for driving in snow.
workshop. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
tics.
Winter operation Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
General notes mounted.
Wheels and tires
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified Once the winter tires are mounted:
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. X Check the tire pressures (Y page 360).
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" X Restart the tire pressure monitor
section (Y page 374). (Y page 361).
X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-
sure loss warning system (Y page 361).
Driving with summer tires Information about driving with an emergency
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), the elas- spare wheel (Y page 380).
ticity of summer tires and therefore also the
traction and braking capability are reduced con-
siderably. Change the tires on your vehicle to Snow chains
M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold tem-
peratures could cause cracks to form, thereby G WARNING
damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes- If snow chains are installed to the front
Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type
of damage. wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
G WARNING cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- There is a risk of an accident.
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Tire pressure 357
To avoid hazardous situations: RDo not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
Rnever install snow chains to the front RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are
wheels installed (Y page 195).
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 71)
rear wheels. when pulling away with snow chains mounted.
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a
! Check the snow chains for damage before controlled manner, achieving an increased driv-
mounting them. Damaged or worn snow ing force (cutting action).
chains may snap and damage the following Information about driving with an emergency
components: spare wheel (Y page 380).
Rwheel
Rwheel housing
Rwheel suspension
Tire pressure
For this reason, you must use only snow Tire pressure specifications
chains that are free of defects. Observe the
manufacturer's mounting instructions. Important safety notes
! You must drive at raised vehicle level (height G WARNING
1) if snow chains have been installed. The
vehicle may otherwise be damaged. Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
! Vehicles with ADS (Adaptive Damping
System): do not use the sport mode when Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
driving with snow chains mounted. The vehi- and vehicle speed increase.
cle may otherwise be damaged. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
Wheels and tires

mends that you only use snow chains that have traction.
been specially approved for your vehicle by
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality. For more information, ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
please contact a qualified specialist workshop. There is a risk of an accident.
Install the snow chains on all driven wheels for Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
maximum tractive power and driving stability. If
and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
you own snow chains for two driven wheels only,
install the snow chains to the wheels on the rear ing the spare wheel:
axle. The vehicle then remains more stable Rmonthly, at least
under braking.
Rif the load changes
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear
the following points in mind: Rbefore beginning a long journey
RSnow chains may not be mounted on all Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible off-road driving
wheel/tire combinations (Y page 379). If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the Details on tire pressure can be found at the fol-
snow chains as soon as possible when you lowing positions in the vehicle:
come to a road that is not snow-covered. RTire and Loading Information placard on the
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow B-pillar on the driver's side
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if Rtable for tire pressure on the inside of the fuel
you wish to mount snow chains. filler flap
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of:
Z
358 Tire pressure
Rincorrectly set tire pressure Tire pressure table

Rsudden loss of tire pressure, e.g. from a for-
eign object that has penetrated the tire The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires
The data on the Tire and Loading Information permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see
placard and tire pressure table shown here are illustration (example).
examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-
cle-specific and may deviate from the data
shown here. The tire pressure specifications
that are valid for your vehicle can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with emergency spare wheel:
information on operation with the emergency The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
spare wheel can be found under "Emergency ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
spare wheel" (Y page 380). ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
Operation with a trailer: the applicable value ditions.
for the rear axle is the maximum tire pressure If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-
value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap. lowing tire pressure information is only valid for
Further information on tire pressures can be that tire size; see illustration (example).
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Wheels and tires
Tire and Loading Information placard
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully

laden" are defined in the table for different num-
bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The
: Recommended tire pressures
actual number of seats may differ.
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 364).
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure 359
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-
The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 369). can be checked in the on-board computer.
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower The tire temperature and pressure increase
values for lighter loads and/or lower road when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the on the driving speed and the load.
higher values: Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
Rif you want to drive with an increased load sures when the tires are cold.
and/or The tires are cold:
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
The tire pressures for increased loads and/or out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure and
table, may have a negative effect on driving Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
comfort. 1 mile (1.6 km)
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can The tire temperature changes depending on the
lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud- outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the
den loss of pressure. tire load. If the tire temperature changes by
For more information, contact a qualified spe- 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by
cialist workshop. approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take
this into account when checking the pressure of
warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
Important notes on tire pressure too low for the current operating conditions. If
you check the tire pressure when the tires are
G WARNING warm, the resulting value will be higher than if
the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the reduce the tire pressure to the value specified
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
Wheels and tires

for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise
pressure that is too low may result in a tire be too low.
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tire pressures for
RCheck the tire for foreign objects. cold tires:
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
valve is leaking. on the B-pillar on the driver's side

Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- (Y page 157)
tact a qualified specialist workshop. Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the emer-
gency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on
G WARNING vehicle equipment)
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure Underinflated or overinflated tires
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
Underinflated tires
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a G WARNING
risk of an accident. Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
Only screw the standard valve cap or other heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
your vehicle onto the tire valve. ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
Z
360 Tire pressure
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
tires, including the spare wheel. cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Underinflated tires may:
Roverheat,leading to tire defects
Checking the tire pressures
Radverselyaffect handling
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Important safety notes
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Observe the notes on tire pressure
(Y page 357).
Overinflated tires Information on air pressure for the tires on your
vehicle can be found:
G WARNING
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
because they are damaged more easily by
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
Rin the "Tire pressure" section
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
severely impair the braking properties and the
Checking tire pressures manually
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
accident. To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the proceed as follows:
tires, including the spare wheel. X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
checked.
Overinflated tires may: X Press the tire pressure gage securely onto the
Rincrease the braking distance valve.
Radversely X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
affect handling
Wheels and tires
recommended value on the Tire and Loading

Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
Information placard or the tire pressure table
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort (Y page 357).
Rbe more susceptible to damage X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommended value.
Maximum tire pressures X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of a pen for example. Then check
the tire pressure again using the tire pressure
checker.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system

General notes
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres- While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure
sure loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-
sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire This enables the system to detect significant
inflation pressure. Always observe the recom- pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 357).
Tire pressure 361
a corresponding warning message will appear in on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure
the multifunction display. table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning pressure loss warning system can only give
by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press reliable warnings if you have set the correct
'OK' to Restart message which appears in tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is
the Service menu of the multifunction display. set, these incorrect values will be monitored.
Information on the message display can be X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss pressures (Y page 357).
warning system" section (Y page 361). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 140).
Important safety notes X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Service menu.
The tire pressure warning system does not warn
you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure Tire Pressure.
(Y page 357). X Press the a button.
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace The Run Flat Indicator Active Press
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An 'OK' to Restart message appears in the
even loss of pressure on several tires at the multifunction display.
same time cannot be detected by the tire pres- If you wish to confirm the restart:
sure loss warning system.
X Press the a button.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is appears in the multifunction display.
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes.
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering X Press the a button.
movements. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-
The function of the tire pressure loss warning sage appears in the multifunction display.
Wheels and tires

system is limited or delayed if: After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss
warning system will monitor the set tire pres-
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
sures of all four tires.
tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry. If you wish to cancel the restart:
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. X Press the % button.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner- or
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of X When the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
acceleration). appears, press the 9 or : button to
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi- select Cancel.
cle or on the roof). X Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- restart will continue to be monitored.
ing system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if
you have:
Tire pressure monitor
Rchanged the tire pressure General notes
Rchanged the wheels or tires
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
Rmounted new wheels or tires cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure mon-
pressures are set properly on all four tires for itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or
the respective operating conditions. more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
The recommended tire pressure can be found functions if the corresponding sensors are
on the Tire and Loading Information placard installed in all wheels.
Z
362 Tire pressure
Information on tire pressures is displayed in the pressure, even if underinflation has not
multifunction display. After a few minutes of reached the level to trigger illumination of the
driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is
shown in the Serv. menu of the multifunction TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
display, see illustration (example). USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will
flash for approximately a minute and then
For information on the message display, refer to remain continuously illuminated. This
the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
section (Y page 363). cle is started as long as the malfunction
exists.
Important safety notes When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
G WARNING the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
tions may occur for a variety of reasons,
should be checked at least once a month
including the mounting of incompatible
when cold and inflated to the pressure rec-
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
tioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure
function telltale after replacing one or more
label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your
Wheels and tires
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that

vehicle has tires of a different size than the
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-
allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
mation placard or the tire pressure label, you
erly.
should determine the proper tire pressure for
those tires. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has pressure to that recommended for cold tires
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring which is suitable for the operating situation
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- (Y page 357). Note that the correct tire pressure
for the current operating situation must first be
sure telltale when one or more of your tires taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a sub-
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, stantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning
when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, threshold for the warning message is aligned to
you should stop and check your tires as soon the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire
as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- the cold tires (Y page 364). The current pres-
sures are saved as new reference values. As a
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can result, a warning message will appear if the tire
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also pressure drops significantly.
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
ping ability. notes on the recommended tire pressure
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute (Y page 357).
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
Tire pressure 363
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a X Press the 9 or : button to select
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering Tire Pressure.
movements. X Press a.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning The current tire pressure of each tire is shown
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating in the multifunction display.
pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the If the vehicle has been parked for longer than
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire displayed after driving a few minutes
pressure monitor is malfunctioning: message appears.
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-
pressure on one or more tires is significantly itor automatically detects new wheels or new
too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal- sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire
functioning. pressure value to the individual wheels is not
Rif the warning lamp flashes for approximately possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active
a minute and then remains lit constantly, the display message is shown instead of the tire
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. pressure display. The tire pressures are already
In addition to the warning lamp, a message being monitored.
appears in the multifunction display. Observe If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the
the information on display messages system may continue to show the tire pressure
(Y page 273). of the wheel that has been removed for a few
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction minutes. If this occurs, note that the value dis-
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A played for the position where the spare wheel is
malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres- mounted is not the same as the current tire
sure warning lamp flashing for approximately pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
one minute and then remaining lit. When the
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of sages
driving.
Wheels and tires

The tire pressure values indicated by the on- If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
board computer may differ from those meas- loss in one or more tires, a warning message is
ured at a gas station with a pressure gage. The shown in the multifunction display. The yellow
tire pressures shown by the on-board computer tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
refer to those measured at sea level. At high RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a message appears in the multifunction display,
pressure gage are higher than those shown by the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.
the on-board computer. In this case, do not The tire pressure must be corrected when the
reduce the tire pressures. opportunity arises.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can RIf the Check Tires message appears in the
be affected by interference from radio transmit- multifunction display, the tire pressure in at
ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way least one tire has dropped significantly. The
radios) that may be being operated in or near the tires must be checked.
vehicle. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message
appears in the multifunction display, the tire
Checking the tire pressure electroni- pressure in at least one tire has dropped sud-
cally denly. The tires must be checked.
Be sure to observe the instructions and safety
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 notes in the display messages in the "Tires" sec-
(Y page 140) in the ignition lock. tion (Y page 273).
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,
wheel to select the Serv. menu. the tire pressures may be displayed for the
wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified
after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-
sures are displayed for the correct positions.
Z
364 Loading the vehicle
Restarting the tire pressure monitor Radio type approval for the tire pres-
sure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur- Country Radio type approval number
rently set tire pressures as the reference values USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure
FCC ID: MRXGG4
monitor will automatically detect the new refer-
ence values after you have changed the tire FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
pressure. However, you can also set reference Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
values manually as described here. The tire
pressure monitor then monitors the new tire IC: 2546A-GG4
pressure values. IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-
ded for the corresponding driving situation on
the Tire and Loading Information placard on Loading the vehicle
the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 357).
You can find more tire pressure values for Instruction labels for tires and loads
various operating conditions in the tire pres-
sure table inside the fuel filler flap G WARNING
(Y page 358). Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
all four wheels. steering and driving characteristics and lead
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
in the ignition lock. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
wheel to select the Serv. menu.
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
Wheels and tires
exceeding the maximum load.

Tire Pressure.
X Press a. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
The multifunction display shows the current maximum possible load.
tire pressure for the individual tires or the
Tire pressure will be displayed (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
after driving a few minutes message. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
X Press the : button.
and Loading Information placard shows the
maximum permissible number of occu-
The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐
pants and the maximum permissible vehicle
erence Values message appears in the mul-
load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
tifunction display.
and corresponding pressures for tires
If you wish to confirm the restart: mounted at the factory.
X Press the a button. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted mes- pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-
sage appears in the multifunction display. tification plate informs you of the gross
After driving for a few minutes, the system vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
checks whether the current tire pressures are vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
within the specified range. The new tire pres- fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-
sures are then accepted as reference values mation about the maximum gross axle
and monitored. weight rating on the front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
If you wish to cancel the restart: the maximum weight that can be carried by
X Press the % button. one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
The tire pressure values stored at the last the maximum load or the maximum gross
restart will continue to be monitored. axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
Loading the vehicle 365
Number of seats
Maximum number of seats : indicates the

maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
: B-pillar, driver's side ard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration
Maximum permissible gross vehicle are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-
weight rating specific and can differ from the details shown.
The number of seats in your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Wheels and tires

Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-
suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
X Specification for maximum gross vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
Information placard: "The combined weight of weight of occupants and cargo should never
occupants and cargo should never exceed exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." Tire and Loading Information placard.
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
and luggage must not exceed the specified the driver and passengers that will be riding in
value. your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
i The specifications shown on the Tire and driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
Loading Information placard in the illustration XXX lbs.
are examples. The maximum permissible
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific
and may differ from that in the illustration. able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-
You can find the valid maximum permissible city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-
the Tire and Loading Information placard. sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
Z
366 Loading the vehicle
able cargo and luggage load capacity is cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). available cargo and luggage load capacity cal-
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of culated in step 4.
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 364).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 225).
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Step 2
Wheels and tires
Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs
pants (68 kg) (91 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(82 kg) (86 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(73 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
All about wheels and tires 367
Step 3
Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)
Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires

Even if you have calculated the total cargo care- Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
fully, you should still make sure that the gross ards
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on ards
the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 364).
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-
sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).
Wheels and tires

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. government specifications. Their purpose is to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
Trailer load/noseweight have to grade tires using three performance fac-
tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross = temperature grade. These regulations do not
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in
trailer load/noseweight is included in the load North America are provided with the corre-
along with occupants and luggage. The trailer sponding quality grading markings on the side-
load/noseweight is usually approximately 8% of wall of the tire.
the gross weight of the trailer and its cargo. Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
Example:
RTreadwear grade: 200
RTraction grade: AA
RTemperature grade: A
Z
368 All about wheels and tires
All passenger car tires must conform to the stat- are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-
utory safety requirements in addition to these priate care when driving.
grades. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- (Y page 356).
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration. Temperature
Treadwear G WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
government course. For example, a tire graded tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
150 would wear one and one-half times as well in combination, can cause excessive heat
on the government course as a tire graded 100. build-up and possible tire failure.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
may depart significantly from the norm due to and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
variations in driving habits, service practices generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
and differences in road characteristics and cli- heat when tested under controlled conditions
mate. on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
Traction of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
G WARNING failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
The traction grade assigned to this tire is meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
based on straight-ahead braking traction Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
Wheels and tires
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- higher levels of performance on the laboratory
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- test wheel than the minimum required by law.
acteristics.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to

the drive train.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
ured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread
depth (Y page 355). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in
comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-
tance is still much further than on surfaces that
Tire labeling tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
Overview
: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
? Rim diameter
A Load bearing index
B Speed rating
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(Y page 372) General: depending on the manufacturer's
; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi- standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may
cation Number (Y page 371) not contain any letters or may contain one letter
= Maximum load rating (Y page 371) that precedes the size description.
? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 360) If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
Wheels and tires

A Manufacturer vehicle tires according to European manufac-
B Tire material (Y page 372) turing standards.
C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity If "P" precedes the size description: these are
and speed rating (Y page 369) passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-
D Load index (Y page 371) ufacturing standards.
E Tire name If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
The markings described above are on the tire in light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and standards.
the manufacturer's name. If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate are only designed for temporary use in an emer-
from the data in the example. gency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire
Tire size designation, load-bearing width in millimeters.
capacity and speed rating Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size
ratio between the tire height and tire width and
G WARNING is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
city and the approved maximum speed could Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-
is a risk of accident. onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size
Z
description, depending on the manufacturer ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of

(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter the size description, depending on the man-
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
flange. The rim diameter is specified in The service specification is made up of load-
inches (in). bearing index A and speed rating B.
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a RIf the size description of your tire includes
numerical code that specifies the maximum "ZR" and there are no service specifications,
load-bearing capacity of a tire. ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the the maximum speed.
specified load limit. The maximum permissible If a service specification is available, the max-
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and imum speed is limited according to the speed
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on rating in the service specification. Example:
the driver's side (Y page 364). 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
Example: the service specification. The letter "Y" rep-
resents the speed rating. The maximum
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.
(300 km/h).
For further information on the maximum tire
RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 371).
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
For further information on the load bearing
must include "ZR", and the service specifica-
index, see "Load index" (Y page 371).
tion must be given in parentheses. Example:
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-
approved maximum speed of the tire. cates that the maximum speed of the tire is
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-
from the data in the example. ufacturer about the maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
Wheels and tires
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your Index Speed rating
driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires Q M+S3 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Index Speed rating T M+S3 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) H M+S3 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) V M+S3 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
have the i snowflake symbol on the tire
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-
ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) snow. They have been especially developed
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) for driving on snow.
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
3 Or M+S i for winter tires.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi- Maximum load rating

cle from exceeding the following speeds:
RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG GLS 63):
130 mph (210 km/h)
RMercedes-AMG GLS 63: 155 mph (250 km/h)
RMercedes-AMG GLS 63 with increased top
speed: 174 mph (280 km/h)
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory
may be higher than the maximum speed that the
electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 379). Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis-
Further information about reading tire data can sible weight for which the tire is approved.
be obtained from any qualified specialist work- Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
shop. specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Load index Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 364).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-
Wheels and tires

ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on
the sidewall of each tire produced.
In addition to the load bearing index, load

index : may be imprinted after the letters that
identify speed index B on the sidewall of the
tire (Y page 369).
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard load
(SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
on the maximum load that the tire can carry at TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders
a certain pressure to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate relevant matters. It makes it possible for the
from the data in the example. purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the
Z
requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans- Bar

portation. Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
Manufacturer identification code: manufac- per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
turer identification code ; provides details on are the equivalent of 1 bar.
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code DOT (Department of Transportation)
with four symbols. DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
For further information about retreaded tires, U S Department of Transportation.
see (Y page 379).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Normal occupant weight
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by The number of occupants for which the vehicle
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
characteristics of the tire. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
provides information about the age of a tire. The with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
first and second positions represent the week of temperature characteristics. The quality grad-
manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal- ing assessment is made by the manufacturer
endar week. Positions three and four represent following specifications from the U.S. govern-
the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of
is marked "3214" was manufactured in week 32 the tire.
in 2014.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate Recommended tire pressures
from the data in the example. The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
Tire characteristics The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
Wheels and tires
mum permissible vehicle speed.

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
This information describes the type of tire cord the vehicle or not.
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;. Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate mounted.
from the data in the example.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Definition of terms for tires and loading The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
Tire ply composition and material used exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
Describes the number of plies or the number of axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, side.
polyester and other materials.
Speed rating tem and optional equipment if these are instal-

The speed rating is part of the tire identification. led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is gers or luggage.
approved. Maximum load rating
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
The GTW is the weight of a trailer including the sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is
weight of the load, luggage, accessories etc. on approved.
the trailer. Maximum permissible tire pressure
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of Maximum load on one tire
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel,
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi- two.
cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-
cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
PSI (pounds per square inch)
driver's side. A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) Aspect ratio

The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross Relationship between tire height and tire width
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the in percent.
vehicle including all accessories, occupants,
fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if Tire pressure
applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-
specified on the vehicle identification plate on ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-
the B-pillar on the driver's side. face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
Wheels and tires

square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight The tire pressure should only be corrected when
The maximum weight is the sum of: the tires are cold.
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle Cold tire pressure
Rthe weight of the accessories
The tires are cold:
Rthe load limit
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
equipment and
Kilopascal (kPa) Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
1 mile (1.6 km)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is Tread
bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
1 bar.
the road.
Load index
Bead
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
more precisely.
the wheel rim.
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-
Z
374 Changing a wheel
Sidewall Changing a wheel

The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead. Flat tire
Weight of optional extras The "Breakdown assistance" section
(Y page 339) contains information and notes on
The combined weight of those optional extras how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-
that weigh more than the replaced standard ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires
optional extras, such as high-performance with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 340).
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-
Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in
formance battery, are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories. the event of a flat tire, mount the emergency
spare wheel according to the description under
TIN (Tire Identification Number) "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 375).
This is a unique identifier which can be used by
a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example
for a product recall, and thus identify the pur- Rotating the wheels
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and G WARNING
the manufacturing date. Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
Load bearing index
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The load bearing index (also load index) is a code
The wheel brakes or suspension components
that contains the maximum load bearing capa-
city of a tire. may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
dent.
Traction Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
Traction is the result of friction between the tires and tires are of the same dimensions.
Wheels and tires
and the road surface.

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are located
The TWR specifies the maximum permissible in the wheel.
weight that the ball coupling of the trailer tow Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
hitch can support. the valve. This could damage the electronic
Treadwear indicators components.
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib- Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level cialist workshop.
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) Always observe the instructions and safety
has been reached. notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 375).
Occupant distribution The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their differ, depending on the operating conditions.
designated seating positions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
Total load limit wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg the center.
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in On vehicles that have the same size front and
the vehicle. rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-
ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no
warranty book is available, the tires should be
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may
Changing a wheel 375
be required earlier. Do not change the direction X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driv-
of wheel rotation. er's door.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the The vehicle electronics are now in position
brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota- u. This means no SmartKey is in the ignition
ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, lock.
restart the tire pressure loss warning system or X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
the tire pressure monitor (Y page 361). Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 140).
X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
Direction of rotation the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro- i Apart from certain country-specific varia-
planing. These advantages can only be gained if tions, vehicles are not equipped with a tire-
the tires are installed corresponding to the change tool kit. For more information on
direction of rotation. which tools are required to perform a wheel
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its change on your vehicle, consult a qualified
correct direction of rotation. specialist workshop.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for
example:
Storing wheels RJack
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, RWheel chock
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires RLug wrench
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
Mounting a wheel
Wheels and tires

Preparing the vehicle
X Vehicle with emergency spare wheel:
when mounting the emergency spare wheel in
the event of a flat tire, follow the additional
notes on vehicle preparation under "Flat tire"
(Y page 339).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
position. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: can be found in the tire-change tool kit
shift the transmission to position j. (Y page 339).
X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
make sure that the normal vehicle level is measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
selected (Y page 190). away, for example when changing a wheel.
X Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering X Fold both plates upwards :.
package: make sure that the normal level is X Fold out lower plate ;.
selected (Y page 184).
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the
openings in base plate =.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Z
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the

jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being
changed. It must not be used for performing
maintenance work under the vehicle.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-
hill slopes.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
ing away by applying the parking brake and
inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the
parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
X Place chocks or other suitable items under RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago- non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be
Raising the vehicle used, e.g. rubber mats.
RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects
G WARNING as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not
If you do not position the jack correctly at the be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height.
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
RMake sure that the distance between the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. underside of the tires and the ground does not
There is a risk of injury. exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- RDo not place your hands or feet under the
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack raised vehicle.
must be positioned vertically, directly under RDo not lie under the vehicle.
Wheels and tires
the jacking point of the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with RNever open or close a door or the tailgate
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel: only when the vehicle is raised.
use the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel RMake sure that no persons are present in the
on the rear axle. If you mount the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the
front axle, this could result in damage to the
brake system.
If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intact
wheel from the rear axle must first be
replaced with the "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel. The damaged wheel on the front
axle can then be replaced by the undamaged
wheel from the rear axle.
Make sure to note the placard on the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
! Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the
could damage the vehicle. wheel you wish to change by about one full
Observe the following when raising the vehi- turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
cle:
RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved
Changing a wheel 377
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits

completely on jacking point ; and the base
of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is raised
a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could
otherwise be damaged when you screw them
in.
The jacking points are located just behind the When mounting/removing wheels, and for as
front wheel housings and just in front of the rear long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying
wheel housings (arrows). any external force on the brake disks. This could
X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle impair the level of comfort when braking.
tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the
jack so that the letters AUF are visible.
Wheels and tires

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-
pletely.
X Position jack = at jacking point ;. X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
The alignment bolt on the jack must be inser- instead of the wheel bolt.
ted into the intended opening on the jacking X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
point. X Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly specialist workshop immediately. Have the
beneath the jacking point. damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
Z
G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold

the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-
(Y page 374). faces.
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea- ment bolt and push it on.
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-
only use wheel bolts which have been approved tight.
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
wheel. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
! Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the tight.

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Using X Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsi-
other wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare" ble spare wheel: inflate the collapsible spare
emergency spare wheel could damage the wheel (Y page 382).
brake system. Only then lower the vehicle.
Wheels and tires
Lowering the vehicle

G WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
: Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collapsi-
factory and for the collapsible spare wheel ble spare wheel: before lowering the vehicle,
(Mercedes-AMG GLS 63 4MATIC) inflate the collapsible spare wheel with the
; Wheel bolts for the collapsible spare wheel tire inflation compressor. The wheel rim could
otherwise be damaged.
X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visi-
ble.
X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
once again standing firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.
Wheel and tire combinations 379
These tires have been specially adapted for

use with the control systems, such as ABS or
ESP®, and are marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may
only be used on wheels that have been spe-
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain
The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
(150 Nm). emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition, when
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
driving with a load, tire dimension variations
X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-change could cause the tires to come into contact
tool kit in the stowage well under the cargo with the bodywork and axle components. This
compartment floor again. could result in damage to the tires or the vehi-
X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted cle.
wheel and adjust it if necessary. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
Observe the recommended tire pressure age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or
(Y page 357). accessories other than those tested and
When you are driving with the collapsible spare approved.
wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning Information on tires, wheels and approved
system or the tire pressure monitor cannot func- combinations can be obtained from any quali-
Wheels and tires

tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss fied specialist workshop.
warning system or tire pressure monitor when ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
the defective wheel has been replaced with a ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
new wheel. ous damage cannot always be detected on
Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys- retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
tem: all installed wheels must be equipped with cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
functioning sensors. tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
you have no information about their previous
usage.
Wheel and tire combinations The recommended pressures for various oper-
ating conditions can be found:
Information regarding permitted wheel/tire Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
combinations can be found at an authorized on the B-pillar on the driver's side
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
mends that you only use tires and wheels sures under various operating conditions
which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz (Y page 357).
specifically for your vehicle. Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
the vehicle document wallet.
Z
380 Emergency spare wheel
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intact
the vehicle: wheel from the rear axle must first be
Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left replaced with the "Minispare" emergency
and right) spare wheel. The damaged wheel on the front
axle can then be replaced by the undamaged
Rwith the same type of tires at a given time
wheel from the rear axle.
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires) Make sure to note the placard on the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires When using an emergency spare wheel or spare
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the fac- wheel of a different size, you must not exceed
tory. It is therefore recommended that you the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
kit if you mount tires that do not feature run- You should regularly check the pressure of the
flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to
may be obtained from a qualified specialist long trips, and correct the pressure as neces-
workshop. sary (Y page 357). The value on the wheel is
valid.
Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-
gency spare wheels.
Emergency spare wheel
General notes
G WARNING
Information regarding permitted emergency
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of spare wheels can be found at an authorized
the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel Mercedes-Benz Center.
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mounting the emergency spare wheel is descri-
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may bed under "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 375).
Wheels and tires
severely impair the driving characteristics. An emergency spare wheel may also be moun-
There is a risk of an accident. ted against the direction of rotation. Observe
the time restriction on use as well as the speed
To avoid hazardous situations:
limitation specified on the emergency spare
Radapt your driving style accordingly and wheel.
drive carefully. Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
When you are driving with the collapsible spare
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning
wheel of a different size briefly. system or the tire pressure monitor cannot func-
Rdo not switch ESP® off. tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
warning system or tire pressure monitor when
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare the defective wheel has been replaced with a
wheel of a different size replaced at the new wheel.
nearest qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions mounting an emergency spare wheel, the sys-
as well as the tire type must be correct. tem may still display the tire pressure of the
removed wheel for a few minutes. The value dis-
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with played for the mounted emergency spare wheel
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel: only is not the same as the current tire pressure of
use the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel the emergency spare wheel.
on the rear axle. If you mount the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the
front axle, this could result in damage to the
brake system.
Emergency spare wheel 381
Removing/stowing the emergency

spare wheel
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel under the cargo compart-
ment floor
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 375).
Example image: vehicle without a lockable
cargo compartment floor.
Removing the emergency spare wheel
X Detach fastening straps ;.
X Unhook retaining spring hooks : and = of
fastening straps ; from the cargo tie-down
rings.
X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with
the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
X Open the emergency spare wheel bag and
remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel.
Stowing the emergency spare wheel
Removing the emergency spare wheel X Place the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards into the emergency spare wheel bag and
(Y page 307). close the emergency spare wheel bag.
Wheels and tires

X Place the emergency spare wheel bag with
X Vehicles with a lockable cargo compart-
ment floor: remove the stowage tray. the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel into
the cargo compartment with the carrying
X Release the Velcro fastener (Y page 339).
strap at the back.
X Take out the jack. X Hook retaining spring hooks : and = of
X Turn emergency spare wheel retainer : fastening straps ; into the cargo tie-down
counter-clockwise and remove it. rings.
X Remove stowage well ;. X Tighten fastening straps ;.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
=. Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collaps-
ible spare wheel under the cargo com-
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency partment floor
spare wheel in the emergency spare
wheel bag ! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in the
vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture
Always observe the instructions and safety may get into the vehicle.
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section Always observe the instructions and safety
(Y page 375). notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
On vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen sound sys- (Y page 375).
tem, the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is The collapsible spare wheel can be found in the
packed in an emergency spare wheel bag. The stowage well under the cargo compartment
emergency spare wheel bag is secured to the floor.
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment.
Z
382 Emergency spare wheel
On Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a Bang & Oluf-

sen sound system, the collapsible spare wheel is
packed in an emergency spare wheel bag. The
emergency spare wheel bag is secured to the
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment.

X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
(Y page 307).
X Unscrew retaining screw ; counter-clock-
wise.
X Remove collapsible spare wheel : from the
spare wheel well. X Unhook retaining spring hooks : of fasten-
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel ing strap ; from the cargo tie-down rings.
(Y page 382). X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with
Take the following steps to stow a used collaps- the emergency collapsible spare wheel.
ible spare wheel. Otherwise, it will not fit into the X Open the bag and remove the emergency col-
spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends lapsible spare wheel.
that you have this work performed at a qualified Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized (Y page 382).
Wheels and tires

X Place the collapsible spare wheel into the
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve. emergency spare wheel bag and close the
X If possible, unscrew the valve insert from the emergency spare wheel bag.
valve and release the air. X Place the emergency spare wheel bag with
i Fully deflating the tires can take a few the collapsible spare wheel into the cargo
minutes. compartment with the carrying strap at the
back.
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
X Hook retaining spring hooks : of fastening
X Screw the valve cap back on.
strap ; into the cargo tie-down rings.
X Lay collapsible spare wheel : in the emer-
X Tighten fastening strap ;.
gency spare wheel well.
X Screw in retaining screw ; clockwise in the
collapsible spare wheel to the stop.
X Swing the cargo compartment floor down Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
(Y page 307). (Mercedes-AMG GLS 63 4MATIC)
! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a collaps- tire inflation compressor before lowering the
ible spare wheel in the emergency vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be
spare wheel bag damaged.
Always observe the instructions and safety ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section for longer than eight minutes at a time without
(Y page 375). a break. It may otherwise overheat.
Emergency spare wheel 383
The tire inflation compressor can be operated X When the specified tire pressure has been
again once it has cooled down. reached, press on and off switch A on the
Comply with the manufacturer's safety instruc- tire inflation compressor to 0.
tions on the tire inflation compressor label and The tire inflation compressor is switched off.
on the tire sealant bottle. X Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
X Mount the collapsible spare wheel as descri-
tion lock.
bed (Y page 375). X If the tire pressure is higher than the specified
The collapsible spare wheel must be mounted pressure, press pressure release valve but-
before it is inflated. ton : until the correct tire pressure has been
reached.
X Remove the tire inflation compressor from
X Unscrew union nut ; on hose B from the
the stowage space under the cargo compart-
ment floor (Y page 339). valve.
X Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsi-
ble spare wheel again.
X Stow connector ? and hose B in the lower
section of the tire inflation compressor.
X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehi-
cle.
X Pull connector ? and hose B out of the

housing.
Wheels and tires

X Remove the cap from the valve on the col-
lapsible spare wheel.
X Screw union nut ; of hose B onto the valve.
X Make sure on/off switch A of the tire infla-
tion compressor is set to 0.
X Insert connector ? into a socket in your vehi-
cle.
Cigarette lighter socket: (Y page 312)
12 V sockets: (Y page 312)
Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter
(Y page 312). Observe the notes on sockets
(Y page 312).
X Press on and off switch A on the tire inflation
compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown
on pressure gauge =.
X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure.
The specified tire pressure is printed on the
yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
Z
384 Vehicle electronics
Information regarding technical data In particular, the following conditions must be

complied with:
i The data stated here specifically refers to a Ronly approved wavebands may be used
vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an Robserve the maximum permissible output
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the in these wavebands
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Ronly approved antenna positions may be
used
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
Vehicle electronics may cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into
Installing two-way radios and mobile account current scientific discussions relating
phones (RF transmitters) to the possible health hazards that may result
from electromagnetic fields.
G WARNING The following antenna positions may be used for
The electromagnetic radiation from two-way the correct installation of two-way radios:
radios can interfere with the vehicle electron-
ics if two-way radios are manipulated or ret-
rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardize the
operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
You should have all work on electrical and
electronic components carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you incorrectly operate two-way radios in
the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation Approved antenna positions
may interfere with the vehicle electronics, for : Rear roof area
example if: ; Rear fender
Technical data
Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an i On the rear fenders, it is recommended to

exterior antenna position the antenna on the side of the vehicle
closest to the center of the road.
Rthe exterior antenna is not correctly moun-
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
ted or is not low-reflection
(Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for installa-
This could jeopardize the operating safety of tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. equipment") when installing wireless devices.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna Observe the legal requirements for accessory
parts.
installed at a qualified specialist workshop.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
Always connect two-way radios to the low-
equipment, use the power supply or antenna
reflection exterior antenna when operating in connections intended for use with the basic wir-
the vehicle. ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-
plement when installing.
! The operating permit may be invalidated if Deviations with respect to frequency bands,
the instructions for installation and use of maximum transmission outputs or antenna
two-way radios are not observed. positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Identification plates 385
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the Identification plates

base of the antenna must not exceed the fol-
lowing values: Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
Frequency band Maximum
cle identification number (VIN)
transmission
output
Short wave 100 W
3 - 54 MHz
4 m waveband 30 W
74 - 88 MHz
2 m waveband 50 W
144 - 174 MHz
Trunked radio system/ 10 W
Tetra X Open the driver's door.
380 - 460 MHz You will see vehicle identification plate :.
70 cm waveband 35 W
400 - 460 MHz
Mobile communications 10 W
(2G/3G/4G)
The following can be used in the vehicle without

restrictions:
RTwo-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW
RTwo-way radios with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-
Technical data
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
mum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio/Tetra) ; Paint code
RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) = VIN
There are no restrictions when positioning the
antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the
following wavebands:
RTrunked radio system/Tetra
R70 cm waveband
R2G/3G/4G
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

; Paint code
= VIN
i The data shown on the vehicle identification
plate is used only as an example. This data is
different for every vehicle and can deviate
Z
386 Service products and filling capacities
from the data shown here. You can find the Service products and filling capaci-
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle ties
identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN) G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
Dispose of service products in an environ-
X Open the front right-hand door. mentally responsible manner.
X Open cover : in the direction of the arrow
and remove it. Service products include the following:
You will see the VIN. RFuels
The VIN can also be found in the following loca- RExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.
tions: DEF
Ron the lower edge of the windshield RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
(Y page 386) RCoolant
Ron the vehicle identification plate RBrake fluid
(Y page 385) RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Technical data
Components and service products must match.

Engine number You should therefore only use products that
have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
You can identify service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on
the container:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indi-
cate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
229.5). They have not necessarily been
: Emission control information plate, includ-
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
ing the certification of both federal and Cali- Other identifications, for example:
fornian emissions standards R0 W-30
; Engine number (stamped into the crank- R5 W-30
case) R5 W-40
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Service products and filling capacities 387
Fuel Model Of which

reserve
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx.
G WARNING 3.7 US gal
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel (14.0 l)
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- All other models Approx.
sion. 3.2 US gal
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating (12.0 l)
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before Gasoline
refueling.
Fuel grade
G WARNING ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
There is a risk of injury. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
You must make sure that fuel does not come Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing result in damage to the fuel system and the
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
completely.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following: ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-
out delay.
Technical data
age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- system.
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ! Do not use the following:
ing.
RGasoline with more than 10% ethanol
RImmediately change out of clothing which
RE100 (100% ethanol)
has come into contact with fuel. RGasoline with methanol
RM100 (100% methanol)
Tank capacity RGasoline with metalliferous additives
RDiesel
Model Total capa-
city Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
mended for your vehicle.
All models 26.4 US gal
(100.0 l) ! To ensure the longevity and full perform-
ance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleaded gasoline must be used.
Z
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable Diesel

and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline
of a lower grade, observe the following pre- Fuel grade
cautions:
G WARNING
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular
unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre- If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
possible. When the engine is running, exhaust system
RDo not drive at the maximum speed. components could overheat without being
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine noticed. There is a risk of fire.
speeds over 3,000 rpm. Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
You will usually find information about the fuel with diesel fuel.
grade on the fuel pump. If you cannot find the
label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff. ! Only use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD),
otherwise it may lead to increased wear and
i For more information, please contact a damage to the fuel system, engine and
qualified specialist workshop or visit
exhaust system.
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
As a temporary measure, if the recommended ! Do not use the following:
fuel is not available, you may also use regular Rgasoline
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of Rdiesel with a bio-diesel content greater
87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per- than 5% (e.g. B20)
formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid Rbio-diesel
driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.
Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI. Rvegetable oil
Information on refueling (Y page 156). Rparaffin

Rkerosene
Additives Rmarine diesel
! Operating the engine with fuel additives Rheating oil
added later can lead to engine failure. Do not Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do
mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not not use any special additives. Otherwise,
Technical data
include additives for the removal and preven- engine damage may occur.
tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be
mixed with additives recommended by ! In countries outside USA and Canada, only
Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions use sulfur-free diesel with a sulfur content
for use on the product label. More information under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission con-
about recommended additives can be trol system could be damaged.
obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz You will usually find information about the fuel
Center. grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran- on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.
ded fuels that have additives. Information on refueling (Y page 156).
The fuel quality available in some countries may
not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the Low outside temperatures
fuel injection system as a result. In such cases, i Diesel fuel with improved cold flow proper-
and in consultation with an authorized ties is available during the winter months.
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed Further information about fuel properties can
with the cleaning additive recommended by be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at gas
Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes stations.
and mixing ratios specified on the container.
DEF The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaran-

teed.
Filling capacities
Comply with the important safety notes for ser-
vice products when handling DEF (Y page 386).
Model Total capacity
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas
aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: GLS 350 d 4MATIC 10.2 US gal
Rnot poisonous (38.7 l)
Rcolorless and odorless
Rnot flammable
When you open the DEF container, small Engine oil
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.
General notes
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous
membranes and to the eyes. You may experi-
ence a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and
throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are
possible.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank
only in well-ventilated areas.
Low outside temperatures

DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately
12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle is delivered from the
factory equipped with a DEF preheating system.
Winter operation can thus be guaranteed even ! Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with
at temperatures below 12 ‡ (-11 †). specifications deviating from those expressly
required for the prescribed service intervals.
Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in
Additives order to set replacement intervals longer than
Technical data
those prescribed. This could otherwise cause
! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO damage to the engine or exhaust gas after-
22241. Do not use additives with DEF and do treatment.
not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy
the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment sys- Follow the instructions on the service interval
tem. display for changing the engine oil. This could
otherwise cause damage to the engine or
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Purity
When handling engine oil, observe the important
! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other service safety notes on service products (Y page 386).
products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to: The engine oils are matched to the performance
Rincreased emission values of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
Rdamage to the catalytic converter
You should therefore only use engine oils and oil
filters that are approved for vehicles with main-
Rengine damage
tenance systems.
Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
aftertreatment system consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly impor- Alternatively, visit the website
tant with respect to avoiding malfunctions in the http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. The table shows which engine oils have been
If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during approved for your vehicle.
repair work, it must not be returned to the tank.
Z
Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe or Comply with the important safety notes for ser-
MB-Approval vice products when handling brake fluid
(Y page 386).
All models 229.5, 229.6 Only use brake fluid approved for Mercedes-
Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 229.5 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can be
Diesel engines MB-Freigabe or obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or
MB-Approval on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
GLS 350 d 4MATIC 229.52
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop in accordance
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: only use SAE 0W-40 with the replacement intervals and the
or SAE 5W-40 engine oils. replacement confirmed in the service report.
i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-
ers.
Coolant
Filling capacities Important safety notes
The following values refer to an engine oil
change, including the oil filter. G WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
Model Capacity
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
GLS 350 d 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
GLS 550 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
Mercedes‑AMG freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
vehicles next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
antifreeze from components before starting
All other models 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
the engine.
Technical data
Additives ! Only add coolant that has been premixed

with the desired antifreeze protection. You
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. could otherwise damage the engine.
This could damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be found
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
Brake fluid Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-
G WARNING tact a qualified specialist workshop.
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of in countries where high temperatures prevail.
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the sufficiently protected from corrosion and
brake system when the brakes are applied overheating.
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
There is a risk of an accident. qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
You should have the brake fluid renewed at ment confirmed in the service report.
the specified intervals. Comply with the important safety notes for ser-
vice products when handling coolant
(Y page 386).
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- Windshield washer system

freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for
the following: Important safety notes
Ranti-corrosion protection
Rantifreeze protection
G WARNING
Rraising the boiling point Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
during operation is approximately 266 ‡ fire and injury.
(130 †). Make sure that no windshield washer con-
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
concentration in the engine cooling system
should: ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine washer fluid should be mixed together. The
cooling system against freezing down to spray nozzles may otherwise become
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). blocked.
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-
to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.
dissipated as effectively. When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ tant safety notes on service products
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance (Y page 386).
with MB Specifications for Service Products
At temperatures above freezing:
310.1.
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate SummerFit.
antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
i The coolant is checked at specified intervals At temperatures below freezing:
at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
Filling capacities
Technical data
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-
Model Capacity mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
Mercedes‑AMG Approx. 11.9 US qt i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-

vehicles (11.3 l) merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
year round.
GLS 350 d 4MATIC Approx. 12.2 US qt
(11.5 l)
GLS 550 4MATIC Approx. 12.0 US qt Climate control system refrigerant
(11.4 l)
All other models Approx. 10.3 US qt
(9.7 l) The climate control system of your vehicle is fil-
led with refrigerant R‑134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with
any other PAG oil that is not approved for
Z
392 Vehicle data
R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate Vehicle data

control system may be damaged.
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or General notes
replacing component parts, may only be carried Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-
cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:
must be adhered to. - tires
Always have work on the climate control system - load
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. - condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Refrigerant instruction label Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload.
Observe the information relating to level con-
trol:
RAIRMATIC package (Y page 190)
ROffroad Engineering package (Y page 220)
Dimensions and weights
Example: refrigerant instruction label

: Warning symbol
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
? PAG oil part number
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol : advises you about:
Technical data
RPossible dangers
RHaving service work carried out at a qualified Missing values were not available at time of
specialist workshop going to print.
Model : ;
Filling capacities Opening Max.
height headroom
Refrigerant Capacity
All models Mercedes-
45.9 ± 0.4 oz
AMG vehicles
(1300 ± 10 g)
PAG oil Capacity

All models 3.9 ± 0.4 oz
(110 ± 10 g)
Vehicle data for off-road driving 393
All other mod- : ; All other models

els with: Opening Max. Maximum vehicle height 76.4 in
height headroom (ON&OFFROAD package) (1940 mm)
AIRMATIC 83.9 in - 76.1 in - Minimum vehicle height 72.8 in
package 86.9 in 79.1 in
(1850 mm)
(2132 mm - (1934 mm -
2207 mm) 2009 mm) Wheelbase 121.1 in
ON&OFFROAD 83.9 in - 76.1 in - (3075 mm)
package 88.1 in 80.3 in Maximum ground clear- 10.9 in
(2132 mm - (1934 mm - ance (AIRMATIC package) ( 276 mm)
2237 mm) 2039 mm)
Maximum ground clear- 12.0 in
ance (ON&OFFROAD pack- (306 mm)
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles age)
Vehicle length 203.2 in Minimum ground clear- 7.9 in
(5162 mm) ance (201 mm)
Vehicle width including Turning radius 40.7 ft
exterior mirrors (12.40 m)
Vehicle width without exte- 78.0 in Maximum roof load 220 lb
rior mirrors 1982 mm (100 kg)
Vehicle height 72.9 in
1850 mm
Vehicle data for off-road driving
Wheelbase 121.1 in
3075 mm Fording depth
Maximum ground clear- ! The depth of water must not exceed the
ance value specified in the table. Note that the
Technical data
possible fording depth is less in flowing water.
Minimum ground clear- 7.8 in
ance (198 mm)
Turning radius 40.7 ft
(12.40 m)
Maximum roof load 220 lbs
(100 kg)
All other models

Vehicle length 202.0 in
(5130 mm) : Fording depth
Vehicle width including 84.3 in On vehicles with the AIRMATIC package or the
exterior mirrors (2141 mm) Off-Road Engineering package, loads up to the
maximum permissible load have no influence on
Maximum vehicle height 75.2 in fording capability.
(AIRMATIC package) (1910 mm) Missing values were not available at the time of
going to print.
Z
394 Vehicle data for off-road driving
Fording : ;
depth
Normal level 25° 20°
Vehicles without the Off-
road Engineering package Off-road level 1 28° 23°
Raised level 19.7 in Off-road level 2 30° 25°

(50 cm) Off-road level 3 33° 27°
Vehicles with the Off-Road Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Engineering package
Normal level (in sport mode 19° 19°
Off-road level 1 19.7 in with AMG adaptive sport
(50 cm) suspension system activa-
Off-road level 2 19.7 in ted)
(50 cm) Raised level 22° 21°
Off-road level 3 23.6 in
(60 cm) Vehicles with AMG bodystyling
Mercedes-AMG vehicles : ;
For more information about off-road fording, see
road Engineering package
(Y page 169).
Approach/departure angle Raised level 27° 25°

Vehicles with the Off-
Road Engineering pack-
age
Technical data
Off-road level 1 25° 23°

For further information about approach/depar-

ture angles, see (Y page 173).
All vehicles (except vehicles with AMG body-
styling)
: ; Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-

ity
road Engineering package Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-
bility depends on the off-road conditions and the
Normal level 25° 20° road surface conditions.
Raised level 30° 25° Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package:
the maximum gradient climbing ability is 100 %
Vehicles with the Off- when the LOW RANGE off-road gear is selected.
Road Engineering pack- Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD pack-
age age: the maximum gradient climbing ability is
80 %.
Trailer tow hitch 395
Accelerate carefully and make sure that the Trailer loads

wheels do not spin when driving on steep ter-
rain. Permissible trailer load, braked (at a
i If the load on the front axle is reduced when minimum gradient-climbing capability
pulling away on a steep uphill slope, the front of 12% from a standstill)
wheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS recog-
nizes this and brakes the wheels accordingly. All models 7500 lbs (3402 kg)
The rear wheel torque is increased, making it
easier to drive off.
Maximum drawbar noseweight (the
For further information about the maximum gra- drawbar noseweight is not included in
dient climbing ability, see (Y page 173). the trailer load)
All models 600 lbs (272 kg)
Trailer tow hitch
Mounting dimensions The actual noseweight may not be higher than
the value which is given. The value can be found
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification
changes to the cooling system and drive train plates. The lowest weight applies.
may be necessary, depending on the vehicle The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose-
type. weight is the maximum weight with which the
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, trailer drawbar can be loaded. Limit for
observe the anchorage points on the chassis Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.
frame.
Gross rear axle weight rating when tow-
ing a trailer
All models 3968 lbs (1800 kg)
Ball position of the ball coupling
Technical data
: Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch

; Rear axle center line : 7.5"
; 2"
= 2.75"
When choosing a ball coupling, the dimensions
stated in the illustration must not be exceeded.
Z
396

Your Operator's Manual: Digital Form Inside The Vehicle

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Your Operator's Manual: Digital Form Inside The Vehicle

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Your Operator's Manual

Digital form inside the vehicle

Booklet inside the vehicle

Digital form via the Internet

Digital form as an App

Apple® iOS Android™

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

Memory function ................................. 113

At a glance ........................................... 36 Driving and parking .......................... 139

Features .............................................. 308

Maintenance and care ...................... 325

Breakdown assistance ..................... 338

Wheels and tires ............................... 354

Technical data ................................... 384

1, 2, 3 ... Function/notes ............................. 189

AIRMATIC package AUTO lights

Bag hook ............................................ 305 Brakes

Power washer ................................ 331 Children in the vehicle

Switching the ZONE function Function/notes ............................. 174

Lights ............................................. 260 SETUP (on-board computer,

AMG adaptive sport suspension DYNAMIC SELECT controller

Display message ............................ 261 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-

Important safety notes .................. 387 H

Indicators Knee bag .............................................. 50

Switching the daytime running Remote fault diagnosis .................. 319

see Rear-view mirror O

Off-road programs (vehicles with Important safety notes .................... 30

Sensor range ................................. 193 Protection against theft

Rear seats Warning lamp ................................. 287

Seat belts Service message

Opening/closing .............................. 93 Start/Stop button

SUV see also Digital Operator's Man-

Average weight of the vehicle Service life ..................................... 355

Mounting dimensions .................... 395 Trip computer (on-board com-

Parking .......................................... 161 Overview .......................................... 37

Rear window wiper ........................ 123

Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

cle. The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in

Sports Utility Vehicle G WARNING

The diagnostics connection is only intended for Rrepair work

3 Mercedes Drive QR codes for the rescue card

Services from third parties accelerator and/or brake pedal and

This means that in the event of such conflict, the

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

i In vehicles with multimedia system i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20

Center console, lower section

i Vehicles with the Off-Road Engineering Function Page

Overhead control panel

Function Page Function Page

A p Switches the right- H Buttons for the garage door

B 3 Opens/closes the pan- I Microphone for mbrace

Door control panel

occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-

occupant in the best position in relation to the G WARNING

Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Releasing seat belts

X Press the release button in the belt buckle,

Seat belt adjustment

Introduction ing. Do not lean forward or lean against the

Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,

Front air bags

Window curtain air bags : are integrated into